3300_R70_THB Mitel 3300 ICP Rel 7 0 Tech Handbook

User Manual: Mitel 3300 ICP Rel 7-0 Tech Handbook

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 404

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TECHNICIAN’S HANDBOOK
Release 7.0

NOTICE
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all
respects but is not warranted by Mitel Networks™ Corporation (MITEL®). The
information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in
any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mitel and
its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions
in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued
to incorporate such changes.
No part of this document can be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means - electronic or mechanical - for any purpose without written permission
from Mitel Networks Corporation.

Trademarks
Mitel, SX-2000, SUPERCONSOLE 1000, and SUPERSET are trademarks of
Mitel Networks Corporation.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Cisco is a trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.
VT100 is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Incorporated.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their
respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.

3300 Integrated Communications Platform
Technician’s Handbook
Release 7.0
51009611, Rev. A
May 2006
®,™ Trademark of Mitel Networks Corporation
©Copyright 2006, Mitel Networks Corporation
All rights reserved

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 : Introduction
Purpose of this Handbook ..............................................................................................3
Symbols Used in the Handbook .....................................................................................3
Safety Instructions ..........................................................................................................3
Start Here Guide ...................................................................................................................4
What You Received ........................................................................................................4
Installation Tools and Equipment ....................................................................................4
Installation Checklist .......................................................................................................5
About the 3300 ICP ...............................................................................................................6
Programming Tools ........................................................................................................6
Installation/Maintenance Computer ................................................................................7
Launching the Programming Tools .................................................................................8
3300 ICP Documentation ................................................................................................9
Mitel OnLine ..................................................................................................................10
Contacting Mitel ............................................................................................................11

Chapter 2 : Installation
Install Controller Components .............................................................................................15
Controller Component Options .....................................................................................18
Hard Drive .....................................................................................................................19
LX, 100, 250 and 700-User Hard Drive ........................................................................19
MX Hard Drive ..............................................................................................................19
System ID Module ........................................................................................................20
Other Controller Components .......................................................................................20
Mounting the MXe Controller ........................................................................................20
Connecting the Maintenance PC to the Controller ..............................................................22
Requirements for AMC Connection ....................................................................................23
Basic Programming and Data Save ....................................................................................25
Connecting the Controller to the Network .....................................................................27
Programming DHCP .....................................................................................................29
Install Units ..........................................................................................................................36
Universal or R2 Network Services Unit .........................................................................36
BRI Network Services Unit ...........................................................................................37
Analog Services Unit ....................................................................................................38
Embedded Analog, Configure .......................................................................................39
Peripheral Cabinet ........................................................................................................40
SUPERSET HUB ..........................................................................................................45
Digital Service Unit .......................................................................................................47
Install Telephones and Peripherals .....................................................................................51
Installing Telephones, Consoles and Appliances .........................................................51
Installing Line Interface Modules ..................................................................................52
Programming Phones ...................................................................................................52
Registering IP Devices from the Telephone .................................................................52
Setting Static IP Address on IP Display Set .................................................................54
Installing and Configuring Music on Hold .....................................................................55

iii

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Chapter 3 : Software Procedures
Back Up a Database .......................................................................................................... 61
Restore a Database ........................................................................................................... 63
Upgrade/Install System Software ....................................................................................... 66
Software Upgrade Options ........................................................................................... 66
Upgrade/Install Options with Cluster or Dimension Changes ...................................... 67
Installing the Software Installer Tool ............................................................................ 69
Installing System Software on the FTP Server ............................................................ 70
Installing System Software on the Controller ............................................................... 71
Upgrading System Software ........................................................................................ 72
Applying a Software Patch ........................................................................................... 76
Installing System Software Manually ........................................................................... 77
Upgrading/Installing with Maximum Elements Change ................................................ 83
Upgrade to Rls 6.0 or later with Flexed Dimensions .................................................... 84
Programming Overview ...................................................................................................... 86
Install 6000 MAS Software ................................................................................................. 87
Install and Use IMAT .......................................................................................................... 88
Installing IMAT on the PC ............................................................................................ 88
Programming an IP Address into the NSU .................................................................. 88
Using IMAT .................................................................................................................. 90
Install the Java Plug-In ....................................................................................................... 93

Chapter 4 : Upgrades and FRUs
About this Chapter .............................................................................................................. 97
Safety Considerations .................................................................................................. 98
Upgrade a 3300 ICP ........................................................................................................... 98
Power Down the Controller .......................................................................................... 99
Perform a System Reset .............................................................................................. 99
Removing/Replacing LX/700-User Controller Cover ................................................... 99
Removing/Replacing MX/100-User Controller Cover ................................................ 100
Removing/Replacing CX/CXi/MXe Controller Cover ................................................. 101
Upgrading to a 300 or 450 MHz Controller ................................................................ 102
Upgrading to a 700-User Controller ........................................................................... 103
Add or Replace Controller FRUs ...................................................................................... 104
Dual Fiber Interface Module (FIM) ............................................................................. 104
DSP Module ............................................................................................................... 105
Framer (Dual T1/E1, T1/E1 Combo, Quad BRI) ........................................................ 110
Echo Canceller ........................................................................................................... 112
Analog Option Board (MX Controller) ........................................................................ 113
Analog Option Board (CX/CXi Controller) .................................................................. 114
Add Controller FRUs ........................................................................................................ 116
MXe RAID Controller ................................................................................................. 116
Redundant Hard Drive (MXe) .................................................................................... 117
Application Processor Card (CXi) .............................................................................. 118
APC Hard Drive (CXi) ................................................................................................ 121
Configure the System for 6000 MAS ......................................................................... 122
Redundant Power Supply (MXe) ............................................................................... 123
E2T Processor (MXe) ................................................................................................ 123

Table of Contents

Replace Controller FRUs ..................................................................................................125
Hard Drive Replacement Overview ............................................................................125
LX, 100, 250, 700-User Hard Drive ............................................................................126
MX Hard Drive ............................................................................................................127
MXe Hard Drive, Single ..............................................................................................128
MXe Hard Drive, Redundant .......................................................................................129
MXe Hard Drive, Both Redundant Drives ...................................................................130
CX/CXi Hard Drive ......................................................................................................131
System ID Module ......................................................................................................133
System i-Button (CX/CXi and MXe) ............................................................................133
Analog Main Board (MX Controller) ............................................................................134
Analog Main Board (MXe Controller) ..........................................................................136
Analog Main Board (CX/CXi Controller) .....................................................................137
RTC Processor (MXe) ................................................................................................138
Cooling Fan (MXe) ......................................................................................................139
Power Supply Unit (MXe) ...........................................................................................139
Stratum 3 Clock Module .............................................................................................140
Install ASU II FRUs ...........................................................................................................141
Line Card (16 Port ONS / 4+12 Port Combo) .............................................................141
Power Supply ..............................................................................................................141
Install Peripheral Cabinet FRUs ........................................................................................142
Powering Down the Peripheral Cabinet ......................................................................142
Powering Up the Peripheral Cabinet ..........................................................................143
Replacing Circuit Cards ..............................................................................................143
Replacing a Power Converter .....................................................................................144
Replacing the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) .............................................................145
Replacing a Cooling Fan ............................................................................................146
Replacing the Fiber Interface Module (FIM) ...............................................................147
Expanding a Peripheral Cabinet II ..............................................................................147
Installing an Expanded Peripheral Cabinet .................................................................149
Replacing a Peripheral Switch Controller Card ..........................................................150
Install Digital Service Unit FRUs .......................................................................................151
Removing/Replacing the Front Panel .........................................................................151
Powering Down the DSU Unit .....................................................................................151
Replacing Circuit Cards ..............................................................................................151
Installing a BRI Card ...................................................................................................152
Installing a Formatter Card (CEPT, DS1) ...................................................................154
Installing a PRI Card ...................................................................................................154
Installing a Peripheral Resource Card (PRC) .............................................................156
Replacing a DSU FIM .................................................................................................157
Installing a DSU FIM ...................................................................................................158
Installing an R2 Card ..................................................................................................158
Install SUPERSET HUB FRUs ..........................................................................................161
Installing a Fiber Interface Module ..............................................................................161
Migrate an SX-2000 PBX ..................................................................................................162

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Chapter 5 : Troubleshooting
About this Chapter ............................................................................................................ 167
Troubleshooting Tools ............................................................................................... 168
Using the Phone Debug Option ................................................................................. 170
Using the Dual Mode Phone Debug Option ............................................................... 171
IEEE 802.1X Authentication for IP Phones ................................................................ 176
Before You Contact Technical Support ...................................................................... 179
General Troubleshooting Steps ........................................................................................ 181
View Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 182
Alarm Levels .............................................................................................................. 182
View Alarms ............................................................................................................... 182
Troubleshoot Software ..................................................................................................... 183
Embedded System Management (ESM) ................................................................... 183
Installation and Upgrade ............................................................................................ 183
Downgrading to a Previous Software Release .......................................................... 185
Backup and Restore .................................................................................................. 186
Audio File Downloads ................................................................................................ 188
Troubleshoot Hardware .................................................................................................... 189
Alarms ........................................................................................................................ 189
Embedded T1/E1 (PRI, T1/D4, or MSDN/DPNSS) .................................................... 191
Embedded BRI ........................................................................................................... 193
Network Services Units (NSUs) ................................................................................. 194
Analog Services Units (ASUs) ................................................................................... 196
In-Line Power ............................................................................................................. 197
Power Over Ethernet ................................................................................................. 201
Digital Service Units (DSU) ........................................................................................ 201
Troubleshoot Digital Trunks ............................................................................................. 203
Digital Trunking .......................................................................................................... 203
Troubleshoot the Network ................................................................................................ 204
IP Trunking ................................................................................................................. 204
LAN ............................................................................................................................ 204
E2T ............................................................................................................................ 206
CXi-specific Issues ..................................................................................................... 207
PC Network Connectivity ........................................................................................... 209
IP Phone Registration ................................................................................................ 210
Troubleshoot Phones and Peripherals ............................................................................. 217
Phone Connection ..................................................................................................... 217
Phone Audio Quality .................................................................................................. 222
IP Phone Boot Sequence ........................................................................................... 225
Checking the IP Phone Progress Display .................................................................. 230
IP Console ................................................................................................................. 231

Chapter 6 : Maintenance
General Maintenance Procedures .................................................................................... 235
Checking the System ................................................................................................. 235
Checking Controller Hardware Profile ........................................................................ 235
Maintaining Security ................................................................................................... 236

Table of Contents

View Logs ..........................................................................................................................237
Viewing Maintenance or Software Logs .....................................................................237
Collecting System Logs, Release 5.2 and Later .........................................................238
Collecting System Logs, Release 5.1 .........................................................................239
Viewing Logs Remotely, TCP/IP Socket Numbers .....................................................241
Viewing Login and Logout Audit Logs ........................................................................242
Device Connectivity ...........................................................................................................244
Automatic CESID Update ...........................................................................................244
Monitoring Device Move Detection .............................................................................244
Device Move Detection Procedures ...........................................................................247
Viewing Device Connectivity Logs ..............................................................................247
IP Phone Analyzer ............................................................................................................248
Installing the IP Phone Analyzer .................................................................................248
Launching the IP Phone Analyzer ..............................................................................248
Enabling Tool Analysis ...............................................................................................248
Disabling Tool Analysis ...............................................................................................249
LSMeasure Tool ................................................................................................................250

Appendix A : Hardware Reference
System Configurations ......................................................................................................253
Controller Hardware Details ..............................................................................................253
Controller Cabinet Numbering ....................................................................................259
T1/E1 Combo Card .....................................................................................................259
Dual T1/E1 Framer .....................................................................................................261
Quad BRI Framer .......................................................................................................261
Analog Board (MX Controller) .....................................................................................262
Analog Board (CX and MXe Controllers) ....................................................................264
Controller Alarm Port Pinouts .....................................................................................266
Controller Remote Alarm Behavior .............................................................................266
Network Services Units .....................................................................................................267
Universal/R2 NSU .......................................................................................................267
BRI NSU .....................................................................................................................271
Analog Services Unit .........................................................................................................273
5485 IP Paging Unit ..........................................................................................................278
Peripheral Cabinet ............................................................................................................279
Digital Service Unit ............................................................................................................289
IP Phones ..........................................................................................................................293
Powering Features ......................................................................................................293

Appendix B : Installation Planner
CXi/MXe Requirements for IP Networking ..................................................................297
Controller Configuration Settings (RTC) .....................................................................300
DHCP Configuration Settings .....................................................................................301
Programming E2T via Debug Cable or Secure Telnet ...............................................306
Configuring External DHCP Settings for E2T .............................................................307
Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP Server (prior to Release 7.0) ............................308
Configuring a Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 DHCP Server (Rls 7.0 and later) .....310
System Administration Tool Settings ..........................................................................312

vii

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

IP Phone Settings ...................................................................................................... 312
Telephone Programming Guide ................................................................................. 313

Appendix C : Typical Network Configurations
Network Configuration Examples ..................................................................................... 317
Configuration 1: One DHCP Server per VLAN .......................................................... 318
Configuration 2: One DHCP Server for Two VLANs .................................................. 320
Configuration 3: Router on a Stick ............................................................................. 321
Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) ...................................................................................... 322
CXi/MXe Configuration Procedures ................................................................................. 323
Firewall/Port Forwarding ............................................................................................ 323
PPTP Remote Access ............................................................................................... 323
WAN Settings (Internet Gateway) .............................................................................. 323
Configuration 1: CXi Typical Voice-Only Network ...................................................... 324
Configuration 3: CXi Typical Voice and Data Network ............................................... 326
Configuration 4: MXe Typical Voice and Data Network ............................................. 327
Windows 2000 FTP Server .............................................................................................. 328

Appendix D : Status LEDs
Controller LEDs ................................................................................................................ 333
Power Status, Front Panel ......................................................................................... 335
Hard Drive Activity, Rear Panel, ................................................................................ 335
RAID Controller .......................................................................................................... 336
FIM ............................................................................................................................. 338
LAN Ethernet Ports .................................................................................................... 338
CIM ............................................................................................................................ 340
Controller Alarm ......................................................................................................... 340
Power Supply Unit LEDs ............................................................................................ 342
Dual T1/E1 Framer Module ........................................................................................ 342
T1/E1 Combo Card .................................................................................................... 343
Quad BRI Framer Module .......................................................................................... 345
Network Services Unit LEDs ............................................................................................ 346
Universal/R2 NSU ...................................................................................................... 346
BRI NSU .................................................................................................................... 350
Analog Services Unit LEDs .............................................................................................. 351
ASU II Card LEDs ...................................................................................................... 353
IP Device LEDs ................................................................................................................ 354
Peripheral Cabinet LEDs .................................................................................................. 355
Digital Services Unit LEDs ............................................................................................... 356
In-Line Power Unit LEDs .................................................................................................. 361

Appendix E : FRU Part Numbers
Hardware Part Numbers ............................................................................................ 365
Software Part Numbers .............................................................................................. 371

Appendix F : System Capacity and Parameters
System Parameters .......................................................................................................... 375
Port Usage ................................................................................................................. 375

viii

Table of Contents

Encryption Support .....................................................................................................376
Set Compression ........................................................................................................376
Mitel IP Phone Power Consumption ...........................................................................377
Capacity ............................................................................................................................378
Hardware Capacity .....................................................................................................378
System Capacity .........................................................................................................379

Index.....................................................................................................383

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Chapter 1

Introduction

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Introduction

Purpose of this Handbook
This handbook provides instructions to install, upgrade, maintain and
troubleshoot the Mitel® 3300 Integrated Communications Platform (ICP).
This handbook is written for certified 3300 ICP technicians. For information
on programming tasks, please refer to the System Administration Tool
Help system.

Symbols Used in the Handbook
Tip: Provides additional information you should know about a topic.

Time: Indicates the time it takes to complete a procedure.

CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that
could result in damage to the equipment.
WARNING: INDICATES A HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT
COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH.

Safety Instructions
A printable version of the Safety Instructions is available on the Mitel
Customer Documentation web site.
CAUTION: Failure to follow all instructions may result in
improper equipment operation and/or risk of electrical
shock. Refer to “3300 Safety Instructions” for complete
safety information.
CAUTION: To prevent ESD damage to the equipment: (1)
Ensure that the system is grounded before you install a card.
(2) Whenever you handle cards, wear an anti-static strap
(attached to the cabinet). (3) When removing cards from the
cabinet, immediately place them in an anti-static bag.
Note: The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal to be
connected to an external protective conductor. Connect this terminal to
earth ground before you make any other connections to the equipment.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Start Here Guide
What You Received
Options sheet with password from Mitel OnLine (see page 11)
3300 ICP Controller
Hard drive
System ID module or System i-Button
Software CD-ROM
NSU, ASU (optional)
Set of feet, rack ears, and screws for each unit
Review your purchase order for other, optional, components.

Installation Tools and Equipment
Installation Planner (Appendix B on page 295)
Typical Network Configurations (Appendix C on page 317)
Computer for programming the 3300 ICP
CAT 5 or better Cable with RJ-45 connector
IP addresses for the controller, E2T, and IP telephones
List of purchased options and password
IMAT (not required if you have Embedded PRI)
Phillips screwdrivers
Static strap.

Introduction

Installation Checklist
Obtain your options and password from Mitel OnLine
Complete the Installation Planner Appendix (see page 295)
Install controller hardware (see page 15)
Connect maintenance PC to Controller (see page 22)
Power up the Controller (see page 22)
Launch the System Administration Tool (see page 8)
Program the License and Options Selection (see page 25)
Perform a DBMS Save (see page 25)
Set the Date and Time (see page 26)
Program the Controller modules (see page 26)
Establish an Ethernet connection to the Controller (see page 27)
Set the Controller RTC IP address (see page 28)
Program the DHCP server (see page 29)
Configure the Layer 2 switch (see page 35)
Install NSU, ASU, Peripheral Cabinet, DSU, SUPERSET™ Hub
(page 36)
Program Units and Modules (follows each installation procedure)
Install Telephones (see page 51)
Register IP Devices (see page 52)
Program Telephones (see page 54)
Install a DNIC Music on Hold /Paging Unit (see page 57)
Program Trunks (see System Administration Tool OnLine Help)
Program Automatic Route Selection (see OnLine Help)
Program Voice Mail (see OnLine Help)
Program Paging (see OnLine Help)
Program Music on Hold (see OnLine Help)
Program Automatic Call Distribution (see OnLine Help)
Program Hotel/Motel (see OnLine Help)
Perform a DBMS Save (see page 25)

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

About the 3300 ICP
The 3300 ICP is a Voice over IP solution that delivers voice capabilities
and features to the enterprise. There are several system configurations:
the 100-user system; the MX with embedded analog, that can support 200
users; the CX and the CXi with embedded analog and embedded Layer2
switch for sites with an 8-64 line size; the MXe base with embedded analog
that can support 200 users before expansion; and the LX that can support
700 users (with 256 MB RTC memory) or 1400 users (with 512 MB RTC
memory from Release 6.0).

Programming Tools
The system includes a number of programming tools:
•

Embedded System Management (ESM) consists of:
-

System Administration Tool that provides a Web-based interface
that trained technicians use to program the system.

Group Administration Tool that provides a Web-based interface
to enable administrators to make changes to user information.

Desktop Tool that provides a Web-based interface to enable
display IP telephone users to program feature keys on their phone.

•

Configuration Wizard, introduced with Release 7.0, allows you to
customize initial system programming. After you specify the system
setup, you can save the details for future use or apply the changes to
the 3300 ICP.

•

ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool (IMAT) provides the
programming interface for PRI and R2 protocols delivered via an NSU
or DSU. Embedded PRI via the Dual T1/E1 Framer is programmed
though the System Administration Tool.

•

ICP Software Installer Tool expedites the distribution of 3300 ICP
software by eliminating a number of interactive steps (see page 69).
The tool restores saved databases and, from Release 7.0 UR1,
enables databases from legacy SX-2000® LIGHT, SX-2000
MicroLIGHT, 3200 ICP, and 3800 WAG systems to migrate to the
3300 ICP. The Software Installer Tool replaces the Configuration Tool.

•

Configuration Tool restores saved databases and enables legacy
SX-2000® LIGHT, SX-2000 MicroLIGHT, 3200 ICP, and 3800 WAG
systems to migrate to the 3300 ICP.

Introduction

•

IP Phone Analyzer collects performance information about the IP
devices connected to the 3300 ICP. You can use one PC to monitor
the debug and status information of IP phones (see page 248).

•

OPS Manager enables you to control the maintenance and operation
of a network of elements. With OPS Manager, you can, for example,
manage a network telephone directory, schedule move, add, change,
and delete user operations, and integrate the network telephone
directory with a directory service database.

Application Management Center (AMC)
The online licensing process, managed by the Mitel Application
Management Centre (AMC) allows Solution Providers who have accounts
on the AMC to manage software licenses online. Each company is able to
supply customers instantly if new licenses are required. Refer to
“Requirements for AMC Connection” on page 23 for Software Installer
Tool and 3300 ICP system networking requirements.

Installation/Maintenance Computer
You need a Windows-based computer to program, maintain and
troubleshoot the 3300 ICP, and to install/upgrade 3300 ICP software.
Computer Recommendations
•

Windows® NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

Computer Requirements
•

Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

•

Network interface card (NIC)

•

525 MB free disk space (minimum)

•

Internet Explorer 6.0 with the latest Service Pack and 128-bit
encryption

•

VT100™ emulator program

•

FTP server (can be installed with Microsoft® IIS or PWS, for example)
Tip: Windows 98 with PWS does NOT include an FTP server application,
and will not work for the software installation/upgrade process unless a
third-party server application is used.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Launching the Programming Tools
Embedded System Management Tools
To log into one of the ESM tools:
1. Launch a browser and go to the URL of the 3300 Controller https:///main.htm ( is the name or IP address
assigned to the Controller if no DNS is available). Refer to “Setting the
Controller RTC IP address (for Release 6.0 and later)” on page 27 or
“Setting the Controller RTC IP address (prior to Release 6.0)” on
page 28.
2. The first time you connect, you must install the Mitel Root CA security
certificate (see “Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Security Certificate”
on page 236).
3. Log into the 3300 ICP ESM using the default username (system) and
password (password).
Tip: To prevent unauthorized use, change the username and password the
first time you log in.

4. Click the desired Tool (Desktop, Group Administration, or System
Administration).
5. You will be prompted to install some XML Components when you log
into the System Administration Tool for the first time. At the following
prompt, "Do you wish to install or upgrade the required XML
components?", click "Install Now". The install takes less than 30
seconds and you do not need to restart your computer.
Tip: Your PC must have the same subnet address as the RTC IP (for
example, 192.168.1.x) to launch ESM.
The system will allow up to 5 System Administration Tool users, 5 Group
Administration Tool users, and 10 Desktop Tool users at one time.
The System Administration Tool will temporarily lock you out for 15 minutes
after three consecutive attempts to log in have failed.

ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool
To launch IMAT on the Installation/Maintenance PC:
•

On the Start menu, point to Programs, and click IMAT.

Introduction

Software Installer Tool
To launch the Software Installer Tool:
•

On the Start menu, point to Programs, and click Mitel 3300 ICP
Software Installer Tool.

IP Phone Analyzer
To launch the IP Phone Analyzer:
•

On the Start menu, point to Programs, and click Mitel IP Phone
Analyzer (see page 248 for details).

3300 ICP Documentation
The 3300 ICP documentation set includes the following components:
•

•

Printed documents (also available on Mitel OnLine)
-

General Information Guide

Technician’s Handbook

Safety Instructions

Documents on Mitel OnLine
-

Hardware Technical Reference Manual

System Administration Tool Help

Voice Clustering (Portable Directory Number)

Resiliency

IP Phone Analyzer Online Help

Software Installer Tool Help

IP-DECT Wireless Solution Documentation

CITELlink Gateway Documentation

Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone Installation and Programming
Instructions

SpectraLink Documentation

Engineering Guidelines

Telephone, Attendant, and Voice Mail User Guides

6000 Managed Application Server (MAS) Documentation

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

•

Online Help
-

System Administration Tool Online Help

Group Administration Tool Embedded Help

Desktop Tool Embedded Help

IMAT Online Help

IP Phone Analyzer Online Help

Software Installer Tool Online Help

OPS Manager Online Help
Tip: In the software application (System Administration Tool, IMAT,
etc.), click the Help link or button to access the tool’s Online Help.

•

Knowledge Base Articles on Mitel OnLine
-

Technical Bulletin

How-To Guide

Troubleshooting Guide

Known Product Issue

Release Notes

Program Information.

Mitel OnLine
You can access Mitel OnLine from the www.mitel.com Web site.
Tip: You must be a registered user to access Mitel OnLine.

Access Product and Technical Documentation
1. Log into Mitel OnLine.
2. Click Technical Support.
3. Click Product Documentation for Technical Documents, User
Guides, and Installation Guides.
-ORClick Knowledge Base for TBs and RNs.
Tip: To view a document, click on the name of the document.

To download a document, right-click on the name of the document
and select Save Target As.

Introduction

Create Telephone User Guides with ManualMaker
1. Log into Mitel OnLine.
2. Click Technical Support and then click Product Documentation.
3. Click ManualMaker.
4. Click the Help button for instructions on creating User Guides with
ManualMaker.
Access Your Mitel Options Password
You must obtain your Mitel Options Password through Mitel OnLine
(www.mitel.com). This password is required during a software upgrade or
installation procedure, so you MUST keep a proper record of it. A new
password is issued to you if you are purchasing new options. Before
attempting to upgrade software, to confirm a current password or to
purchase new options and receive a new password, call Mitel Customer
Service during normal business hours.

Contacting Mitel
Sending Feedback
If you have suggestions on how to improve this documentation, please
contact us at techpubs@mitel.com.
Order Desk
You can reach the Order Desk at 1-800-796-4835.
Repair Department
You must get a Return of Merchandise Authorization (RMA) form from the
Repairs Department before sending equipment back to Mitel.
You can reach the Repairs Department at 1-888-222-6483.
Technical Support
Please contact Mitel Technical Support if you require technical assistance.
If you cannot resolve the problem by using the Troubleshooting chapter
(page 165), please collect the required information listed in the applicable
section(s) of the Troubleshooting chapter before calling Mitel Technical
Support.
You can reach Technical Support at 1-800-561-0860 or 1-613-592-2122.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Chapter 2

Installation

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Installation

Install Controller Components
This chapter contains instructions on how to install a 3300 ICP. For
information on upgrading and replacing components, see page 104.
In the following illustrations, the components listed in bold text are
installed in the factory (Release 7.0 and later). If you receive a
CX/CXi/MXe and those identified components are not installed, refer to
Chapter 4 on page 95 for installation instructions.

Power Supply

Tip: In the following illustrations, T1/E1 refers to Dual T1/E1 or T1/E1 Combo,
with exception of the CX/CXi controllers which support only the Combo.

Slot 8
DSP

Slot 7
DSP

Slot 6
Echo Canceller or
DSP

Slot 5
Echo Canceller

Slot 2
FIM, T1/E1, or
BRI

Slot 3
FIM, DSP, T1/E1,
or BRI

Slot 4
FIM, DSP

SysID
Slot 1
FIM, T1/E1, or
BRI

Figure 1: Slot Locations for the LX, 250, and 700-User Controllers

Power
Supply

Analog Main Board
Analog Option Board
Clock Module

Slot 1
FIM, T1/E1, or
BRI

Hard Drive

(optional, installed on AMB)

Slot 2
FIM, DSP, T1/E1,
BRI

Slot 3
DSP, T1/E1, or
BRI

SysID
Slot 4
DSP

Figure 2: Slot Locations for the MX Controller

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Hard Drive
or RAID

Analog Main Board

Clock Module
Slot 6
DSP or Echo Canceller
Slot 1
FIM, T1/E1,
BRI

Slot 2
FIM, T1/E1,
BRI

PSU 2

PSU 1

Slot 5
DSP or Echo Canceller
Slot 3
FIM, DSP,
T1/E1, BRI

i-Button

Slot 4
FIM, DSP,
T1/E1, BRI

Figure 3: Slot Locations for the MXe Controller

Hard Drive

Analog Main Board
Analog Option Board

Power
Supply

(optional)

Clock Module
Slot 1
Combo (T1/E1,
DSP, Echo), BRI

Slot 2
Combo (T1/E1,
DSP, Echo), BRI

i-Button

Slot 3
DSP

16 Port Ethernet
L2 Switch

Figure 4: Slot Locations for the CXi Controller
(with an Ethernet L2 Switch)

Hard Drive

Analog Main Board
Analog Option Board

Power
Supply

(both optional)

Clock Module
Slot 1
Combo (T1/E1,
DSP, Echo), BRI

Slot 2
Combo (T1/E1,
DSP, Echo), BRI

i-Button

Slot 3
DSP

Figure 5: Slot Locations for the CX Controller
(without an Ethernet L2 Switch)

Power Supply

Installation

SysID
Slot 1
FIM, T1/E1, or
BRI

Slot 2
FIM, T1/E1, or
BRI

Slot 3
DSP or BRI

Slot 4
DSP

Figure 6: Slot Locations for 100-User Controller
Read the Safety Instructions before performing the procedures in this
chapter (see “Safety Instructions” on page 3).
CAUTION: To prevent ESD damage to the equipment: (1)
Ensure that the system is grounded before you install a
card. (2) Whenever you handle cards, wear an anti-static
strap (always attach the wrist strap from the cabinet).
Tip: Before installing a 3300 ICP, always read the RN for the software you
are installing (see “3300 ICP Documentation” on page 9).

CAUTION: All installation, field replacement, and servicing
procedures must be carried out by service personnel who
have successfully completed the Mitel Installation and maintenance training course.
CAUTION: Provide a permanent ground for all controllers
and units, through the ground connection on each cabinet.
Connect the installation/maintenance PC to the Controller (page 22)
Power up the Controller (see page 22)
Launch the System Administration Tool (see page 8)
Complete basic programming and Data Save (see page 25)
Establish an Ethernet connection to the Controller (see page 27)
Set the Controller RTC IP address (see page 28)
Program the DHCP server (see page 29)
Configure the Layer 2 switch (see page 35)
Install the Units (see page 36)
Install the Telephones and peripherals (see page 51)

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Controller Component Options
Table 1: Controller Component and Upgrade Options
3001

Processor speed

450

266

100

250

700

MXe5

CX4

CIM

√

—

FIM (page 104)

√

—

DSP (page 105)

√

√2

√

T1/E1 (page 110)

√

—

BRI (page 110)

√

T1/E1 Combo
(page 111)

√

AMB (page 136)

—

√

AOB (page 114)

—

√

AMB (page 134)

—

√

—

AOB (page 113)

—

√

—

Redundant Power
Supply (page 123)

—

√

—

RAID controller
(page 116)

—

√

—

E2T (page 123)

—

√

—

Upgrading to a 300 or
450 MHz Controller
(page 102)

—

√

—

Upgrading to a
1400-User System

—

√3

√6

—

Components

Note: 1. Requires 3300 ICP software version 3.2 or higher.
2. 64 compression channels requires a minimum 300 MHz controller.
3. Requires a controller with 512 MB of memory on the RTC
(Rls 6.0 or later).
4. The CX only supports Release 6.0 or later software.
5. Release 7.0 and later software.
6. Requires the installation of a second processor, the E2T.
7. Refer to page 365 for component part numbers.

Installation

Hard Drive
CAUTION: If you move a programmed hard drive from one
controller type to another (for example, an MX system to an LX
or CX system), you MUST manually install the software (see
page 77) and restore the database. A new hard drive purchased from Mitel is configured for installation in any system.
Tip: The CX/CXi/MXe controllers are shipped with the hard drive installed.
If you receive a CX/CXi/MXe and the hard drive is not installed, refer to
page 128 or page 131 for installation instructions.

LX, 100, 250 and 700-User Hard Drive
To install a new hard drive in a new LX/100/250/700-user controller:
1. Remove the controller from its packaging.
2. Remove the hard drive and attached backing plate from its packaging.
3. Locate the hard drive ribbon cable and power cable in the controller
hard drive enclosure.
4. Cut and discard the tie wrap securing the cables to the controller
stand-off post.
5. Connect the power and ribbon cables in the hard drive enclosure to the
corresponding connectors on the hard drive.
6. Insert the hard drive.
7. Secure the plate to the controller using the 6 border screws provided
with the hard drive.

MX Hard Drive
To install a new hard drive in a new MX controller:
1. Remove the controller and hard drive from their packaging.
2. Remove the top cover of the controller (see page 100).
3. Discard the backing plate that is shipped with the hard drive.
4. Locate the hard drive ribbon cable and power cable in the controller
hard drive enclosure.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

5. Connect the power and ribbon cables to the corresponding connectors
on the hard drive.
6. Insert the hard drive.
7. Secure the hard drive to the controller using the screws provided.

System ID Module
Tip: The CX/CXi/MXe controllers are shipped with the i-Button installed. If
you receive a CX/CXi/MXe and the i-Button is not installed, refer to page 133
for installation instructions.

To install a SysID module in a LX/MX/100/250/700-user controller:
1. Remove the System ID module from its packaging.
2. Remove the protective cover from the System ID module’s connector.
3. Remove the controller cover (see page 99 or page 100).
4. Install the module connector in its mate on the controller.
-

100-user controller: behind slot 2

MX controller: behind slot 4

LX and 250/700-User controller: between slots 1 and 8.

5. Secure the System ID module using the screw provided.

Other Controller Components
Refer to “Upgrades and FRUs” on page 95 for instructions to install
additional controller components.

Mounting the MXe Controller
Tip: Mount the MXe in a rack without the hard drives and power supplies to
reduce the weight.

To rack-mount the MXe:
1. Attach the mounting brackets to the MXe using the flat head screws
provided.
2. Loosely install one frame mounting screw on each side of the frame:
-

in the bottom hole position of the space that the MXe will occupy.

Installation

loosely enough that the frame mounting bracket can be dropped
into position, resting on the screw thread (see Figure 7).

3. Position the MXe on the frame, resting the MXe mounting brackets on
the frame mounting screw thread.
-

The MXe will rest on those screws while the remaining screws are
installed.

4. Install two more screws on each side of the frame, in the 3rd and 6th
hole positions.
5. Tighten all six of the mounting screws.
CAUTION: Remove the MXe from the rack in reverse order.
Loosen the bottom screws before the other screws are
removed.
Never turn the bottom screws while the rack is resting on
them.

Figure 7: MXe Rack-mount Screw Placement

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Connecting the Maintenance PC to the
Controller
1. Connect an RS-232 straight DTE male to female serial cable between
the controller’s Maintenance port and the PC’s serial port (cable not
provided).
2. Program the PC’s serial port (from the communication program) with
the following settings:
- Baud Rate: 9600
- Data Bits: 8
- Parity: None
- Stop Bits: 1
- Flow Control: None
3. Connect a straight-through Ethernet cable (RJ-45) from the controller
leftmost Ethernet port (port 17 on the CXi; port 1 on the MXe) and the
PC’s network interface card (NIC).
4. Program the PC’s NIC with the following settings:
- IP Address: 192.168.1.n (where n is a value between 30 and 254)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Powering Up the Controller
1. Connect the female end of the power cable to the controller, and
secure it with the latch (if provided).
2. Connect the other end of the power cable to a protected outlet. If
necessary turn on power switch. The controller turns on.
Time: The controller can take up to 10-15 minutes to start-up.

Verify the Connections
Perform the steps below to verify the connections between the
Maintenance PC and the controller.
1. To verify the serial connection, in the VT100 emulator, press ENTER.
- If the serial connection is installed and programmed properly, a
right-pointing arrow (→) is displayed when you press ENTER.
2. To verify the Ethernet connection, from the PC, PING the controller’s
RTC IP address (default is 192.168.1.2).
- If the connection is installed and programmed correctly, the
controller replies to the PING.

Installation

Requirements for AMC Connection
Connecting to the Application Management Center (AMC) Server requires
specific settings for the Software Installer Tool and the 3300 System
Administration Tool.
Software Installer (SI) Tool Requirements
The PC that is running the SI Tool has the following network requirements:
1. DNS Name Resolution: Because the SI win32sync client performs a
name lookup on “register.mitel-amc.com”, the SI host PC needs to be
properly configured for DNS name resolution.
2. TCP/IP Source Port on the SI Host: A Windows operating system will
use an arbitrary high port for the TCP connection to the AMC. If the SI
PC is behind a firewall, the firewall must allow connections from high
ports (greater than 1024).
3. TCP/IP Destination Port on the AMC: The SI win32sync client will
attempt to establish a connection to register.mitel-amc.com TCP port
22. After 5 seconds, if the connection is not established, the client will
try port 8222. If there is still no success, the third attempt is with port
80 using the HTTP/1.1 protocol CONNECT method.
If the SI PC is behind a firewall, the firewall must allow connection to
at least one of port 22, port 8222, or port 8.
4. SI Host PC behind an HTTP Proxy Server: If the HTTP/1.1
CONNECT method is used and the SI PC is configured to use an
HTTP proxy server, then the CONNECT request will be through the
proxy server. This is the same method used by web browsers to
establish HTTPS connections through proxy servers. If the SI host PC
can reach https://www.mitel-amc.com from a web browser, then it
should also be able to establish a win32sync connection by using the
HTTP/1.1 CONNECT method. If there is a problem reaching
https://www.mitel-amc.com from a browser on the SI host PC, then the
firewall and/or proxy server on the customer premise may need to be
reconfigured to allow HTTP/1.1 CONNECT requests.
3300 ICP System Requirements
1. DNS Name Resolution: Because the MiSync client performs a name
lookup on “register.mitel-amc.com” and “sync.mitel-amc.com”, the ICP
needs to be properly configured for DNS name resolution using the
System IP Configuration form in the System Administration Tool.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

2. TCP/IP Source Port on the ICP: The MiSync client will connect to
TCP port 443 (https) on the AMC. If the ICP is behind a firewall, the
firewall must allow TCP connections from the ICP to TCP port 443 on
the AMC.
3. ICP behind an HTTP Proxy Server: The MiSync client uses HTTPS
to communicate with the AMC. The HTTP/1.1 CONNECT method is
the standard used by proxy servers to proxy HTTPS. There should be
no extra configuration work required. See Step 4, “SI Host PC behind
an HTTP Proxy Server“ on page 23.
4. CX/CXi/MXe-Specific WAN Considerations: Program the Internet
Gateway (WAN interface) IP address details (see "CXi/MXe
Requirements for IP Networking" on page 297).

Installation

Basic Programming and Data Save
Programming the License and Option Selection Form
Tip: Installations and upgrades require a new purchased-options password
from the Mitel Application Management Center (AMC). If you use the old
password, an error message is displayed.
Tip: Before you make any changes to Configuration Options, after entering
the Mitel Options Password and programming the database, ensure that you
have a system backup.

To select licenses and options prior to software release 6.0:
1. Log into the System Administration Tool (see page 8).
2. Select the License and Option Selection form.
3. Click Change and fill in the fields as required (see your Mitel Options
sheet). For more information, click Help.
Tip: When you Change and Save in the License and Option Selection form
(prior to Release 7.0), an error message that references “sysid # 65535“
means that the SysID or i-Button is not installed or not seated correctly.
Tip: Enable Networking Option and Mitai/Tapi Computer Integration.

4. Enter the Mitel Options Password and click Save.
Time: The Save procedure takes approximately three minutes.

5. Reboot the controller (see page 99).
To manually select licenses and options for release 6.0 and later:
1. Access the License and Option Selection form.
2. Click Change and leave the Application Record ID field blank.
3. Enter the number of licenses in the appropriate fields.
4. Select the appropriate Country variant and Configuration Options.
5. Enter your Password.
6. Click Save to commit your changes to the database.
7. Reboot the controller (see page 99).

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

To automatically select licenses and options for release 6.0 and later:
1. Complete the System IP Configuration form to enable the Primary
and Secondary DNS Servers to establish a connection with the
Application Management Center (AMC) Server (see "Requirements
for AMC Connection" on page 23).
Tip: The PC that is running the Software Installer Tool has networking
requirements that must be met to establish a connection with the AMC. Refer
to "Installing the Software Installer Tool" on page 69 for details.

2. Access the License and Option Selection form.
3. Click Change and enter your Application Record ID.
4. Click Retrieve Licenses to query the Application Management Center
(AMC) and retrieve your Purchased Options and Password.
5. Select the appropriate Country variant and Configuration Options.
6. Click Save to commit your changes to the database and to the AMC.
7. Reboot the controller (see page 99).
Setting the Date and Time and Saving the Settings
Tip: The DBMS SAVE command will ensure that all future programming
changes are saved. You must perform the DBMS SAVE command before
the programmed internal DHCP server will run (see page 29 for DHCP
programming instructions).

To set the system date and time:
1. Log into the System Administration Tool (see page 8).
2. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click Maintenance Commands.
3. Enter writedatetime
to set the date and time. For example,
writedatetime 2004 4 3 2 12 31 51 (2004 April 3rd Tuesday 12:31:51).
4. Perform a DBMS save using the dbms save maintenance command.
5. Enter the dbms stat command to verify the DBMS save.The system
response is DBMS info: DBMS_INITIALIZED is on.
Programming the Controller Modules
1. Access the Controller Module Configuration form.
2. Highlight the module (slots 1 to 4) and click Change.

Installation

3. Select the module in the drop-down list. Choose Dual FIM, Dual
Framer, Quad BRI Framer, or T1/E1 Combo.
4. If you have installed Framer or Combo modules, refer to “Program
Embedded PRI/Q.SIG Trunks”, “Program T1/D4 Trunks”, or “Program
Embedded BRI Trunks” in the Online Help for information.
5. Power down the controller (see page 99).

Connecting the Controller to the Network
This section assumes that the network is already set up, and that there is
a serial connection between the Maintenance PC and the controller.
Tip: See Table 58, “T1 and E1 Connector Pin Allocation,” on page 270 for
Embedded T1/E1 pinout information.

•

Setting the Controller RTC IP address (prior to Release 6.0) (page 28).

•

Programming DHCP (page 29)

•

Verifying the Operation of the Controller (page 34).

•

Configuring the Layer 2 Switch (page 35).

Setting the Controller RTC IP address (for Release 6.0 and later)
Tip: The Maintenance PC must be on the same subnet as the controller.

1. Launch a browser and go to the URL of the 3300 Controller (default
RTC IP address is 192.168.1.2, default gateway 192.168.1.1).
2. The first time you connect, you must install the Mitel Root CA security
certificate (see “Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Security Certificate”
on page 236).
3. Log into the 3300 ICP ESM using the default username (system) and
password (password).
4. Complete the IP Networking Configuration form to change the IP
addresses.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Setting the Controller RTC IP address (prior to Release 6.0)
Tip: The Maintenance PC must be on the same subnet as the controller.

1. Start the communication program on the Maintenance PC.
2. Power up the controller (see page 22).
3. Press the Reset button on the controller (use a small non-metallic
pointed object).
4. The communication program will instruct you to Press
to stop auto-boot AFTER
countdown starts (Release 5.2 and later) or Press any key to stop
auto-boot (prior to Release 5.2).
5. When [VxWorks Boot]: is displayed, type c and press ENTER.
6. For each VxWorks setting shown in bold inTable 76 on page 300,
enter a value, and then press ENTER. For all other settings, press
ENTER to accept the default:
Tip: If DHCP (flags=0x40) is being used on the E2T, leave the inet on ethernet
field blank.

inet on ethernet (e), IP address and subnet mask (hex) for controller
RTC (Get it from your IT administrator.)

gateway inet (g), IP address of the default gateway for the 3300 (must
be outside the DHCP range)

user (u), ftp

ftp password (ftp)), ftp.
CAUTION: Do not use leading zeroes in the IP addresses.
For example, enter 192.168.1.2; not 192.168.001.002.

7. At [VXWorks Boot], type @, or press the Reset button on the
controller.
Time: The controller can take up to 10–15 minutes to restart.

Installation

Programming DHCP
Programming the Controller DHCP Server Settings (prior to Rls 7.0)
For additional information on programming DHCP settings for the 3300
ICP, refer to the System Administration Tool Online Help.
To use an external DHCP Server, do not enable the internal DHCP server
and refer to “Configuring External DHCP Settings for E2T” on page 307 for
instructions.
Tip: You may need to change the IP address of your PC to match your
customers network.

1. On the Maintenance PC, access the System Administration Tool (see
"Launching the Programming Tools" on page 8).
2. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click DHCP Subnet form, enter
the subnet name, IP address and bit mask.
3. In the DHCP Static IP form, enter a static IP address for the E2T using
the information on page 301 (skip this step for the MX and 100-user
controllers). Assign IP addresses to specific devices by using the MAC
address of the device. Assign a static IP Address to any IP Console in
a cluster.
4. In the DHCP IP Address Range form, program the scope using the
information on page 301.
Tip: The following IP addresses are reserved for the AMB and ASUs:
192.168.10.1 to 192.168.10.15 through 192.168.13.1 to 192.168.13.15

5. In the DHCP Options form, program the options listed in Table 78 on
page 301 for the scope you just programmed. Always create the
following options:
- 3 Router, IP address
- 66 TFTP Server, IP address format
- 67 Boot file, string value (always /sysro/E2T8260)
- 128 TFTP, IP address format (typically the controller)
- 129 RTC, IP address format (typically the controller)
- 130 MITEL IP PHONE, string value
In a single DHCP configuration, create the following options:
-

132 VLAN ID (optional)

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

133 Priority, integer value of 1-6 (Optional. Required if a voice
VLAN is in use. For external server use Hex LONG; for internal
server use decimal value of 1-6)

134 Diffserv Code Point, integer value

If there are 5230 IP Appliances, create the following options:
-

6 DNS Server, IP address format

44 NetBIOS Name Server, IP address format

6. In the DHCP Options form, for a cluster environment, program IP
Console (if any) with a static IP Address. Then, do the following:
Program Options 128 and 129 with:
- Format: IP Address
- Value: IP Address of the controller that controls the device
- Scope: Static: .
If different VLAN tagging and priority information is needed for the IP
Console, repeat step 6 for Options 132 and 133.
If a different router is need for any IP Consoles, repeat step 6 for
Option 3 and set the Value to the IP address of the router.
7. In the DHCP Lease Viewer form, ensure that there is no DHCP IP
Address Lease for the IP Console MAC Addresses. If there is, delete
it and then power off and power on the device.
8. In the DHCP Server form, enable the internal DHCP server.
To use an alternative DHCP server (see page 307 and page 308):
1. In the DHCP Server form, disable the internal DHCP server.
2. Program your DHCP server with the following options:
- 128 TFTP IP address format
- 129 RTC IP address format
- 130 MITEL IP PHONE, string value.

Installation

Programming the Controller DHCP Server Settings (for Release 7.0 and
later)
Note: DHCP options 128-133 used to configure Mitel IP endpoints have
been reclassified as public options by the Internet Engineering Task Force
(see RFC 2133 and RFC 3925). To comply with the change, Mitel
recommends using either option 43 or 125, depending on the server's
ability to support them and on administrator preference. (The embedded
server supports both options with 125 as the factory-programmed default.)
The old options can still be used to provide backward compatibility with
IP sets that have yet to be upgraded with firmware that supports the new
options. After the upgrade, the old options may be removed to prevent
future conflicts with standard use or other vendors' use of these options.
Note: Ensure that all LLDP-compliant telephones are upgraded to
firmware version 2.0.0.18 or later before you use LLDP on your network
for VLAN Discovery.
Note: LLDP-MED non-compliant telephones cannot use LLDP for VLAN
discovery. They must use DHCP VLAN discovery. Non-compliant sets are:
5001, 5005, 5010, 5020 IP Phones, 5140 IP Appliance, 5201, 5205, 5207,
5215 (single mode), 5220 (single mode), 5230 IP Phones, 5240 IP
Appliance, 5485 IP Pager, and 5550 IP Console keypad.

For additional information on programming DHCP settings for the 3300
ICP, refer to the System Administration Tool Online Help.
To use an external DHCP Server, do not enable the internal DHCP server
and refer to “Configuring External DHCP Settings for E2T” on page 307 for
instructions.
Tip: You may need to change the IP address of your PC to match your
customers network.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Tip: The following IP addresses are reserved to provide backward
compatability for legacy AMBs and ASUs:
192.168.10.1 to 192.168.10.15 through 192.168.13.1 to 192.168.13.15
The ASU II and legacy AMBs and ASUs with upgraded firmware use the
following reserved addresses:
169.254.10.0 to 169.254.10.15 through 169.254.19.0 to 169.254.19.15

5. In the DHCP Options form, program the options listed in Table 78 on
page 301 for the scope you just programmed. Always create the
following options:
Note: IP sets require a firmware upgrade to support the new DHCP
options introduced in Release 7.0; otherwise, the sets will fail to boot. Such
failures can occur, for example, in a resilient cluster of mixed software
releases or when sets with old firmware are added to a controller after it
was upgraded to Release 7.0. For the sets to boot, DHCP options 128-133
must be present in the DHCP server. After the sets have booted, options
128-133 may be removed to avoid future conflicts with standard use or
other vendors’ use of these options.

3 Router, IP address

125 Vendor-Identifying Vendor-Specific Information or Option 43
Vendor Specific Information. Option 125 is the preferred option.

66 TFTP Server, IP address format

67 Boot file, string value (always /sysro/E2T8260)

If there are 5230 IP Appliances, create the following options:
-

6 DNS Server, IP address format

44 NetBIOS Name Server, IP address format

6. In the DHCP Options form, for a cluster environment, program IP
Console (if any) with a static IP Address. Then, do the following:
Program Option 125 (preferred) or Option 43 with:
-

Format: ASCII String

Value: IP Address of the controller that controls the device and
different VLAN tagging and priority information if needed for the
console

Scope: Static: .

Assign the address Option 125 (or 43) as above, specifying different
VLAN tagging and priority information if needed for the console.

Installation

If a different router is need for any IP Consoles, repeat step 6 for
Option 3 and set the Value to the IP address of the router.
7. In the DHCP Lease Viewer form, ensure that there is no DHCP IP
Address Lease for the IP Console MAC Addresses. If there is, delete
it and then power off and power on the device.
8. In the DHCP Server form, enable the internal DHCP server.
To use an alternative DHCP server (see page 307 and page 308):
1. In the DHCP Server form, disable the internal DHCP server.
2. Program your DHCP server with options 128-133.
3. Upgrade the IP Phones/ firmware to 2.0.0.18 or later.
4. Program your DHCP server with the following options:
-

43 Vendor Specific Information, string value

OR
-

125 Vendor-Identifying Vendor-Specific Information, string value.

5. Delete options 128-133.
Note: IP sets require a firmware upgrade to support the new DHCP
options introduced in Release 7.0; otherwise, the sets will fail to boot. Such
failures can occur, for example, in a resilient cluster of mixed software
releases or when sets with old firmware are added to a controller after it
was upgraded to Release 7.0. For the sets to boot, DHCP options 128-133
must be present in the DHCP server. After the sets have booted, options
128-133 may be removed to avoid future conflicts with standard use or
other vendors’ use of these options
Note: Ensure that all LLDP-compliant telephones are upgraded to
firmware version 2.0.0.18 or later before you use LLDP on your network
for VLAN Discovery.
Note: LLDP-MED non-compliant telephones cannot use LLDP for VLAN
discovery. They must use DHCP VLAN discovery. Non-compliant sets are:
5001, 5005, 5010, 5020 IP Phones, 5140 IP Appliance, 5201, 5205, 5207,
5215 (single mode), 5220 (single mode), 5230 IP Phones, 5240 IP
Appliance, 5485 IP Pager, and 5550 IP Console keypad.

Program DHCP for VLAN (prior to Release 7.0):
Follow this procedure if using two DHCP servers: central server (external)
on a default VLAN and other (3300 DHCP Server) on the voice VLAN.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

1. Set up the central DHCP Server with the following options:
- 130 MITEL IP PHONE, string value
- 132 VLAN ID
- 133 Priority, value of 1-6
- 134 Diffserv Code Point, integer value
2. Set up the 3300 ICP DHCP Server with the following options:
- 128 TFTP IP address format
- 129 RTC IP address format
- 130 MITEL IP PHONE, string value
- 132 VLAN ID
- 133 Priority, value of 1-6
- 134 Diffserv Code Point, integer value
3. Program the DHCP server on the 3300 ICP (see procedure above).
Verifying the Operation of the Controller
1. On the Maintenance PC, access the System Administration Tool.
2. In the System Hardware Profile folder, verify that the information in
each of the forms is correct, including the IP address of the E2T for the
LX and 250/700-user system.
3. In Maintenance and Diagnostics, click Alarm Details.
Verify that the following alarms do not appear (if you get an alarm, go
to “Alarms” on page 189):
-

E2T Com (not applicable to the MX, CX/CXi, or 100-user controller)

DSP
Tip: The next four steps are optional.

4. Connect two IP Phones directly to one of the controller’s Ethernet
ports (for an MX and 100-user controller, only the leftmost port is
functional and you must use a Layer 2 switch for these steps).
5. Program the IP Phones (refer to the System Administration Tool
Online Help for details).
6. Make a call from one phone to the other.
7. Remove the IP Phones from the controller.

Installation

Configuring the Layer 2 Switch
The 3300 ICP requires a Layer 2 switch between its controller and the
network. The internal Layer 2 switch in the CXi and MXe must be
programmed with an IP Address in the same subnet as the RTC IP
Address, or the switch will not operate properly. Do this by completing the
System IP Configuration form, and then reboot the system.
Note: The 16 10/100 Mbps ports are disabled on the CXi during bootup;
likewise, the right-side Gigabit port on the MXe.
Tip: Refer to the System Administration Tool Online Help for detailed
instructions for programming the IP Network Configuration forms associated
with the CXi and MXe.

1. Connect an Ethernet cable between the Layer 2 switch on your
network and the leftmost available Ethernet port on the controller (port
17 on the CXi and the left Gigabit port on the MXe). Use a
straight-through cable for the CXi and MXe and a crossover cable for
all other controllers.
Tip: For an MX or 100-user system, move the Maintenance PC

Ethernet connection from the controller to one of the Layer 2 switch
input ports, and connect the Layer 2 switch to the leftmost Ethernet
port of the controller. You can do the same for an LX, 250 and a
700-user system, if desired.
2. Program the Layer 2 switch with the appropriate settings (see
“Network Configuration Examples” on page 317 for more information).
Tip: Typically, in a VLAN environment, an access port is used to connect
the Layer 2 switch to the controller, and trunk ports to connect the Layer 2
switch to the IP Phones.
Tip: IP trunks cannot work through the WAN port.

See your IT administrator for information to set up and program a
DHCP server. We recommend that you use the controller’s internal
DHCP server to provide a static IP address to the E2T.

3. If you are not using the controller’s DHCP server, disable it in the
DHCP Server form.
Tip: See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP Server (prior to Release 7.0)”
on page 308 for information on programming 3300 ICP DHCP settings on a
Windows 2000 DHCP server.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Install Units
This section contains detailed information on installing and configuring the
Network Services Unit, Analog Services Unit, Peripheral Cabinet,
SUPERSET HUB, and Digital Services Unit (DSU) for the 3300 ICP.
CAUTION: Provide a permanent ground for all controllers
and units, through the ground connection on each cabinet.
This section also contains information on configuring embedded analog on
the MX, MXe, and CX/CXi controllers.
Tip: The CX/CXi controllers do not support Network Services Units or Analog
Services Units. The CX/CXi do support embedded trunking and embedded
analog.

You can install any of the following Network Services Units (NSUs):
•

Universal NSU (MSDN, PRI/QSIG, T1/D4)

•

R2 NSU

•

BRI NSU.

You can double the number of Universal and R2 NSUs in a system by
chaining a secondary NSU to each primary NSU connected to the
controller. BRI NSUs cannot be chained.
Some NSUs must be programmed with the ISDN Maintenance and
Administration Tool (IMAT) (see “Install and Use IMAT” on page 88).
CAUTION: To connect your NSU to the LAN, you must
change the default IP and gateway addresses to match an
available address on the LAN. The default address is
192.168.1.1:ffffff00. See "Programming an IP Address into
the NSU" on page 88.

Universal or R2 Network Services Unit
1. Mount and secure the NSU in the desired location.
2. Set the L0/L1 port DIP switches to the appropriate termination mode
and impedance (see Table 53 on page 268 and Table 58 on
page 270). The default is network termination mode. See “Network
Services Units” on page 267 for the location of these switches.

Installation

3. Set the Message Link DIP switch to the appropriate position. See
page 267 for the location of the Message Link switch and Table 52 on
page 268 for settings.
4. Connect a fiber optic cable between the NSU and the controller FIMs.
5. If you are installing a secondary NSU, connect a crossover CAT 5
cable between CIM 1 of the secondary NSU and CIM 2 of the primary
NSU (see Table 55 on page 269 for CIM pinout, and Table 52 on
page 268 for message link dip switch settings).
6. Connect the NSU L0 and/or L1 port to the remote system (the PSTN
or another system). See Table 58 on page 270 for the pinout.
7. For the PRI and R2 protocols, program the NSU using IMAT (see
“Installing IMAT on the PC” on page 88 and “Using IMAT” on page 90).
Refer to the IMAT Online Help for more information.
8. Connect power to the NSU.
Tip: The NSU software will not load until the NSU programming is complete
(see Step 9 below).

9. Using the System Administration Tool, program the NSU settings on
the controller. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click Network
Services Unit Configuration. Refer to the Online Help for more
information.
Next: Install any other required services units. When all the services units
are installed, go to “Install Telephones and Peripherals” on page 51.

BRI Network Services Unit
Connect the BRI NSU to the controller via a Universal E1 MSDN NSU.
Refer to “Quad BRI Framer” on page 111 for installing embedded BRI.
Tip: Program the Universal E1 NSU before connecting the BRI NSU.

1. Mount the BRI NSU.
2. Connect the BRI NSU E1 ports to the Universal NSU L0/L1 ports (see
Table 53 on page 268 and Table 58 on page 270 for pinouts).
Tip: Use a CAT 5 cable between the BRI NSU E1 port and the Universal
NSU that is running E1 DPNSS. Ensure that the pinout of the cable matches
that of the E1 connector (pins 4 and 5 are connected). A 4-wire CAT 5 cable
will only use pins 1, 2, 3, and 6.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

3. Connect the BRI NSU to the ISDN devices using a 25-pair cable. See
Table 60 on page 272 for the pinout.
4. Connect the BRI NSU to the maintenance PC:
a. Connect the RS-232 port (RJ-45 connector) on the BRI NSU to a
serial port on the PC.
b. Set up the communications program on COM port 1 or 2 with the
following parameters:
- Baud Rate: 9600
- Data Bits: 8
- Parity: None
- Stop Bits: 1
- Flow Control: XON/XOFF
- Character Set: ASCII
5. Connect power to the BRI NSU.
6. On the PC, program the BRI NSU using a VT100 emulator (see TB
#58004741 Basic Setup Guide for the MC268 BRI card).
Tip: Even though the TB is written for the SX-2000 system, the parameters
described are also applicable to the 3300 BRI NSU.

Analog Services Unit
This procedure applies to the ASU, the Universal ASU, and the ASU II
(compatible only with Release 7.0 software). You can connect up to four
Analog Services Units to the controller (two for the MX and 100-user
controllers). Ensure that there is a free CIM port on the controller.
ASU II mounting instructions:
•

For rack mounting (rear or front facing), do not install the feet

•

For wall mounting, install only the two bottom feet.

1. Mount the ASU. Refer to page 141 for ASU II line card installation
instructions.
2. Connect a Crossover Category 5 cable with RJ-45 connector to the
CIM port on the ASU and a free CIM port on the controller (see
Table 55 on page 269).

Installation

Tip: The 3300 Universal ASU can be located up to 30 meters (100 feet) away
from the controller. The interface uses a single standard 8-pin modular jack
consisting of 2 balanced signal pairs, and is located on the front of the unit.

3. Complete telephony cabling for the ASU (see Table 64 on page 276).
4. Complete the Music on Hold and Paging cabling if required. For the
Universal ASU, see Table 66 and Table 67 on page 277.
5. Connect power to the ASU. Once the CIM link synchronizes, the CIM
LEDs turn on. The controller detects the ASU, and the application
software downloads and starts immediately.
Tip: The ASU software will not load until the ASU programming is complete.

6. Using the System Administration Tool, program the ASU settings on
the controller (see the System Administration Tool Help for details).
Tip: The ONS circuits provide positive disconnect for support of applications
such as door phones.
Tip: Use the LSMeasure Tool to determine the line settings for LS trunks on
an Analog Board or a Universal ASU (see page 250).

Next: Install any other required services units. When all the services units
are installed, go to “Install Telephones and Peripherals” on page 51.

Embedded Analog, Configure
To configure controllers with embedded analog.
1. Complete telephony cabling for embedded analog (see Table 45 on
page 263).
2. Complete the Music on Hold and Paging cabling if required (see
Table 43 and Table 44 on page 263).
3. Connect power to the controller. The controller detects the Analog
Main Board and Analog Option Board and the software downloads.
CAUTION: Rebooting the controller before the embedded
analog software is downloaded can render the boards
inoperable.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Tip: Verify, in the System Administration Tool, that 3300 Embedded

Analog or 3300 Expanded Analog appears as the Installed Type in
the Analog Services Unit Configuration form.
4. Using the System Administration Tool, program the analog settings on
the controller. Refer to the System Administration Tool Online Help for
information.
Tip: The ONS circuits provide positive disconnect for support of applications
such as door phones.
Tip: Use the LSMeasure Tool to determine the line settings for LS trunks on
an Analog Board, Universal ASU, or ASU II (see page 250).

Peripheral Cabinet
Tip: The CX and CXi controllers do not support Peripheral Cabinets.

To install a peripheral cabinet:
1. Unpack, position, and ground the peripheral cabinet.
2. Check the card layout (see page 41).
3. Connect the fiber cable to the node (see page 42).
4. Check the grounding (see page 42).
5. Install the power converter (see page 43).
6. Install the peripheral interface cards (see page 44).
7. Cable the node to the MDF (see page 45).
To unpack, position, and ground the cabinet:
1. Open the peripheral cabinet carton.
2. Remove the plastic bag from the top and sides of the cabinet.
Lift the peripheral cabinet out of the carton.
3. Check the node and attached equipment for damage. Repack and
return any damaged equipment.
4. Position the node.

Installation

CAUTION: Do NOT apply power to the peripheral cabinet
until you have installed the ground cable.
5. Connect an external ground to the ground terminal on the rear panel
of the peripheral cabinet. Refer to the Safety Instructions for detailed
grounding requirements. These instructions are packaged with each
system.
6. Remove the peripheral cabinet front panel (see “Removing/Replacing
the Front Panel of a Peripheral Cabinet or DSU” on page 142).
Check the Card Layout
Typically, a peripheral cabinet is shipped with the peripheral switch
controller (PSC) card and fiber interface module (FIM) installed. If these
cards were not shipped in the cabinet, see page 142 for installation
instructions. You must install and cable the FIM before you install the
peripheral switch controller card and power converter.
Install the cards in the following configuration (see also page 280).
Slot Number

Card Type

1 to 12

Peripheral interface card

13, 14, 15 (combined)

Power converter

Peripheral switch controller (PSC)

Fiber interface module (FIM)

Note: Depending on the peripheral cabinet type, slots 16, 16B, and 17 may be
used for the following purposes:
• Type A (9400-200-110-NA) has a peripheral switch controller (PSC) card in
slot 16 that works in conjunction with a peripheral resource card (PRC) in the
upper portion of slot 17. A fiber interface module (FIM) is located in the lower
portion of slot 17.

•

Type B (9400-200-113-NA) has a PSC or PSC II card in slot 16. The PSC
card works in conjunction with a PRC in slot 17; a PSC II card includes PRC
functionality. A FIM is located in the lower portion of slot 17.

•

Peripheral cabinet II or peripheral cabinet 19" has a PSC II in slot 16 and a
FIM in slot 17.
Tip: If you are installing an expanded peripheral cabinet, or expanding an
existing one, the card layout will be different depending on whether the
cabinet is used as the master or slave of the peripheral pair. Refer to
“Installing an Expanded Peripheral Cabinet” on page 149.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Connecting the Fiber Cable to the Peripheral Cabinet
The fiber optic cable connects the FIM in the controller to the FIM in the
peripheral cabinet.
To connect the fiber optic cable to the FIM in the peripheral cabinet:
1. Route the fiber optic cable through the cable port at the rear of the
peripheral cabinet into the cabinet. Extend the fiber cable
approximately one foot (30 cm) beyond the front of the cabinet.
2. Install a short piece of nylon spiral wrap over the cable at the point
where the cable exits the rear of the cabinet.
3. Close the sliding cable port door. Ensure that the door closes on the
nylon spiral-wrapped section of fiber cable.
4. Remove the plastic dust caps from the fiber optic cable connectors
and the connector ferrules on the FIM faceplate.
5. Plug the fiber connectors into the connector ferrules on the FIM
faceplate.
Tip: The fiber connectors have a small key that you must align with a slot on
the FIM connectors. Lock each connector into position by pushing its metal
collar forward and clipping it onto the FIM connector.

Checking the Grounding on an AC System
CAUTION: Ensure that the grounding meets the requirements specified in the Safety Instructions. These instructions are packaged with each system.
WARNING: DANGER TO PERSONNEL AND/OR
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD RESULT IF THE CABINET IS
NOT POWERED OFF DURING THIS PROCEDURE.
1. Ensure that the power switch (S1) on the power distribution unit (PDU)
is set to the off (0) position and that the switch on the power converter
faceplate is set to the off (0) position.
2. Attach the anti-static wrist strap to your wrist.
3. Slide the installed circuit cards forward slightly so that the card
connectors are not in contact with the cabinet backplane. Leave the
power converter installed.
4. Remove the anti-static wrist strap.

Installation

5. Plug the external power cable from the AC commercial power supply
into the power input plug on the power distribution unit (PDU).
6. Disconnect the protective earth wire from the protective earth ground
stud on the rear of the cabinet.
7. Using a digital multimeter, measure the AC potential between the
protective earth wire (building ground) and the protective earth ground
stud. A voltage reading of less than 1 Vac is acceptable. To prevent
damage to the multimeter, set it to the maximum ac scale, then reduce
the setting gradually to the 10 Vac range.
8. If the potential is greater than 1 Vac, recheck the ground connections
and repeat the measure.
9. If the reading still exceeds 1 Vac, the building ground is unacceptable.
Connect the protective earth wire to a new building ground and repeat
the steps 7 through 9 until you have an acceptable AC potential.
WARNING: DO NOT CONTINUE UNTIL YOU HAVE A
POTENTIAL OF 1 VAC OR LESS BETWEEN THE BUILDING
GROUND AND THE PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUND STUD.
OTHERWISE, PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
10. Reconnect the protective earth wire to the protective earth ground stud
and attach the anti-static wrist strap to your wrist.
11. Slide the installed circuit cards back into contact with the cabinet
backplane. Ensure that each card is fully inserted in its slot.
12. Remove the anti-static strap from your wrist.
Installing the Power Converter
Refer to “Safety Considerations” on page 98.
WARNING: DANGER TO PERSONNEL AND/OR
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE COULD RESULT IF THE CABINET IS
NOT POWERED OFF DURING INSTALLATION OF THE AC
POWER CONVERTER.
1. At the rear of the cabinet, remove the two screws that fasten the
internal AC power cord access cover plate to the backplane, and
remove the cover plate (see Figure 8).

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

2. Ensure that the switch on the power converter faceplate is set to off
(0).
3. Slide the power converter into slots 13 through 15.
4. Push the upper and lower latches away from you until they are vertical
and the power converter is locked in place.

Figure 8: Peripheral Cabinet AC Power Cord Access
5. Plug the internal AC power cord from the power distribution unit (PDU)
into the power converter through the access cutout in the backplane.
6. Replace the internal AC power cord access cover plate over the
access cutout in the backplane, and replace the two screws.
Installing the Peripheral Interface Cards
Refer to “Safety Considerations” on page 98.
CAUTION: To prevent static damage to electrical components, ensure that the system is grounded before you install
the cards. Whenever you handle circuit cards, wear an
anti-static strap.
1. Set the E&M trunk card switch settings (see page 281) and the OPS
line card message waiting switches (see page 283).
2. Check all card connector pins to be certain that they are straight.

Installation

3. Slide the peripheral switch controller card into slot 16 (see “Peripheral
Cabinet Card Layout” on page 280 for slot locations).
4. Slide the other peripheral interface cards into their appropriate slots.
5. Push the upper and lower latches away from you until they are vertical
and the cards are locked in place.
Cable the Node to the MDF
Cable the lines and trunks from the peripheral cabinet to the main
distribution frame (MDF) by using the peripheral interface cabling tables
(see “Peripheral Cabinet Cabling” on page 285).
Programming the Peripheral Cabinet
1. Power up the peripheral cabinet.
2. Using the System Administration Tool, program the peripheral cabinet.
Refer to the System Administration Tool Online Help for details.

SUPERSET HUB
Tip: The CX and CXi controllers do not support SUPERSET HUBs.

Installing a SUPERSET HUB requires that you first install the peripheral
slot FIM carrier (page 45) and then the SUPERSET HUB (page 46).
Install the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier
WARNING: THIS PRODUCT USES A CLASS 1 LED. FIBER
OPTIC SOURCES EMIT INFRARED RADIATION. THIS
RADIATION IS INVISIBLE TO THE HUMAN EYE, AND CAN
DAMAGE THE RETINA. NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY INTO THE
END OF A FIBER OPTIC CABLE THAT YOU SUSPECT IS
ENERGIZED BY A FIBER OPTIC SOURCE. WHEN WORKING
WITH RAW FIBER OPTIC CABLES, BE AWARE OF FIBER
ENDS AND SLIVERS WHICH CAN PUNCTURE THE SKIN AND
CAUSE IRRITATION.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

To install the peripheral slot FIM carrier:
1. Attach an anti-static wrist strap.
2. Unpack the peripheral slot FIM carrier and inspect it to ensure that it is
not damaged.
3. Remove the peripheral cabinet front and rear panels.
4. Slide the peripheral slot FIM carrier part-way into the first available slot
from the right.
5. Remove the black plastic dust caps from the fiber optic cable
connectors and from the connector ferrules on the faceplate of the
FIM.
6. Connect the fiber optic cables to the connectors on the FIM via the
fiber optic access port on the rear of the cabinet.
Tip: The fiber optic cable connectors have a small key that you must align
with a slot on the FIM connectors. Lock each connector into position by
pushing its metal collar forward and clipping it onto the FIM connector.

7. Push the peripheral slot FIM carrier fully into the slot and secure it with
the card latch.
8. Remove the anti-static wrist strap.
9. Route the fiber optic cables from the peripheral cabinet to the
SUPERSET HUB.
10. Replace the peripheral cabinet front and rear panels.
Install the SUPERSET HUB Unit
To install the SUPERSET HUB unit:
1. Attach the rubber feet to the base of the unit.
2. If required, secure the mounting brackets to the SUPERSET HUB
case by using the holes for to the selected mounting position, and
install the unit in an equipment rack or mount the unit on a wall.
Tip: The side with the row of RJ-45 connectors faces the front when the unit
is rack-mounted or the top when the unit is wall-mounted. If you are
wall-mounting the unit, use wall anchors appropriate for the wall type, use
#12 screws that are at least 1.5 inches (0.8 cm) long, and ensure that the
screws are not fully tightened so that the unit may be easily removed (without
the use of a tool) for servicing.

3. Ensure that the ventilation holes are not blocked.

Installation

4. Remove the black plastic dust caps from the fiber optic cables and the
connector ferrules on the unit.
5. Connect the fiber optic cables from the peripheral slot FIM carrier in
the peripheral cabinet to the connectors on the SUPERSET HUB unit.
6. Connect the RJ-45 connectors to the UTP distribution panel according
to the building wiring plan.
7. Connect the power cable to a convenient wall socket.
Tip: Because the power cable is the main disconnect device, the wall socket
must be near the unit and easily accessible.

8. Program the SUPERSET HUB as a DNI line card in the slot where the
peripheral slot FIM carrier is inserted.
Tip: When installing the SUPERSET HUB in an enclosed rack, you must
provide adequate ventilation to ensure that the maximum ambient
temperature inside the rack does not exceed 40ºC (104ºF).
Tip: When mounting the SUPERSET HUB in a rack, ensure that a hazardous
condition is not achieved due to any uneven mechanical loading.
Tip: When using the SUPERSET HUB in a rack, consider the connection of
the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of circuits
might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. When addressing
this concern, consider the SUPERSET HUB’s ratings label.

Digital Service Unit
WARNING:DO NOT APPLY POWER TO THE EQUIPMENT AT
ANY TIME DURING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION.
Tip: The CX and CXi controllers do not support Digital Service Units.

Tip: Two DSU cabinets may be programmed in a single DSU node. On the
left side of the node, slots 1, 2, and 3 comprise one DSU cabinet. On the
right side of the node, slots 4, 5, and 6 comprise another DSU cabinet. When
you program cards in the left cabinet, program slot 3 before slot 2. When
you program cards in the right cabinet, program slot 5 before slot 4. If you
do not follow this order of programming, the DSU cards on the side of the
node that you are programming will reset when you add the second card and
the cabinet will go out of service for one or two minutes.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

To install a DSU:
1. Unpack and position the DSU node.
2. Check the card layout (see page 48).
3. Connect the fiber cable to the node (see page 49).
4. Install the interface assemblies (see page 49).
5. Install the DSU cards (see page 50).
Unpack and Position the DSU Node
To unpack and position the DSU node:
CAUTION: Do not open or unpack any printed circuit board
cartons at this time.
1. Open the DSU node carton.
2. Remove the plastic bag from the top and sides of the cabinet. Lift the
DSU node out of the carton.
3. Check the node and attached equipment for damages. Repack and
return any damaged equipment.
4. Position the node.
CAUTION: Ensure that you use the Cabinet Stacking
Brackets if you want to stack cabinets on top of each other.
Stacking cabinets without these brackets could result in
damage to the equipment or injury.
5. Remove the DSU node front panel.
Check the Card Layout
A DSU node is shipped with two fiber interface modules (FIMs) installed.
If FIM cards were not in the node see page 151 for installation instructions.
Each DSU node has one or two FIMs, depending on the number and
location of DSU cards in the node. The FIM in the bottom of slot 1 provides
communications with the control node for the DSU cards in slots 2 and 3,
and the FIM in the bottom of slot 6 provides communications for the DSU
cards in slots 4 and 5. Install and cable the FIMs before you install any
cards in the DSU node. Check the DSU node card layout on page 290 to
ensure that you have the parts that you need to complete the installation.

Installation

Connect the Fiber Cable to the DSU Node
The fiber optic cable connects the FIMs in the controller to the FIMs in the
DSU node.
To connect the fiber optic cable to the FIM in the DSU node:
1. Route the fiber optic cable through the cable port at the rear of the
DSU cabinet. Extend the fiber cable approximately 1 ft (30 cm) beyond
the front of the cabinet.
2. Install a short piece of nylon spiral wrap over the cable at the point
where the cable exits the rear of the cabinet.
3. Close the sliding cable port door. Ensure that the door closes on the
nylon spiral-wrapped section of fiber cable.
4. Remove the plastic dust caps from the fiber optic cable connectors
and the connector ferrules on the FIM faceplate.
5. Plug the fiber optic cable connectors into the connector ferrules on the
FIM faceplate.
Tip: The fiber optic cable connectors have a small key that you must align
with a slot on the FIM connectors. Lock each connector into position by
pushing its metal collar forward and clipping it onto the FIM connector.

Install the Interface Assemblies
The DS1 interface assembly provides two filtered DB-15 pin connectors
for the external cables required by one DS1 formatter card. You can mount
up to four DS1 interface assemblies in the DSU.
The CEPT interface assembly provides four filtered BNC connectors for
the external cables required by one formatter card. You can mount up to
four CEPT interface assemblies in the DSU. Each interface assembly
plugs into a J3 DIN 3x32 pin connector. The connectors are located in a
3.5 inch x 5 inch (9 cm x 12.5 cm) box that projects from the backplane.
To install a DSU Interface Assembly:
1. Attach an anti-static strap to your wrist.
2. Unpack and inspect the interface assembly.
3. If you are installing a CEPT Interface Assembly, set the jumpers to the
desired positions.
4. At the rear of the cabinet, locate the slot in the DSU box that
corresponds to the DSU slot that you will use for each DSU card.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Tip: When you are facing the rear panel, the DSU box slots (from right to
left) correspond to DSU slots 2 through 5.

5. Remove the cover plate from the selected slot by removing the two
screws that hold the plate in place.
6. If the interface assembly has an extension bracket, mount the
interface assembly extension bracket on the selected slot using the
screws that secured the cover plate. The closed side of the extension
bracket must be to the left when viewed from the rear of the cabinet.
7. Insert the interface assembly into the empty slot in the DSU box.
Ensure that the edge connector on the card aligns with the connector
on the backplane of the system.
8. Secure the interface assembly to the DSU cabinet or the extension
bracket.
Install the DSU Cards
CAUTION: To prevent static damage to electrical components, ensure that the system is grounded. Whenever you
handle circuit cards, wear an anti-static strap.
To install a DSU card:
1. Ensure that the FIMs are installed and cabled.
2. Connect the power cord to the external AC power source.
3. Unpack the card, and verify that it is not damaged.
4. If required, adjust the card switch settings (see page 289 for details).
5. Check the connector pins to be certain that they are straight.
6. Slide the card into the appropriate slot.
7. Push the upper and lower latches away from you until they are vertical
and the card is locked in place.
8. Proceed to one of the following tasks to complete the card installation:

CEPT or DS1 formatter cards (see page 154)

BRI card (see page 152)

PRI card (see page 154)

R2 card (see page 158)

Installation

Install Telephones and Peripherals
This section contains information on installing telephone sets, consoles,
and other peripherals.
The 3300 ICP supports a number of IP, DNI, analog and wireless phones,
as well as conference units, programmable key modules, and attendant
consoles. The CX and CXi controllers support IP and analog phones.
If you have a peripheral cabinet with analog/DNIC phones connected to it,
program those telephones using the System Administration Tool.
Tip: You cannot use the Group Administration Tool to modify programming
for SUPERSET 400-series telephones.

Installing Telephones, Consoles and Appliances
Refer to each device’s Installation Guide (included in the telephone
package) to install the devices.
Tip: Connect a printer to the 5550 IP Console RS-232 port to print hotel
reports. For Release 6.0 and later, PMS provides for a direct IP connection
to the 3300 ICP. See Property Management System in the online help for
details.
Note: If you intend to rely on LLDP VLAN Discovery in the network, you
must first upgrade the 3300 ICP to Release 7.0 or later and upgrade the
IP Phone firmware to version 2.0.0.18 or later.
Note: LLDP-MED non-compliant telephones cannot use LLDP for VLAN
discovery. They must use DHCP VLAN discovery. Non-compliant sets are:
5001, 5005, 5010, 5020 IP Phones, 5140 IP Appliance, 5201, 5205, 5207,
5215 (single mode), 5220 (single mode), 5230 IP Phones, 5240 IP
Appliance, 5485 IP Pager, and 5550 IP Console keypad.

Upgrading IP Phone Firmware
•

Automatically download firmware from the 3300 controller to the IP
Phones (requires a DHCP server configured with options 128-133).

•

Download firmware by plugging the telephone directly into an Ethernet
port on the 3300 controller. The controller must be running Release
7.0 or later to provide LLDP-compliant firmware to the telephone.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Installing Line Interface Modules
The Line Interface Module (LIM) provides analog operation to the 5220 IP
Phone (Dual Mode), 5224 IP Phone, 5235 IP Phone, 5330 IP Phone, or
5340 IP Phone in the event of an IP connection failure. Follow the
instructions in the Installation Guide that is included in the module package
to install a Line Interface Module. Refer to “Program Emergency Services
for a Line Interface Module” in the System Administration Tool Help.

Programming Phones
Tip: Refer to the System Administration Tool Online Help for

information on programming SpectraLink Wireless Telephones, IP
DECT Wireless Phones, and Symbol NetVision MiNET Phones.
To program telephones:
1. Using the System Administration Tool, enter the required
programming and registering information in the applicable forms in the
Devices folder. Refer to the Online Help for details.
2. Program the User Authorization Profile form for the IP device users
if required. Typically, IP Phone and Appliance users are only given
access to the Desktop Tool.
Tip: If you have a large number of new user profiles to add, you can

import new user and device data using the Import functionality in the
User Configuration form in the System Administration Tool.

Registering IP Devices from the Telephone
Use this procedure to register IP devices with the 3300 ICP database. The
procedure will program the 3300 ICP database with the MAC address of
the IP device.
Tip: Use the System Administration Tool to program all other set features
(for example, Class of Service, Interconnect Restriction, Set Key
Assignments, and Class of Restriction).

Before you begin
•

Ensure a Set Registration Access Code and a Set Replacement
Access Code are assigned in the System Options Assignment form.

•

Ensure the directory number and device type is programmed in the
Single Line IP Set Configuration form or Multiline IP Set Configuration
form.

Installation

Register an IP Device
1. Connect the IP device to an RJ-45 Ethernet port on the LAN. For the
CXi, connect to a controller Ethernet port.
2. Provide power to the IP device (refer to the Hardware Technical
Reference Manual at Mitel OnLine for power option information).
3. Press * during power-up (to clear any PIN number in memory).
4. Type the PIN number at the prompt on the IP device. Prompts are:
-

non-display IP Phones: solid message light.

display IP Phones and IP Appliances: display shows Enter the PIN
number.
Tip: The PIN number is the set registration code followed by the set’s
extension number.

5. Complete one of the following to send the PIN:
-

5001, 5005, 5201 and 5205 IP Phones: press Hold.

5010, 5207, 5215, 5020 and 5220 IP Phones: press SuperKey.

5140 and 5240 IP Appliances, 5235 IP Phone: press OK.

5230 IP Appliance: press Send.
The set will complete initialization.

the Cluster Element ID programmed in the Cluster Element
Assignment form matches the ICP/PBX Number programmed in the
ICP/PBX Assignment.

•

each member of the cluster is programmed with the directory numbers
of the other controllers. This information must be programmed using
OPS Manager.

•

the Set Registration Access Codes and Set Replacement Access
Codes are the same for each controller in the cluster.

•

each IP device is able to retrieve the IP address of one of the
controllers in the cluster.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Setting Static IP Address on IP Display Set
The customer may prefer to assign static IP addresses to IP sets rather
than using dynamic IP addressing. You cannot set static IP addresses on
non-display sets. To set static IP address on the IP telephones:
1. Plug the set cable and power into the set while holding down the
Volume Up key for 3 seconds to display Set Static IP (Yes #/No *).
2. At the STATIC IP SETUP MODE.
-

Use the Volume Up/Down keys to navigate

Use the * key to back up (to correct an error)

Use the # key to insert a decimal and move to the next field.

3. At the USE PRESENT SETTINGS screen, select # - ENABLE to enter
a complete set of IP data.
Tip: Select * - DISABLE to revert back to DHCP from static parameters.

4. At INPUT VLAN ID, if VLANs are used, enter the VLAN ID that will be
inserted into packets sent by the phone. Enter nothing if VLANs are
not used.
5. At INPUT PRIORITY, enter 6 if priority is used or leave blank.
6. At INPUT IP ADDRESS, enter the customer-supplied static IP address
(e.g. 10.30.27.191).
7. At INPUT PDA ADDRESS, enter the customer-supplied static IP
address (not for single line display sets).
8. At INPUT SUBNET MASK, enter the subnet mask.
9. At INPUT DEFAULT GATEWAY, enter the Router IP address (e.g.
10.30.27.2).
10. At INPUT RTC ADDRESS (SRVR IP on single line sets), enter the
RTC address.
11. At INPUT TFTP ADDRESS (TFTP SRVR IP on single line sets), enter
the address of the TFTP server used to download the main and boot
load images.

Installation

12. At INPUT DNS ADDRESS, you MUST enter the IP address of the
server that will be used during Web browsing to resolve host names
into IP addresses. Skipping this field will prevent the phone from
booting. If you do not have a DNS server, enter any IP address value
(for example 10.30.32.3).
13. The following prompts are required fields for IP Appliances, optional
for multiline display sets, and do not appear for single line display sets:
INPUT WINS ADDRESS
INPUT PROXY ADDRESS
INPUT PROXY PORT
14. At USE JITTER BUFFER, enter Yes # or No *.
15. At TECHNICIAN IP ADDR?, enter the address of the debugging utility,
or leave blank.
16. At STORE IN NVRAM?, enter Yes # to store parameters in
non-volatile RAM. This step will ensure that your static setting will be
used when the set is powered-up and when the FLASH is upgraded.
17. The set will reboot and will then use the static IP data.
Removing Static IP Addresses on the IP Sets
To return to using dynamic IP addressing when static parameters were
previously enabled:
1. Plug the set cable and power into the set while holding down the
Volume Up key for 3 seconds to display the STATIC IP SETUP
MODE.
2. At the USE PRESENT SETTINGS screen, select * - DISABLE to
revert back to DHCP from static parameters.

Installing and Configuring Music on Hold
There are three types of Music on Hold available to the system,
embedded, analog, and digital.
Embedded Music on Hold is provided by audio files that are imported into
a single controller using the System Administration Tool or into multiple
controllers using Enterprise Manager.
An Embedded Music on Hold source in use consumes half an E2T
resource and each session consumes an E2T resource.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Program Music on Hold in the System Administration Tool:
•

System Audio Files Update - download a WAV file (µ-law (G.711), 8
kHz, 8-bit, mono)

•

System Options Assignment form - MOH option “Yes”

•

Miscellaneous Assignment form - Music Source “Embedded”

Analog Music on Hold is provided by an external music source
connected to any one of the following:
•

Music on Hold connector (audio jack) on the back of a controller with
embedded analog (see Table 43 on page 262)

•

Music on Hold connector on the back of a Universal ASU (see
Table 66 on page 277)

•

Music on Hold connector on a peripheral cabinet E&M trunk card (see
Figure 61 on page 281)

Program Music on Hold in the System Administration Tool:
•

System Options Assignment form - MOH option “Yes”

•

E&M Trunk Circuit Descriptor Assignment form

•

E&M Trunk Assignment form

•

Miscellaneous Assignment form - Music Source “External”

Digital Music on Hold is provided by an external music source connected
to a DNIC Music on Hold/Pager Unit (DMP). The DMP is connected to a
peripheral cabinet DNI line card (not supported on the CX/CXi).
Program Music on Hold in the System Administration Tool:
•

System Options Assignment form - MOH option “Yes”

•

Program the DMP as a single line DNI telephone

•

Miscellaneous Assignment form - Music Source “External”

Installation

Installing a DNIC Music on Hold/Paging Unit (DMP)
Tip: To reduce the risk of hum or other interference, you should install the
DMP close to the music source or paging amplifier and keep the cables to
and from the unit as short as possible. If "none" balanced input or output
equipment is used, you may need a balancing transformer (not supplied by
Mitel).

To install DNIC Music on Hold (not supported on the CX/CXi):
1. Install a DNI line card in a peripheral card slot.
2. Attach the circuit tip and ring leads to the 25th pair of the DMP.
3. Attach the balanced music source to the 7th pair of the DMP via the
MDF.
To install a DMP for Paging (not supported on the CX/CXi):
1. Install a DNI line card.
2. Attach the circuit tip and ring leads to the 25th pair of the DMP.
3. Attach the paging adapter interface to the 9th pair of the DMP.
4. If required, attach the page control inputs of the paging adapter via the
MDF to the 11th and 12th pair of the DMP.
5. Connect the paging adapter to an appropriate power source
(according to the manufacturer’s instructions).
6. Connect the external speakers as required to the paging adapter via
the MDF (according to the manufacturer’s instructions).

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Chapter 3

Software Procedures

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Software Procedures

Back Up a Database
Tip: It is very important to maintain current database backups; backups
should be done on a regular basis.
Tip: Many of the following procedures assume that you have voice mail. If
you don’t have voice mail, please disregard voice mail-related steps.

You need the following information and equipment to back up a database:
Installation/Maintenance PC (see page 7)
IP address of the Controller
System Administration Tool username and password
During the first minute of backup, the voice mail system is not accessible
(Ring-No Answer). Voice mail will remain in Ring-No Answer state until all
voice mail users are disconnected from the system. Ensure that no one is
connected to voice mail before you begin your backup.
Verifying if Anyone is Connected to the Voice Mail System
•

Ensure that all PLIDs are ‘Not applicable’ or ‘Idle’ by using the
following maintenance commands in the System Administration Tool:
stat 1 4 27 and stat 1 4 28.
Time: The system takes 30 to 90 minutes to back up an average-sized
database (50-100 MB), and approximately 4 hours to back up a large voice
mail database (600 MB).

To back up the databases:
1. Click Maintenance and Diagnostics.
2. Click Backup.
3. Copy the identitydb.obj file to your PC (required for every user profile
on every PC used for backup and restore). Follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
4. Click Browse to launch the Save As dialog box, then navigate to the
location on your local drive where you want to save the backup file (for
example C:\3300_ICP\backup).
5. Type a name for your backup file, and then click Save As.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

6. Select the check box for Call History records and/or Voice mail
messages if you want them included in your backup. Each addition
can increase the backup time noticeably.
7. Click Start Backup. System will display progress and then a backup
complete message.
Tip: To perform a backup, your current user account on the computer must
have Java™ Plug-in version 1.4.2_06 or later installed. If you do not have
the correct version of Java installed, it will be automatically installed when
you click Start Backup. The backup will begin after the plug-in is installed.

8. Click OK.
9. Verify the presence of the backup file on the local drive.
Tip: During a system backup, no other users can access any of the
web-based tools (5140/5240 IP Appliance Online Services, Visual Voice
Mail, Desktop Tool, Group Administration Tool, or System Administration
Tool), access Visual Voice Mail, or save changes. To avoid blocking other
users, we recommended that you perform system backups outside of
business hours.

Verifying the Backup
To verify that the backup contains voice mail messages:
1. Add the extension .tar to your backup file (for example, change May10
to May10.tar).
2. Use WinZip to open your renamed .tar file.
3. Look for the voice mail files:

002Vxxxxxxx.yyy (where xxxxxxx is a variable, system-generated
string) contains all messages.

003msgxxxx.vox (where xxxx is the extension number) contains
the status of messages belonging to that extension.

Software Procedures

Restore a Database
Use this procedure to restore a previously saved database.
Tip: The system does not allow you to log in during the restore and reset
period. Once the system has completed the restore and reset, you should
see "deleting/ipservicesdb.tar" in the RTC. This is a good indication that you
can log back in to the System Administration Tool.

CAUTION: You must reboot the controller after restoring a
database. Service will be LOST during this reboot.
Tip: You can only restore a Release 3.3 or later database onto a system
running Release 4.1 or later software. You may not restore a database saved
on software prior to Release 3.3.
Tip: You may not restore an LX or 700-user database onto an MX controller
if the database had CIM 3 or 4 configured. You must first delete the
unsupported CIM configuration.
Tip: You may not restore an MX database onto an MXe controller if the
database had an Analog Option Board (AOB) configured. You must first
delete the unsupported AOB configuration.
Tip: You may not restore a database created on one system onto another
system if they provide for different numbers of embedded analog circuits.
For example, the database from an MX (which provides for 2 ONS and 6
LS) may not be restored onto a CX (which provides for 4 ONS and 6 LS).

You need the following information and equipment to restore a database:
Installer PC (see page 7)
IP address of the Controller
System Administration Tool username and password
To restore a database:
Time: The system takes approximately 30 to 90 minutes to restore an
average-sized database, during which time the files are copied to the
controller. Once the files have been copied, you must reset the controller.
Note that the system can take up to an additional 1 hour to reset.

1. Click Restore in the Maintenance and Diagnostics menu.
2. Copy the identitydb.obj file to your PC (required for every user profile
on every PC used for backup/restore). Follow on-screen instructions.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

3. Type the location of the database that is being restored, or use the
browse facility.
4. Click Yes if you want to include Hotel/Motel wake up information in the
restore.
5. Prior to Rls 5.1 UR 1:Choose the Dimension Selections (see page 83)
-

accept Use Dimension Selections from backup file OR

click Use Current Dimension Selections if you are restoring the
database after programming new Dimension Selection information.

6. Click Start Restore.
Tip: To perform a restore, your current user account on the computer must
have Java Plug-in version 1.4.2_06 or later installed. If you do not have the
correct version of Java installed, it will be automatically installed when you
click Start Restore. The restore will begin after the plug-in is installed.

7. Click OK. The system will show an “in progress” message.
8. When the status window shows “complete”, click OK.
9. Reboot the controller (see page 99). When the reboot is complete, the
database is converted, and the system automatically resets (prior to
Release 4.0, another manual reboot was required).
-

If you have programmed Dimension Selection, the system reboots
automatically one more time.
Tip: While the System Administration Tool is restoring the database, no
other users can access any of the web-based tools, access Visual Voice
Mail, or save changes. To avoid blocking other users, we recommend that
you perform restores outside of business hours.

Verifying the Restore
CAUTION: Do not reset any system components
(Controller, NSU, ASU, DSU, Peripheral Cabinet, and so on)
while executing the following checks.
CAUTION: Rebooting the controller before the Analog Main
Board and Analog Options Board loads can render the
boards inoperable.

Software Procedures

1. Verify that none of the NSUs are loading. If they are, wait until they
have finished loading. To verify that L0/L1 LEDs are not marching, see
“Universal NSU LED States” on page 347 and “R2 NSU LED States”
on page 348.
2. Log into ESM (using the customer’s username and password), then
click System Administration Tool and select Maintenance
Commands.
3. Issue the dbms stat maintenance command to check if the
DBMS_Initialized flag is ON (look for the line DBMS info:
DBMS_Initialized is ON).
4. Issue the Type *.dr.logfile_1 maintenance command to display the
log file created during the Data Restore. Wait until the checks are
complete, then review the log to ensure there were no errors during
the restore procedure.
5. Issue the message subsystem (me sub) command to check the
programmed NSU links; they should be OPEN. If any programmed
links are in SCAN, check the LINK STATUS LEDs; if the amber LEDs
are marching, the NSUs are writing to the RAM DISK.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Upgrade/Install System Software
Use the Mitel 3300 ICP Software Installer Tool (latest release) to install or
upgrade software or to install a software patch.
Tip: Upgrading to a larger controller or to a faster processor means the
replacement of the controller. For example, you cannot upgrade a controller
from 300 MHz to 450 MHz, or convert a CX controller to an MX controller.
Tip: When you replace a controller as part of an upgrade, you must move
the old hard drive to the new controller, manually install the software, and
then use the Software Installer Tool for options and restore.

Software Upgrade Options
Table 2: 3300 ICP Upgrade Options
Upgrade Path

Software Installer Tool

From 3.2 to any later release

Manual install only

From 3.3 to any later release

Full install

From 4.0 to any later release

Full install

4.1.7.6 to 5.x

Upgrade

4.1.7.6 or 5.x to 6.0

Upgrade

4.1.7.6 or 5.x to 7.0.8.4

Full install

6.0 to 7.0.8.4

Upgrade

6.1 to 7.0.8.4

Upgrade

The Manual install procedure formats the hard drive and installs new
software. Use the manual install procedure to install software:
-

on an advanced replacement hard drive

to rebuild/replace a corrupted database

to change a hard drive across platforms.

The Upgrade procedure upgrades your 3300 ICP controller software.
You must use the Software Installer Tool (always use the latest release) to
invoke the upgrade procedure. You may upgrade multiple controllers
simultaneously over the LAN. WAN connectivity is not supported.

Software Procedures

Tip: Before installing new 3300 ICP software, read the RN for the software
you are installing (see “3300 ICP Documentation” on page 9). Verify if any
other software/firmware components of the 3300 ICP needs to be upgraded
to work with the new software.

CAUTION: If you decrease the number of IP User Licenses
or IP Device Licenses, after saving the change, you must
perform a backup and restore.
CAUTION: You may not downgrade the CX and CXi controllers to a software version prior to release 6.0. A downgrade
would render the controller inoperable.
CAUTION: You may not downgrade the LX controller to a
software version prior to release 5.0. A downgrade would
render the controller inoperable.

Upgrade/Install Options with Cluster or Dimension
Changes
There are install/upgrade requirements to consider when dealing with
Maximum Elements per Cluster changes or Dimension Selection changes.
Table 3: Maximum Elements Change or Flexed Dimension Selection
Elements / Dimensions
From

Software Installer
Tool

Notes

Prior to Rls 6.0
with Flexed
Dimensions

Release 6.0
with Flexed
Dimensions

Install only. Do not
perform a data
restore with the SI
Tool. See “Upgrade to
Rls 6.0 or later with
Flexed Dimensions”
on page 84.

After the install is complete,
flex the dimensions, reboot,
and restore using current
dimension selections.

30 or 60 /
Flexed
Dimension
Selection

Install or Upgrade

Use Dimension Selections
from the backup file.

(Page 1 of 2)

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 3: Maximum Elements Change or Flexed Dimension Selection
(continued)
Elements / Dimensions
From

Software Installer
Tool

Notes

30 or 60 /
default or
Flexed
Dimension
Selection

250 / default

Install
See “To upgrade and
change to a default
dimension:” on
page 83.

Use the existing Dimension
Selections.
If changing from Flexed
Dimensions, it is possible
that data may be lost.

30 or 60 /
Flexed
Dimension
Selection

250 / Flexed
Dimension
Selection

Install only. Do not
perform a data
restore with the SI
Tool. See “To
upgrade and change
to a flexed
dimension:” on
page 83.

After the Install and
Maximum Element
selection, Flex Dimensions,
Reboot, and Restore
through ESM. Use the
existing Dimension
Selections.

250 / default

30 or 60 /
default

Install
See “To upgrade and
change to a default
dimension:” on
page 83.

Use the existing Dimension
Selections.
It is likely that data will be
lost when going from a large
database to a smaller one.

250 / default

30 or 60 /
Flexed
Dimension
Selection

Install only. Do not
perform a data
restore with the SI
Tool. See “To
upgrade and change
to a flexed
dimension:” on
page 83.

Install, select Maximum
Elements, Flex Dimensions,
Reboot, and then Restore
using ESM. Use the existing
Dimension Selections.
Data may be lost when
going from a large database
to a smaller one.
(Page 2 of 2)

Tip: The system software ships with small system dimensions

enabled. You enable the large network cluster when you select 250
Maximum Elements per Cluster in the License and Option Selection
form. The Default Feature Resources Dimension changes from
Dimension 17 to Dimension 19.

Software Procedures

Restore Issue - Music on Hold file size
If you restore a pre-Release 6.0 database, with an embedded music on
hold file larger than 8 MB (for the MX/LX) or 16 MB (for the LX 512 MB),
the file is moved to a temp location and disabled. The following error log is
generated: Embedded System Music On Hold Audio source file size
exceeds allocated space. It has been disabled and placed in a temporary
location: db/temp/system_music_on_hold_tmp.
The relocated file is not backed up and will remain on the hard drive until
a full install is performed of until the file is deleted.
To restore music on hold when it is disabled due to file size:
1. Retrieve the system_music_on_hold_tmp file from db/temp/
2. Reduce the file size.
3. Use the System Audio Files Update form, in the System
Administration Tool, to restore the smaller music on hold audio file.
OR create a new audio file within the size limit.
Software Procedure Requirements:
Installation/Maintenance PC (see page 7 for requirements)
IP address of the 3300 ICP
3300 ICP username and password
3300 ICP software CD
Mitel 3300 ICP Software Installer Tool (for a true upgrade)
3300 ICP Mitel Options Password (see page 11)
Database backup with voice mail messages (see page 61).
Tip: You need a new password if you have purchased new options.
You do not need a new password to change Configuration Options.

Installing the Software Installer Tool
You can install the Software Installer Tool on the Installation/Maintenance
PC, or on its own PC (see page 7 for PC requirements).
Tip: Assign a static IP address to the PC running the Software Installer Tool.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Tip: Ports required by the Software Installer Tool and Audio File Manager:
Prior to Release 7.0 - port 2002 and ports 49500-49549
Release 7.0 and later - port 443.

To install the ICP Software Installer Tool:
1. Insert the 3300 ICP software CD-ROM into the Installer PC’s CD drive.
2. Open the Tools folder, then the Software Installer folder.
3. Double-click the Setup.exe file. Follow the prompts to install the Tool.
To launch the ICP Software Installer Tool:
1. On the Start menu, point to Programs, and then click Mitel 3300 ICP
Software Installer.
2. For ICP Software Installer Tool information, refer to its Online Help.
Tip: Refer to “Requirements for AMC Connection” on page 23 if you wish
to manage software licenses online.

Installing System Software on the FTP Server
To install system software on the FTP server:
1. Insert the 3300 ICP software CD-ROM into the installer PC’s CD drive.
2. Release 7.0 and later: run the Mitel_3300ICP_Installation.exe
program from the Software folder on the software CD-ROM.
Prior to Release 7.0: run the Setup.exe program from the Software
folder on the software CD-ROM.
You will see the Installation Wizard Welcome page.
3. Click Next, read the License Agreement, and click Yes to continue.
4. Choose a location on your local FTP server for the InstallSetup
program to install files (default username and password for the
controller is ftp and @).
-

Click Browse to find the location, and then click Next OR

Click Next to accept the location displayed and continue.

You will see a read-only list of the configurations you have made.
Tip: If you do not see this list, your FTP server is not installed properly.
If the files get installed on the PC’s c: drive, your FTP server is not installed
and you will get a message ‘No FTP Server’. Re-install your FTP server.

Software Procedures

5. Click Next.
Time: The system takes approximately 10 minutes to copy the files.

6. Ensure that the Read manual instructions to complete the
installation check box is selected, and click Finish. The README file
opens.

Installing System Software on the Controller
CAUTION: If you have a Universal NSU with a PRI database,
you must convert that database before you begin the install
(see “Converting a PRI Database on a Universal NSU” on
page 76).
To perform a full or new install with the Software Installer Tool:
1. Launch the Software Installer Tool.
2. In the Identification Screen, enter the following:
-

3300 ICP IP Address or DNS Name of the controller onto which you
want to install the software

System Login ID

System Password

3. Click Configure. The Full Install Source Definition screen appears.
4. Select Perform Full Install. Enter the following information:
-

FTP Server IP Address

FTP Account Name

FTP Password

5. Click Next to open the Define Full Install Options screen.
6. Select the desired upgrade install options. All four options are selected
by default.
-

Backup to create a Backup File

Install to Install the Software

Configure to configure the License and Options

Restore to restore your Database

7. Click Next to launch the License and Option Selection screen.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

8. Enter the Purchased Options, Password, and Configuration Options
from your Mitel Options sheet.
9. Click Next.
10. Click Start on the Installation In Progress screen.
Time: This process takes approximately 45 minutes.

Upgrading System Software
Time: This process will take approximately 1 to 2 hours including the backup,
restore, and reboot.

CAUTION: If you have a Universal NSU with a PRI database,
you may need to convert that database before you begin the
upgrade. Refer to page 76 and the RN for conditions.
Tip: To minimize the size of the database, you may want to ask your users
to delete any unneeded voice mail messages.

CAUTION: You may not downgrade the LX controller to a
software version prior to release 5.0. A downgrade would
render the controller inoperable.
CAUTION: You may not downgrade the MXe controller to a
software version prior to release 7.0. A downgrade could
render the controller inoperable.
PC or Layer2 switch connection must be to Ethernet port 1.
To perform an upgrade with the 3300 Software Installer Tool:
Note: The upgrade requires a change to a different set of DHCP options
(43/60 or 124/125) used to configure Mitel IP endpoints. The change is due
to reclassification of DHCP options by the Internet Engineering Task Force
(see RFC 2133 and RFC 3925). The old options can still be used to provide
backward compatibility with IP sets that have yet to be upgraded with firmware
that supports the new options. After the upgrade, the old options may be
removed to prevent future conflicts with standard use or other vendors’ use
of these options. The change to the new options is automatic for the internal
DHCP server.

Software Procedures

Note: If you intend to rely on LLDP VLAN Discovery in the network, you
must first upgrade the 3300 ICP to Release 7.0 or later and upgrade the
IP Phone firmware to version 2.0.0.18 or later.
Note: LLDP-MED non-compliant telephones cannot use LLDP for VLAN
discovery. They must use DHCP VLAN discovery. Non-compliant sets are:
5001, 5005, 5010, 5020 IP Phones, 5140 IP Appliance, 5201, 5205, 5207,
5215 (single mode), 5220 (single mode), 5230 IP Phones, 5240 IP
Appliance, 5485 IP Pager, and 5550 IP Console keypad.

1. Ensure that you have an off-board database backup before you begin.
2. Install system software on the FTP server (see page 70).
3. Launch the Software Installer Tool.
4. In the Identification Screen, enter the following:
-

3300 ICP IP Address or DNS Name of the controller to upgrade

System Login ID and System Password

5. Click Configure. The Upgrade Source Definition Screen appears.
6. Click Perform Upgrade. Enter the following information:
-

FTP Server IP Address, FTP Account Name, and FTP Password

7. Click Next to launch the Define Upgrade Options screen.
8. Select the desired upgrade options. The options are:
-

Backup - select only if you don’t already have a backup (this
backup is the call control only; not voice mail or Embedded T1/E1)

Upgrade - not an optional selection

Configure - select only if you need to add a new option or change
existing Licensed Options

Restore - select to restore Hotel/Motel wake-up messages.

9. Click Next.
10. Click Start on the Upgrade In Progress screen.
11. Clear your PC’s browser cache and distribute new software to all IP
Phones when you upgrade a controller in a resilient cluster (page 75).
Tip: After you upgrade the 3300 ICP software, you must reboot the 3300
CITELlink Gateway in order for the gateway to load the new software.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Tip: If the system includes IP DECT wireless phones, reboot each Open
Mobility Manager (OMM) in the IP DECT system after the upgrade. Refer to
the IP DECT Technical Manual for instructions. When you reboot the OMMs,
the Radio Fixed Parts (RFPs) will obtain the latest firmware (iprfp.bin file)
from the 3300 ICP controller.

12. After the upgrade, follow the instructions below to reprogram the
DHCP server(s) to use the new DHCP options.
Reprogram the internal DHCP server (required for Release 7.0)
1. Check the DHCP Options form for previously programmed options
128 - 133 values. Ensure that the values have been correctly
converted to Option 125 for all defined scopes in the DHCP server(s)
of all upgraded controllers.
Note: DO NOT delete Options 128-133 yet.

2. After the upgraded controllers are returned to service, and all IP
Phones have re-homed to them, use the LOAD IP 1-700 maintenance
command to force a firmware reload of all devices.
3. Delete old options 128-133 on all controllers.
Reprogram external DHCP servers (required for Release 7.0)
Note: If you intend to rely on LLDP VLAN Discovery in the network, you
must first upgrade the 3300 ICP to Release 7.0 or later and upgrade the
IP Phone firmware to version 2.0.0.18 or later.
Note: LLDP-MED non-compliant telephones cannot use LLDP for VLAN
discovery. They must use DHCP VLAN discovery. Non-compliant sets are:
5001, 5005, 5010, 5020 IP Phones, 5140 IP Appliance, 5201, 5205, 5207,
5215 (single mode), 5220 (single mode), 5230 IP Phones, 5240 IP
Appliance, 5485 IP Pager, and 5550 IP Console keypad.

1. Use option pairs 60/43 or 124/125, whichever is most appropriate for
the customer's environment.
2. Ensure that previously programmed options 128-133 values are in
place for the global scope and any defined sub-scopes in the DHCP
server(s).
Note: DO NOT delete Options 128-133 yet.

Software Procedures

3. Ensure that the TFTP server pointed to by option 128 corresponds to
a server (possibly an upgraded ICP) that contains the new IP Phone
software loads.
4. On the DHCP server(s), create a global scope corresponding to option
60 or option 124 (as selected above). Repeat for each sub-scope (if
any).
5. On DHCP server(s) define option 43 or option 125 (as selected above)
for each newly created scope. See the 3300 System Administration
Tool Help for information on formatting the required option strings.
Note: The values used in the option 43 string must correspond

exactly to previous option 128-133 values.
6. After the upgraded controllers are returned to service, and all IP
Phones have re-homed to them, use the LOAD IP 1-700 maintenance
command to force a firmware reload of all devices.
7. Delete old options 128-133 on all DCHP servers.
Distributing New Software to IP Phones
Use this procedure for IP Phone software distribution after you upgrade
any controller in a resilient cluster.
1. Update all TFTPs in the scope of the upgraded controller’s cluster.
2. Wait for all IP devices to return to their primary ICP (now upgraded).
3. Use the LOAD IP 1-700 maintenance command to force a firmware
reload of all devices.
Clearing the Browser Cache
To clear the browser cache in your administration PC:
1. Launch Internet Explorer.
2. Click Internet Options in the Tools drop-down list.
3. Click Clear History and then click Yes.
4. Click Delete Files, check Delete all offline content, and click OK.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Converting a PRI Database on a Universal NSU
To convert a Universal NSU PRI database:
1. Install the IMAT that is on the 3300 software CD-ROM (see page 88).
2. Launch the new IMAT and connect to the Universal NSU.
3. Load the database from your previous IMAT backup.
4. Select PRI 8.2 or NSU 1.4 for your new database version.
5. Convert the database and then save the new database into the NSU.
6. Return to step 2 of the upgrade procedure (see page 72).
3300 ICP Software Version

Universal NSU Database Version

Up to release 3.3

PRI 8.0 or NSU 1.1

Release 4.0

PRI 8.1 or NSU 1.2

Release 4.1, 5.0, or 5.1

PRI 8.2 or NSU 1.3

Release 5.1

PRI 8.2 or NSU 1.4

Release 5.2, 6.0, or 6.1

PRI 8.2 or NSU 1.5

Release 7.0

PRI 8.2 or NSU 1.6

Applying a Software Patch
Use the Software Installer Tool to apply a software patch, from Release 4.1
and later. Get the patch (service pack) from Mitel OnLine or from Technical
Support.
Time: This process takes approximately 15 to 30 minutes including reboot.

To apply a software patch with the Software Installer Tool:
1. Copy the service pack software to a directory on the FTP Server.
2. Launch the Software Installer Tool.
3. In the Identification Screen, enter the following:

3300 ICP IP Address or DNS Name of the controller to which you
want to apply the patch

System Login ID

System Password

Software Procedures

4. Click Configure. The Patch Definition Screen appears.
5. Click Apply Patch.
6. Specify the path of the patch source by typing a path in the text box or
clicking the Browse button and navigating to a path.
7. Choose to reboot immediately or to reboot manually later. You must
reboot your system for the patch installation to take effect.
8. Click Next to view the FTP validation dialog box. This will test the FTP
connection credentials. Click Cancel in this window to return to the
Source Definition Screen.
9. The FTP validation dialog box is displayed. Following successful
testing, the Patch Install In-Progress Screen is displayed.

Installing System Software Manually
Use this manual procedure to install software prior to Release 3.3, when a
hard drive must re replaced, or to upgrade software prior to Release
4.1.7.5. In all other cases, we recommend that you use the 3300 ICP
Software Installer Tool.
Time: The complete manual install procedure takes approximately 2 hours
for an average-sized database (50-100 MB) and approximately 4 hours for
a large database (600 MB), including the database restore.

CAUTION: The software install procedure will format the
controller hard drive and install new software. The
procedure will erase all system settings, including voice
mail messages, so you must back up your database. If you
do not have a database backup to restore, you will have to
reprogram the system.

The manual upgrade/install procedure consists of the following
sub-procedures, all of which must be completed in order:
Steps 1-2: Establish a Connection to the Controller (page 78).
Step 3: Back up the 3300 ICP database page 78.
Steps 5-10: Reboot the Controller (page 79).
Steps 11-12: Set Your Purchased Mitel Options (page 81).
Step 13: Restore the Database OR Program the System (page 81).

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Steps 16-20: Perform the Maintenance Checks (page 82).
Steps 21-22: Upgrade IP phones and force lease renewals (page 82).
Tip: Ensure that no one else makes changes to the database once you’ve
backed up the database. Any changes not included in your backup will be
lost when the system is restored.
Tip: If a Security Information Warning pop-up window appears during this
procedure, click Yes to continue.

Establish a Connection to the Controller
Tip: You can connect directly to the controller through an Ethernet port. You
can also connect to the controller through the LAN. WAN connectivity is not
supported.

1. Using an RJ-45 Ethernet cable, connect the Installer PC directly to one
of the 3300 ICP Ethernet ports, or through the Layer 2 switch (required
for the MX and, 100-user systems). For the CX, use LAN port 17. For
the MXe, use LAN port 1.
Tip: The Installer PC must be on the same subnet as the RTC IP address;
otherwise, a router will be required on your network, and the gateway IP
address of that router must be applied to the RTC setup as well as to the
Installer PC. Also make sure that the Installer PC’s IP address does not
conflict with any other IP addresses.
Tip: Check the FTP site properties and ensure that the FTP username has
the proper permissions. If you use another username, make sure that it
permits you to access the FTP server in the IIS/PWS-FTP site and also that
it is programmed on the RTC (see “Installation and Upgrade” on page 183
for more information).

2. From the Installer PC, PING the 3300 controller to verify that you have
established a connection.
3. Back up the 3300 ICP database (including voice mail for an
install/restore) to the Installer PC (see page 61).
CAUTION: If you have a Universal NSU with a PRI database,
you may need to convert that database before you begin the
upgrade. Refer to “Converting a PRI Database on a Universal
NSU” on page 76 and the RN for conditions.

Software Procedures

Install the Software on the FTP Server
4. Refer to “Installing System Software on the FTP Server” on page 70,
Step 1 through Step 6.
Reboot the Controller
5. Launch your VT100 emulator communications program.
6. Type appShutdown, and press ENTER. The controller reboots.
7. The communication program will instruct you to Press
to stop auto-boot AFTER
countdown starts (Release 5.2 and later) or Press any key to stop
auto-boot (prior to Release 5.2). You have 7 seconds to press a key
or the system will auto-boot.
Tip: If you miss the 10-second timeout, manually reboot the controller by
pressing the Reset button. The RTC opens, and you once again have
10 seconds to complete Step 7.

8. At [VXWorks Boot] type c, and press ENTER.
9. For each setting shown in bold (see Table 4 below), type the table
value, then press ENTER. For all other settings, press ENTER to
accept the default value.
Tip: The VXWorks parameters are case-sensitive.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 4: VxWorks Settings
Prompt
boot device

Value

Note

motfcc

Boot device is Network.

processor number

Not used.

host name

bootHost

file name

Boot_Install Boot location and file name.

inet on ethernet (e)

IP address and subnet mask (hex) for
controller RTC (for example,
134.199.63.11:ffffff00). Obtain it from your
IT administrator.

inet on backplane (b)
host inet (h)

IP address of Installer PC. Used for
software upgrades.

gateway inet (g)

IP address of the end user’s default
gateway for the 3300 ICP (must be
outside the DHCP range).

user (u)

ftp

ftp password (ftp)

ftp

flags (f)

0x0

Uses host inet IP address.

target name (n)
startup script (s)
other (o)

motfcc

10. At [VXWorks Boot], type @, or press the controller Reset button.
Time: The system takes approximately 30 minutes to format the hard drive
and install the software.
Tip: If you get an error message see “Installation and Upgrade” on page 183.
After the software install is complete, the file name for all platforms, for
Release 6.0 and later will be: /partition1/Rtc8260.
Tip: Prior to Release 6.0: LX, 250/700-user: /partition1/Rtc8260;
MX: /partition1/Lite200UP; 100-user: /partition1/Lite8260.
Tip: Continue with Step 11 by using the System Administration Tool, or
you can continue by using the Software Installer Tool (see "Installing
System Software on the Controller" on page 71).

Software Procedures

Log into the 3300 ICP ESM
11. Launch Internet Explorer, and type the IP address of the controller (for
example, http://). Log into the 3300 ICP ESM using
the default username (system) and password (password).
Tip: The Installer PC must have the same subnet address as the RTC IP
(for example, 192.168.1.n) to launch ESM.
Tip: If your login fails, it may be because the system is not finished loading.
Log in when you see the message “Voice Mail Successfully Started”.

Set Your Purchased Mitel Options
12. Set the options in the License and Option Selection form according
to your purchased Mitel options (refer to your records or go to AMC
(see page 26)).
Tip: Since the installation of new software erases all of your system settings,
you must complete this form even if you have not purchased any new options.

a. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click License and Option
Selection. Click Change in the top right corner.
b. Enter the information for the system options you purchased.
c. Enter your Mitel Options Password in the Password field.
d. Change the Configuration options as needed.
Tip: We recommend that you enable Networking Option and Mitai/Tapi
Computer Integration.

e. Click Save. A pop-up window instructs you to restore or reboot.
Click OK to close the window.
Restore the Database OR Program the System
13. To restore a database, refer to page 63, and continue with Step 15.
14. If you do not have a database backup:
-

Reboot the controller (see page 99).

Program the system using the System Administration Tool.

Issue the dbms save maintenance command.

Enter the dbms stat command to verify the DBMS save, and that
the DBMS_Initialized flag is on.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Perform the Maintenance Checks
Tip: Complete the following Maintenance Checks only after a restore.

CAUTION: Do not reset system components while
executing the following checks.
15. Verify that none of the NSUs is loading. If they are, wait until they have
finished loading (L0/L1 LEDs are not marching).
16. When the system has finished resetting, log back into ESM.
17. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click Maintenance Commands.
18. Enter the dbms stat command to verify the DBMS save, and that the
DBMS_Initialized flag is on.
19. Issue the Type *.dr.logfile_1 command to display the log file created
during the Data Restore. When the checks are complete, review the
log to ensure there were no errors during the restore procedure.
20. Issue the mess sub command to check the programmed NSU links;
they should be OPEN. If any programmed links are in SCAN, check
the LINK STATUS LEDs; if the amber LEDs are marching, this means
that the NSUs are writing to the RAM DISK.
21. Upgrade the IP telephones and force lease renewals. Issue the LOAD
IPDevice 1 to X maintenance command (where X represents the last
IP device number) to upgrade the IP phones.
22. If the system has a peripheral cabinet with DNI line cards, enter the
Load x x x command to load the DNI cards and the latest DNI line
load.
Tip: If you have an IP console, you must:

Cycle the power on the IP TKB (key pad).

Upgrade the IP Console software (if required).

Renew the IP address for the console PC (if required).
Power down or at the DOS prompt enter ipconfig /release
and then ipconfig /renew.

23. Back up the database (see “Back Up a Database” on page 61).

Software Procedures

Upgrading/Installing with Maximum Elements
Change
The following options have some impacts to the upgrade/install procedure
that you need to be aware of:
To upgrade and change to a default dimension:
•

30/60 maximum elements per cluster (with default or flexed
dimensions) to 250 maximum elements(with default dimensions)

•

250 maximum elements per cluster (with default dimensions) to 30/60
maximum elements per cluster (with default dimensions)

1. Back up the database (see page 61).
2. Follow the standard full install procedure (see page 71) using the
Software Installer Tool.
-

In the License and Options Selection form change Maximum
Elements per Cluster to or from 250. The Software Installer Tool
will reboot the controller.

3. Restore the database (see page 63). Click the Use the
existing/current Dimension Selections radio button.
4. When prompted, reboot the controller (see page 99).
5. Back up the database (see page 61).
To upgrade and change to a flexed dimension:
•

30/60 maximum elements per cluster (with default or flexed
dimensions) to 250 maximum elements per cluster (with flexed
dimensions)

•

250 maximum elements per cluster (with default or flexed
dimensions) to 30/60 maximum elements per cluster (with flexed
dimensions)

1. Back up the database (see page 61).
2. Print the Dimension Selection form if you have flexed dimensions.
3. Follow the standard full install (see page 71) procedure using the
Software Installer Tool, but do not Restore; clear the Restore button.
-

In the License and Options Selection form, change Maximum
Elements per Cluster to or from 250. The Software Installer Tool
will reboot the controller.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

4. Complete the remaining steps in this procedure using the System
Administration Tool. Log into ESM using the customer’s username and
password (see page 8), then click System Administration Tool.
5. Program Dimension Selections to modify Dimension 19. If you had
flexed dimension 17, program Dimension Selections using the
printed dimensions from step 2 (see Change the Resource Dimension
in the online help for details).
6. Reboot the controller (see page 99).
7. Restore the database (see page 63). Click the Use the
existing/current Dimension Selections radio button.
8. When prompted, reboot the controller (see page 99).
9. Back up the database (see page 61).

Upgrade to Rls 6.0 or later with Flexed Dimensions
Use the Software Installer Tool to install the Release 6.0 or later software
and then use the System Administration Tool to restore your database.
To upgrade to Release 6.0 or later with flexed dimensions:
1. Print the Dimension Selection form.
2. Launch the Software Installer Tool.
3. In the Identification Screen, enter the following:
-

3300 ICP IP Address or DNS Name of the controller onto which you
want to install the software

System Login ID

System Password

4. Click Configure. The Full Install Source Definition screen appears.
5. Select Perform Full Install. Enter the following information:
-

FTP Server IP Address

FTP Account Name

FTP Password

6. Click Next to open the Define Full Install Options screen.
7. Clear the Restore radio button. All four options are selected by default.

Backup to create a Backup File

Install to Install the Software

Software Procedures

Configure to configure the License and Options

DO NOT select Restore

8. Click Next to launch the License and Option Selection screen.
9. Click Next to accept options without modification. DO NOT change the
Maximum Elements.
10. Click Next.
11. Click Start on the Installation In Progress screen.
Time: This process takes approximately 45 minutes.

12. After the installation is complete, log into the System Administration
Tool.
13. In the Dimension Selection form, change dimensions to match the
quantities in the form that you printed in step 1 and click Save.
14. Reboot the system.
15. Launch the System Administration tool.
16. In the Restore form, select Use current Dimension Selections
(select if Dimensions were modified).
17. Click Start Restore.
18. Reboot the system.
19. Back up the database.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Programming Overview
Optional: use the ICP Software Installer Tool to restore a saved
database or, from 3300 Release 7.0 UR1, to migrate a database (from
SX-2000 LIGHT, SX-2000 MicroLIGHT, 3200 ICP, or 3800 WAG
systems). Prior to Release 7.0 UR1, use the 3300 Configuration Tool
to migrate a database from legacy systems. Refer to the ICP Software
Installer help system for programming information.
Use the System Administration Tool to program the 3300 ICP. See the
System Administration Tool online help for programming information.
Optional: Use the System Administration Tool to program networks or
clusters of 3300 ICPs. Refer to the Voice Clustering (Portable
Directory Number) Guide on Mitel OnLine for planning information.
Refer to the System Data Synchronization book in the System
Administration Tool online help for programming instructions.
Use IMAT to program PRI/QSIG and R2 NSUs (does not apply to
Embedded T1/E1).
Use the System Administration Tool to program the required voice
mail settings in the Voice Mail folder. Refer to the Online Help for more
information.
Tip: These settings will not take effect until you reboot the system.
Tip: If you have not already done so, perform a DBMS Save (Step 4 on
page 26) or verify that the DBMS_Initialized flag is on (Step 5 on page 26).

Basic Hardware Programming
Refer to the System Administration Tool Online Help for programming.
•

“Basic Programming and Data Save” on page 25

•

"Programming DHCP" on page 29

•

"Programming the Controller DHCP Server Settings (for Release 7.0
and later)" on page 31

•

"Configuring the Layer 2 Switch" on page 35

•

"Programming the Peripheral Cabinet" on page 45

•

"Programming Phones" on page 52.

Software Procedures

Install 6000 MAS Software
You will need this procedure only if you have to replace the Application
Processor Card (APC) hard drive. When you purchase the APC, with it’s
hard drive, the 6000 Managed Application Server (MAS) software is
already on the hard drive.
Refer to “APC Hard Drive (CXi)” on page 121 to install the hard drive.
To install the 6000 MAS software:
1. Insert the 6000 MAS software CD into a portable CD-ROM drive
attached to a USB connector located on the front panel of the 3300
ICP.
2. Power down the 3300 controller (see page 99).
3. Power up the 3300 controller.
4. Launch the secure telnet client.
-

Enter open using port <2005> (command with
example IP address, open 192.168.1.2 2005).

Enter the 3300 username and password.

5. Follow on-screen instructions to configure the 6000 MAS and blades.
Refer to the 6000 Managed Application Server documentation on Mitel
OnLine.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Install and Use IMAT
The ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool (IMAT) software is used
to program PRI and R2 cards and Network Services Units. IMAT is also
used to install PRI card and R2 card software.
Tip: IMAT is not applicable for the CX and CXi controllers.
Tip: IMAT is not needed to program Embedded PRI, T1/D4, and QSIG
(dual T1/E1 framer module or T1/E1 combo module in the controller).
Tip: You must have IMAT software version 7.3 or greater to use with Release
4.1 or greater of the 3300 ICP software. Use IMAT version 7.4 with Release
5.1 of the 3300 ICP software.

Installing IMAT on the PC
You can install IMAT on the Maintenance PC or on its own PC (IMAT PC).
Tip: We recommend using an Ethernet connection from the IMAT PC when
running Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP, or
Windows 98. For Windows 95/98 (without a NIC), use Dial-up Networking.

To install IMAT on the PC:
1. Close all the applications running on the PC.
2. Insert the 3300 ICP software CD-ROM in the CD drive.
3. Open the Tools folder, then the Disk 1 folder.
4. Double click the Setup.exe file. The installation program starts. Follow
the prompts to install IMAT.
5. Connect the NSU Ethernet port directly to the NIC of the PC using a
crossover cable or connect the NSU Ethernet port to the network.
Tip: Refer to the IMAT online help for LAN connection details. If you're using
a dial-up connection, see “Connect a Windows 95/98 PC to the NSU via
Dial-Up” on page 90.

Programming an IP Address into the NSU
You must change the IP and gateway addresses to match an available
address on the LAN.

Software Procedures

To program the IP address that IMAT will access:
1. Program the PC’s serial port with a baud rate of 38400.
2. Connect the IMAT PC to the NSU serial port.
3. Establish a terminal session with the NSU card.
4. Reboot the NSU.
5. Press any key during auto-boot to halt the boot process.
6. At the [MC269AA Boot]-: prompt enter C.
7. Change the boot parameters, inet on ethernet (e) :
192.168.1.1:ffffff00 and for gateway inet (g) : 192.168.1.251 default
values to the values provided to you by your LAN administrator.
8. For all other settings, press ENTER to accept the default.

9. At [VXWorks Boot], type @, or press the Reset button on the
controller.
10. Connect the NSU Ethernet port to the LAN.
Dial-up Connection of the IMAT PC to the NSU
For Windows 95 and Windows 98, refer to "Connect a Windows 95/98 PC
to the NSU via Dial-Up" on page 90.
For Windows 4.0, Windows 2000 Professional, or Windows XP without a
NIC, refer to IMAT Online Help for Dial-up connection details.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Using IMAT
For more information, refer to the IMAT online help.
To log onto an IMAT computer:
1. Launch IMAT from the Start menu or the desktop (ignore any
message about username configuration error).
2. On the File menu, select Connect to Remote Site.
3. Click to select Ethernet Network Card in the Connection Medium
field.
To exit the IMAT application:
1. Save any open databases.
2. On the File menu, click Exit.
Connect a Windows 95/98 PC to the NSU via Dial-Up
Tip: You can also connect the PC to the NSU via a modem (remote
connection). For more information, see the IMAT Online Help.
Tip: Refer to the IMAT online help for dial-up connection details when your
PC is running on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 Professional, or
Windows XP without a NIC.

By default, Windows does not support a direct cable connection. You must
add a device driver. Windows takes the information from a Mitel file and
creates the driver called NT Direct Connection.
To install a Direct Connection Device Driver (Windows 95/98):
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Modems icon.
3. In the Modem Properties window, click Add.
4. In the Install New Modem screen, click Other.
5. Select Don't detect my modem, I will select from a list, then click
Next.
6. Click Have Disk.
7. Type c:\Program Files\Mitel\Imat in the Copy manufacturer's files
from field, then click OK.
8. In the Install from Disk window, click OK.

Software Procedures

9. Click Next to select the NT Direct Connection.
10. Select COM 1 or COM 2, and then click Next.
11. Click Finish.
12. In the Modem Properties window, select NT Direct Connection,
then click Properties.
13. Set the following parameters:
-

Maximum speed: 38 400

Check: Only connect at this speed

Data bits: 8

Parity: None

Stop bits: 1

Mode: Auto Answer

In Advanced Settings window, do the following for a direct connect
cable:
-

Turn off: Error control

Turn off: Flow Control

14. Click OK and close the Control Panel window.
Physically Connecting the PC to an NSU
• Connect an RS-232 straight DTE serial cable between the NSU’s serial
port and the PC’s serial port.
Tip: If you are connecting through a modem, use a null modem adapter on
the NSU side.

Creating a Dial-Up Network Connection on Windows 95/98
Typically, you need to follow this procedure twice to create two Dial-up
Networking connections, one for on-site direct access, and one for remote
modem access.
1. On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and
then click Dial-Up Connections.
2. Double-click Make New Connection.
3. Enter an appropriate name for the connection (for example, Direct for
direct connections, Remote or a customer’s name for remote
connections) and click Next.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Tip: If you are creating a direct connection, make sure NT Direct Connection
is listed in the drop-down list in the Make a New Connection window.

4. Enter an Area Code and Telephone Number and select a Country
Code from the drop-down list. Click Next. Click Finish.
5. Right-click your new connection icon and click Properties.
6. Click Configure. Ensure the fields are set as follows:
-

Data bits: 8

Parity: none

For a direct connection:
-

Maximum speed: 38400

Check: only connect at this speed

Select: wait for dial tone before dialing

Select: cancel the call time at 60 sec

Click Advanced and turn off error control and flow control

For a remote connection:
-

Stop bits: 1

Click Advanced and turn on error control and select Compress
data.

Turn on flow control and select Hardware.

7. Click OK.
8. Select Server Types tab and make sure that PPP: Windows,
WindowsNT3.5, Internet or PPP:Internet appears in the Type of
Dial-Up Server field.
9. In the Advanced Options field, select Log onto Network and Enable
software compression.
10. Make sure that only TCP/IP is selected in the Allowed network
protocols field.
11. Select the Scripting tab and enter:
-

for a 3300 Universal NSU: c:\program files\mitel\
Imat\pridun.scp.

for an R2 NSU: c:\program files\mitel\Imat \r2dun.scp.

12. Click OK.

Software Procedures

Install the Java Plug-In
The Java plug-in comes with the 3300 ICP software and must be installed
on the Installer PC for every user profile. During backup/restore
procedures, the software detects whether the proper version of Java
Plug-in has been installed. If not, it will prompt you to install the correct
version with the installation wizard. You need Java version 1.4.2_06 for 3300
ICP Release 4.0 and later.

The identitydb.obj file must be present on every profile for every
computer that will be used for a database backup or restore. Installation
instructions are on the Backup and Restore screen in the System
Administration Tool.
Tip: We recommend that you avoid running multiple versions of the Java
plug-in. If you are running the incorrect version for the upgrade, you should
uninstall it from every PC used as a 3300 ICP administrator, and allow the
software to install the correct version, during the next backup/restore, on
each PC.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Chapter 4

Upgrades and FRUs

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Upgrades and FRUs

About this Chapter
This chapter contains the following sections:
•

“Upgrade a 3300 ICP” on page 98

•

“Add or Replace Controller FRUs” on page 104

•

“Add Controller FRUs” on page 116

•

“Replace Controller FRUs” on page 125

•

“Install ASU II FRUs” on page 141

•

“Install Peripheral Cabinet FRUs” on page 142

•

“Install Digital Service Unit FRUs” on page 151

•

“Install SUPERSET HUB FRUs” on page 161

•

“Migrate an SX-2000 PBX” on page 162.
Tip: For information on installing the 3300 ICP, see Chapter 2: “Installation”
on page 13. For information on upgrading the system software, see
“Upgrade/Install System Software” on page 66.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Safety Considerations
WARNING: READ THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
PERFORMING THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER (SEE
“SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” ON PAGE 3).
WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW ALL INSTRUCTIONS
MAY PRESENT A RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
CAUTION: To prevent ESD damage to the equipment: (1)
Ensure that the system is grounded before you install a card.
(2) Whenever you handle cards, wear an anti-static strap
(always attach the wrist strap from the cabinet). (3) When
removing cards from the cabinet, immediately place them in
an anti-static bag.
CAUTION: All installation, field replacement, and servicing
procedures must be carried out by service personnel who
have successfully completed the Mitel Installation and maintenance training course.
CAUTION: Hardware is sensitive to shock and vibration;
handle hardware with care.

Upgrade a 3300 ICP
Use Table 1 on page 18 for a view of controller component options. See
page 235 to view the controller speed. Refer to page 66 for software
upgrade options.
Tip: Upgrading to a larger controller or to a faster processor means the
replacement of the controller. For example, you cannot upgrade a controller
from 300 MHz to 450 MHz, or convert a CX controller to an MX controller.

Adding Resiliency
For information on upgrading to a resilient system, refer to the 3300 ICP
Resiliency document on Mitel OnLine.

Upgrades and FRUs

Power Down the Controller
To power down the controller, Release 7.0 and later:
1. In the System Administration Tool, navigate to Maintenance
Commands.
2. Enter the Shutdown command.
3. Remove power:
- for the MXe, set both power switches to OFF
- for all other controllers, remove the power cord.
To power down the controller, prior to Release 7.0:
1. Type appShutdown at the RTC shell.
2. When the controller boots up, the communication program will instruct
you to Press to stop auto-boot
AFTER countdown starts (Release 5.2 and later) or Press any key
to stop auto-boot (prior to Release 5.2).
Tip: Prior to Release 7.0, complete steps 1 and 2 to stop the system from
auto-booting.

3. Remove the power cord.

Perform a System Reset
To reset the system, Release 7.0 and later:
1. In the System Administration Tool, navigate to Maintenance
Commands.
2. Perform a system reboot by using the reset system command.
To reset the system prior to Release 7.0:
1. In the System Administration Tool, navigate to Maintenance
Commands.
2. Perform a system reboot by using the LOAD 1 c

Removing/Replacing LX/700-User Controller Cover
To remove the LX/700-user controller cover:
1. Power down the controller (page 99).
2. Disconnect all cables.

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

3. Remove the controller from the rack (if applicable) and place it on a
suitable work area.
4. Remove the front faceplate (clip it off).
5. Turn the controller over gently, keeping the front panel facing forward.
6. Remove the two screws from the underside of the controller.
7. Turn the controller the right side up and rotate it until the back panel
unit is facing you.
8. Remove the two screws from the back panel.
9. Slide the cover forward until it catches, then tilt the cover up to remove.
To install the LX/700-user controller cover:
1. Turn the controller until the back panel is facing forward.
2. Lift the lock for the AC power cord and place the cover at an angle to
hook onto the back of the unit.
3. Straighten and slide the cover forward as far as it will go.
4. Secure the shell by inserting and snugly securing the two screws on
the back panel.
5. Turn the controller gently upside down.
6. Secure the screws on the bottom front of the unit.
7. Turn the controller right side up.
8. Clip on the front face-plate taking care not to damage the protruding
FIM connectors.
9. Reinstall the controller into the rack (if applicable).
10. Reconnect all cables.
11. Power on the unit.

Removing/Replacing MX/100-User Controller Cover
To remove the MX/100-user controller cover:
1. Turn off the power to the unit.
2. Disconnect all cables.
3. Remove the controller from the rack and place it on a suitable work
area.

100

Upgrades and FRUs

4. Remove the four screws from the top of the controller.
5. Slide the cover back and tilt up to remove.
To install the MX/100-user controller cover:
1. Tilt and slide the cover forward under the front faceplate.
2. Secure the four screws on the top of the unit.
3. Reinstall the controller into the rack (if applicable).
4. Reconnect all cables.
5. Power on the unit.

Removing/Replacing CX/CXi/MXe Controller Cover
To remove the CX/CXi and MXe controller cover:
1. Unplug the power cord from the controller and disconnect all cables.
2. Remove the controller from the rack and place it on a suitable work
area.
3. Loosen the captive screw at the back panel of the controller (1).
4. Grip the handle on the plastic trim plate and pull back about 1/2” until
the cover catches (2).
5. Lift the cover upward to remove it (3).

Figure 9: CX/CXi Controller - Removing the Cover

101

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

To install the CX/CXi and MXe controller cover:
1. Turn the controller until the front panel is facing forward.
2. Align the pins inside the cover with the corresponding slots on the
controller, and then, with the cover about half an inch from the back,
lower the cover to seat it.
3. Slide the cover toward the back of the controller as far as it will go.
4. Tighten the screw on the back panel.
5. Reinstall the controller into the rack (if applicable).
6. Reconnect all cables.
7. Power on the unit.

Upgrading to a 300 or 450 MHz Controller
If you have a 133 MHz controller, you can replace it with a 300 MHz
controller. You can replace a 700-User 300 MHz controller with 450 MHz
controller. 64 compression channels requires a minimum 300 MHz
controller.
WARNING:TO UPGRADE TO A 300 OR 450 MHZ CONTROLLER,
MOVE THE HARD DRIVE FROM THE OLD CONTROLLER TO
THE NEW CONTROLLER. MANUALLY INSTALL THE RELEASE
5.0 SOFTWARE (SEE "INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
MANUALLY" ON PAGE 77) AND RESTORE THE DATABASE.
To upgrade a 133 MHz controller to a 300 or 450 MHz controller:
1. Power down the old controller (see page 99).
2. Disconnect all cables from the old controller.
3. Move the hard drive from the old controller to the new controller (see
“Hard Drive Replacement Overview” on page 125).
4. Remove each controller’s cover (see page 99).
5. Move the System ID module from the old controller to the new
controller (see “System ID Module” on page 133).
6. Connect the cables to the new controller.
7. Power up the new controller.

102

Upgrades and FRUs

Upgrading to a 700-User Controller
You can increase the capacity of a 250-user controller to that of a 700-user
controller by adding the following modules:
•

One DSP module for telecom support (21061/21161 based).

•

One Dual FIM module.

•

One 64-Channel echo canceller.
Tip: A second 64-channel echo canceller can be added, or the existing
64-channel echo canceller can be replaced by a 128-channel echo canceller.
Tip: To add compression channels to the upgraded system, see “DSP
Module” on page 105.

Refer to "Install Controller Components" on page 15 for module slot
locations.
To upgrade a 250-user controller to a 700-user controller:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Disconnect all cables from the controller.
3. Remove the controller cover (see page 99 or page 100).
4. Install the Dual FIM module if you are adding peripheral cabinets or
NSUs (see “Dual Fiber Interface Module (FIM)” on page 104).
5. Install the DSP module in Slot 7 (see “DSP Module” on page 105).
6. Install the 64 echo canceller module in Slot 6 (see “Echo Canceller” on
page 112).
7. Replace the controller cover (see “Removing/Replacing LX/700-User
Controller Cover” on page 99).
8. Reconnect the cables to the controller.
9. Power up the controller (see page 22).

103

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Add or Replace Controller FRUs
This section contains detailed information on adding or replacing the 3300
ICP Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). See page 365 for part numbers.
The section is organized as follows:
•

“Dual Fiber Interface Module (FIM)” on page 104

•

“DSP Module” on page 105

•

“Framer (Dual T1/E1, T1/E1 Combo, Quad BRI)” on page 110

•

“Echo Canceller” on page 112

•

“Analog Option Board (MX Controller)” on page 113

•

“Analog Option Board (CX/CXi Controller)” on page 114.
Tip: See also “Add Controller FRUs” on page 116 and “Replace Controller
FRUs” on page 125.

Dual Fiber Interface Module (FIM)
Tip: You may not install a FIM in a CX or CXi controller.

Tip: Ensure that the type of the optical interface matches that of the mating
unit (820nm single-mode, 1300nm single-mode, or 1300mn multi-mode).

To add or replace a Dual FIM:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Remove the dual FIM from its packaging.
3. Remove a blank module cover. See the Figures on page 15 for slot
locations.
4. Line up the connectors and firmly seat the FIM onto the main board.
5. Secure the Dual FIM module onto the main board using the screws
and lock washers provided.
6. Replace the controller cover and secure it with its screws (see “To
install the LX/700-user controller cover:” on page 100, “To remove the
MX/100-user controller cover:” on page 100, or “Removing/Replacing
CX/CXi/MXe Controller Cover” on page 101).

104

Upgrades and FRUs

DSP Module
You may have to add additional DSP modules to:
•

increase the number of voice mail ports

•

add compression channels

•

LX/MXe expanded/700-user: up to 64

MX/MXe base/100-user: up to 32

CX/CXi: up to 16

increase telephony resources to support more TDM devices.
Tip: Refer to Table 7 on page 108 to calculate DSP requirements for the CX
and CXi controllers. You may replace two Dual DSPs with one Quad DSP.

This section contains DSP tables for:
•

“Calculating DSP Usage (MXe)” on page 105

•

“Calculating DSP Usage (LX/MX)” on page 105

•

“Calculating DSP Usage (CX/CXi)” on page 108.

Calculating DSP Usage (MXe)
The embedded DSP resources on the MXe are sufficient to support
telephony services, conferencing and voice mail. Additional DSPs are
required to support G.729a compression.
Table 5: MXe DSP Requirements Example
MXe configuration

Embedded DSP

Quad DSP MMC

Standard MXe

√

—

MXe with 32 channels G.729a

√

MXe with second processor and 64
channels G.729a

√

Calculating DSP Usage (LX/MX)
Enter your system parameters in Table 6 (see Table 5 for MXe, Table 7 on
page 108 for CX/CXi), to determine the number of Quad DSP modules
required. Other features in a system which can affect the DSP usage are
ACD, external applications, and heavy or light traffic.

105

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 6: Quad DSP Requirement Calculator (LX/MX
Basic Requirements

1.77

IP Lines

× 0.0012 =

TDM Lines

× 0.0025 =

IP networking (enter total users in
above equation, if IP networking is
enabled, otherwise enter zero)

× 0.002 =

FAX detection (Note 1)

× 0.003 =
÷ 15 =

Voice Mail Ports:
Subtotal (Note 2)
Required telephony devices

1.77

minimum = 4
subtotal minus embedded

Compression Channels:
(round up result to next integer)

÷8=

Total DSP Devices =
Quad DSP modules = Total DSP devices ÷ 4
(round up result to next integer)
Note 1. FAX detection only applied when IP trunks are active.
Note 2. Every system allocates a minimum of 4 DSP devices to telecom
applications.

The result of this calculation gives a reasonable estimate of the number of
DSP devices and modules required to support the system configuration. If
the total number of DSP devices is very close to a Quad module boundary,
or if there are other issues with a complex system, contact Professional
Services for a detailed analysis of system resources and performance.
Voice mail notes:
•

Program the additional voice mail ports, then add the DSP MMCs if
necessary (for the MXe, you need to add DSPs only for compression).

•

With Release 5.0, voice mail ports support G.729a compression.
When you increase the number of ports you may also have to add
DSPs to handle the increased demand for compression.

Compression notes:
•

106

Compression resources are assigned to the first DSP devices found
starting at the lowest-numbered available slot.

Upgrades and FRUs

•

You must purchase compression licenses before adding a DSP
module for compression.

•

Upgrading to 64 compression channels requires a minimum 300 MHz
controller (see “Upgrading to a 300 or 450 MHz Controller”, page 102).

•

If you are adding compression to a 100-user controller with a Single
or Dual Telecom DSP in slot 3, you must first move the Telecom DSP
to slot 4.

Telecom notes:
•

Telecom resources are assigned from the highest-numbered slot.
The first Telecom DSP in an MX or 100-user controller is in slot 4. The
first Telecom DSP in an LX or 700-user controller is in slot 8.

Perform this step if the system needs compression channels and/or 30
voice mail ports and/or increased telephony resources to support more
TDM devices (see “Hardware Part Numbers” on page 365 for the part
numbers of the DSP modules).
To determine the number of DSP modules required in a system, use the
formula in Table 5 on page 105 or Table 6 on page 106 Table 7 on
page 108.
•

LX controller ships with two Quad DSP modules

•

MX controller ships with one Quad DSP module

•

MXe controller ships with embedded DSP equivalent to two Quad DSP
modules (sufficient to support a 400-user system).

•

CX and CXi controllers ship with a Dual Embedded DSP on the main
board. The T1/E1 Combo also includes DSP resources.
Tip: Voice mail ports support G.711 and G.729a compression. This applies
to all types of voice mail ports, including RAD, Music on Hold, Auto Attendant,
and Record-a-call.
Tip: Make sure you have the appropriate compression license before
installing DSP modules for compression.
Tip: In the following scenario, the call will not be compressed when going
through the second controller: a call originates in a Release 5.0 or later
controller with compression OFF, through a Release 4.1 controller with
compression ON, and terminates at a Release 5.0 or later controller.

107

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Calculating DSP Usage (CX/CXi)
Table 7: CX/CXi DSP Configurations
Base System
(2 total)
3 3-party conf.
4 voice mail ports
0 G.729a channels
24 IP phones
8 ONS phones
12 LS/CLASS
trunks

Base + T1/E1
Combo
(3 total)

Base + Dual
DSP
(4 total)

Base + T1/E1
Combo + Dual DSP
(5 total)

10 3-party conf.
16 voice mail ports
0 G.729a channels
64 IP phones
8 ONS phones
12 LS/CLASS
trunks
24 T1 trunks

10 3-party conf.
16 voice mail ports
0 G.729a channels
40 IP phones
8 ONS phones
12 LS/CLASS
trunks

10 3-party conf.
16 voice mail ports
16 G.729a channels
64 IP phones
8 ONS phones
12 LS/CLASS trunks
24 T1 trunks

3 3-party conf.
4 voice mail ports
8 G.729a channels
40 IP phones
8 ONS phones
12 LS/CLASS
trunks

Notes:
1. The number of conference, voice mail, and compression resources is fixed by
the purchased option and the number of DSP devices available; the other
values are adjustable. Compression alters the number of resources available
for the system. For example, by adding 8 compression resources to a system
with 4 DSPs total, the maximum number of three-party conferences drops to 3
and the maximum number of voice mail ports drops to 4.
2. The controller supports the G.711 and G.729a audio codecs.
- The G.711 PCM audio codec for 56/64 kbps generally provides the best
voice quality and is comparable to TDM-type connections.
- The G.729a audio codec for 8/13 kbps provides a good reduction in
bandwidth with only minor loss in voice quality.
- A purchasable MOSS option (Option 120, Number of Compression
Resources) controls the number of G.729a codecs available to IP devices in
the system. Compression enables more devices to share the available
bandwidth. The option is purchasable in multiples of 8 to a maximum of 16.
The default value is 0. The quantity entered must exactly match the quantity
on the MOSS sheet.
3. A hard drive is strongly recommended for systems that have more than eight
voice mail ports or when Record a Call is frequently used.
4. The base CX contains an Analog Main Board (AMB) that supports 4 ONS and
6 LS circuits. By installing an Analog Option Board (AOB), capacity doubles to
8 ONS and 12 LS circuits. The AOB does not require extra DSP resources.

108

Upgrades and FRUs

Adding or Replacing a DSP Module
To add or replace a DSP module:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99) and disconnect all cables.
2. Remove the controller cover (see page 99 or page 101).
3. Remove the DSP module from its packaging.
4. Remove a blank module cover if necessary. For installation in a rear
slot, internal site in the MXe, or Slot 3 in the CX and CXi controllers,
skip to Step 8. See the Figures on page 15 for slot locations.
5. If you are replacing a defective DSP, remove the screws and lock
washers and pull up on the module to remove it.
6. Remove the small PCB (or the defective DSP module) from the blank
module cover (1 in Figure 10).
7. Install the module cover on the new DSP module (2 in Figure 10).
8. Insert the DSP module in the appropriate slot, firmly seat it onto the
main board, and secure using the screws and lock washers provided.
9. Put the controller’s top cover back on, and secure it with its screws
(see page 100, page 100, or page 101).
10. Reconnect the cables to the controller.
11. Power up the controller (see page 22).

Figure 10: Attaching Cover Plate to the DSP Module

109

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Programming the Additional Voice Mail Ports
To program the additional voice mail ports:
1. In the System Administration Tool, change the number of voice mail
ports. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click the Voice Mail Port
Capacity form.
2. In the Voice Mail Port Assignment form, program the extension and
interconnect numbers for each new voice mail port.
3. Reboot the controller (see page 99).

Framer (Dual T1/E1, T1/E1 Combo, Quad BRI)
Embedded T1/E1 (for PRI or T1/D4) or BRI
You can add embedded T1/E1 (for PRI, T1/D4, or MSDN/DPNSS) or
embedded BRI to a controller by adding one to three framer modules (Dual
T1/E1, or Quad BRI) in the controller (see “Hardware Part Numbers” on
page 365 for the part number of the Framer Modules). The CX controller
does not support the Dual T1/E1 Framer. The BRI Framer is not supported
in North America.
Tip: Upgrading to embedded PRI, T1/D4, MSDN/DPNSS, or BRI requires
a minimum 300 MHz controller (see “Upgrading to a 300 or 450 MHz
Controller”, page 102). To determine the speed of your processor, see
“Checking Controller Hardware Profile” on page 235.
Tip: The Dual T1/E1 Framer does not support XNET, Min/Max, or NFAS.

Dual T1/E1 Framer
Each Dual T1/E1 Framer has 2 ports (RJ-45 connectors), each of which
can be used for T1/E1 ISDN or T1/D4. The two protocols can operate in
tandem on the same Dual T1/E1 Framer with any ISDN variant, i.e. PRI
and QSIG.
T1/D4 provides for digital E&M, digital DID, or digital CO protocols. T1/E1
ISDN provides for DMS-100, DMS-250, NI-2 (Bellcore National ISDN,
5ESS, GTD5), Euro ISDN, 4ESS, Euro-ISDN (CTR4), and QSIG
protocols.

110

Upgrades and FRUs

T1/E1 Combo
The T1/E1 combo module, available only for the CX and CXi controllers at
Release 6.0, combines trunking (T1D4 and PRI ISDN/QSIG) and DSP
functionality in a single card. The Release 6.0 version of the combo
contained a single T1/E1 framer. The module also includes 32-channel
Echo Cancellation.
At Release 7.0 the combo has a resilient connection added. You can
connect T1/E1 Combo cards in a primary and a secondary controller, for
resilient operation, with a one-to-one RJ-45 cable. Enable the resilient
feature in the Digital Link Assignment form. Refer to the Resiliency
document on Mitel OnLine for instructions on how to configure T1/E1
resiliency.
Tip: Resilient operation requires that both the primary and secondary
controllers are running Release 7.0 software. The secondary controller may
be configured with the new or old version T1/E1 Combo card or a Dual T1/E1
Framer module.

Quad BRI Framer
BRI (Basic Rate Interface) is a basic ISDN service consisting of two 64
Kbps channels and a single 16 Kbps channel (see page 261 in the
Hardware Reference chapter for connection details). The Quad BRI
Framer is not supported in North America.
To add or replace a framer module:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Disconnect all cables from the controller.
3. Remove the controller cover (see page 99, page 100, or page 101).
4. Remove the module from its packaging. DO NOT move LT/NT
jumpers.
5. Remove the blank module cover at the front of the controller, and
insert the module in an appropriate slot (see page 15).
6. If you are replacing a defective module, remove the screws and lock
washers and pull up on the module to remove it
7. Secure the module to the controller using the screws and pillars
provided with the module.
8. Put the controller’s top cover back on, and secure it with its screws
(see page 100, page 100, or page 101).

111

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

9. Reconnect the cables to the controller. Power up the controller.
Tip: For the T1/E1 Combo, connect the T1 line from the service

provider to the RJ45 connector on the T1/E1 combo module. See
Table 40 on page 260 for connector pinouts.
Tip: The Quad BRI Framer allows a 1:1 connection to a BRI Central
Office or a crossover connection to a BRI telephone. The shielded,
twisted pair ISDN cable is connected on either end with pins 3-4, and
5-6. The straight-through cable is used for “T” interfaces to the
Central Office and the crossover (with 3-4 and 5-6 crossed at one
end) for “S” interfaces to sets.

Echo Canceller
Tip: The CX, CXi, and MXe controllers contain echo cancellers on the main
board sufficient to handle normal traffic conditions.

To add or replace an echo canceller:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Disconnect all cables.
3. Remove the cover (see page 99, page 100, or page 101).
4. Remove the echo canceller module from its packaging.
5. If you are replacing a defective echo canceller module, remove the
screws and lock washers and pull up on the module to remove it.
6. Line up the connectors of the new echo canceller module and firmly
seat it onto the main board in an appropriate slot (see page 15).
7. Secure the module onto the main board using the screws and lock
washers provided.
8. Replace the controller top cover and secure it with its screws (see “To
install the LX/700-user controller cover:” on page 100, “To remove the
MX/100-user controller cover:” on page 100, or “Removing/Replacing
CX/CXi/MXe Controller Cover” on page 101).
9. Reconnect the cables to the controller.
10. Power up the controller (see page 22).

112

Upgrades and FRUs

Analog Option Board (MX Controller)
Install an AOB to increase LS CLASS circuits from 6 to 12 and ONS
CLASS circuits from 2 to 4 (see page 262).
To add or replace an AOB in an MX:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Remove the cover (see page 100).
3. Remove the four screws from the back portion of the Analog Main
Board (AMB) (see Figure 23 on page 136).
4. Install and secure the standoffs that ship with the Analog Option
Board.
5. Insert the Analog Option Board onto the AMB. Ensure it is well-seated
in its socket.
6. Attach the four screws that you removed from the AMB.
7. Replace the top cover (see page 100).
8. Power up the controller.
9. In the System Administration Tool, go the Analog Services Unit
Configuration form.
10. Select Unit 4 and click Modify.
11. Select 3300 Expanded Analog and click Save.

113

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 11: Screws and Standoffs on the Analog Option Board

Analog Option Board (CX/CXi Controller)
CX controller: to increase LS CLASS circuits from 6 to 12 and ONS CLASS
circuits from 4 to 8 (see page 264).
To add or replace an AOB in a CX/CXi:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Remove the cover (see page 101).
3. Remove the blanking panel from the back of the controller.
4. Insert the replacement faceplate into the back of the controller and
attach it with screws (1).
5. Place the AOB on a flat surface.
6. Attach the flex and power cables. To attach the flex cable, lift up on the
tabs at the end of the connector to loosen it, insert the cable label side
down, and then press down on the tabs to tighten connector (2).
7. Lower the AOB into place and attach it with the supplied screws (3).

114

Upgrades and FRUs

8. Connect the other ends of the flex cable and power cable where
indicated in Figure 12. The horizontal flex cable connector is hinged:
flip up to loosen it, insert the cable, and then press down to tighten (4).
9. Replace the top cover (see page 101).
10. Power up the controller.
11. In the System Administration Tool, go the Analog Services Unit
Configuration form.
12. Select Unit 4 and click Modify.
13. Select 3300 Expanded Analog and click Save.

Figure 12: Screws and Standoffs on the Analog Option Board

115

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Add Controller FRUs
This section contains detailed information on adding the 3300 ICP Field
Replaceable Units (FRUs). See Appendix E FRU Part Numbers beginning
on page 365 for a list of FRU part numbers.
The section is organized as follows:
•

“MXe RAID Controller” on page 116

•

“Redundant Hard Drive (MXe)” on page 117

•

“Application Processor Card (CXi)” on page 118

•

“APC Hard Drive (CXi)” on page 121

•

“Redundant Power Supply (MXe)” on page 123

•

“E2T Processor (MXe)” on page 123.
Tip: The CX/CXi/MXe controllers are shipped with the Analog Main Board
installed. If you receive a CX/CXi/MXe and the AMB is not installed, refer to
page 136 for installation instructions.
Tip: See also “Add or Replace Controller FRUs” on page 104 and “Replace
Controller FRUs” on page 125.

MXe RAID Controller
The RAID (redundant array of independent disks) controller will mirror all
data on two hard drives. In the event that one drive fails, the system will
continue to operate on the remaining drive. Refer to Knowledge Base
Article 06-2806-00012 “RAID Controller Operations Manual” for RAID
operation details.
CAUTION: The RAID controller does not protect against loss
of data as a result of a power outage. You must provide an
Interruptible Power Supply (UPS) to protect your system
data from an electrical disturbance.
Tip: It is very important to maintain current database backups; backups
should be done on a regular basis even when you have disk redundancy.

116

Upgrades and FRUs

To add a RAID controller:
1. Remove the controller, hard drives, and RAID controller card from their
packaging.
2. Remove the top cover of the controller (see page 101).
3. Remove the indented portion of the plastic bezel, above the hard drive
position, to expose the RAID controller LEDs and mirror buttons.
-

At the rear of the cover, insert a sharp object through a LED hole.
Push the bezel cover out far enough to grasp the top and bottom
edges and pull that portion of the bezel off.

4. Remove the ribbon cable from the HD1 position on the interconnect
card and remove the power cable.
5. Remove the standard hard drive interconnect card from the top of the
hard drive carrier.
6. Install the RAID controller card.
7. Attach the ribbon cable and power cable to the RAID card.
8. Replace the top cover (page 101).
9. Continue with the “Redundant Hard Drive (MXe)” procedure, below.

Redundant Hard Drive (MXe)
After the RAID controller has been installed, perform the following steps to
install the two hard drives, one at a time.
CAUTION: Both hard drives must have the same part
number.
CAUTION: You must install only the first hard drive, with the
installed software, before you boot the system.
After the system is fully booted, slide the second hard drive
into the HD2 position.

Tip: We recommend that you perform a replacement with rebuild outside of
business hours.

117

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

To install a redundant hard drive in an MXe:
1. Remove hard drive carriers from the controller.
2. Install hard drives onto the hard drive carriers.
3. Ensure that the hard drive jumpers are set to master (see page 256).
4. Slide the first hard drive, with installed software, into the HD1 position.
DO NOT INSTALL the second hard drive at this time.
5. Push to seat the hard drive into the hard drive back plane.
6. Tighten the thumb screw.
7. Power up the controller (page 22). The HD1 access LED should be
green and the activity LED flashes orange and green.
-

The HD1 access LED should be green HD2 fault LED should be
orange and the activity LED flashes orange and green

Once the system is booted, the activity LED will be green most of
the time.

8. After the system is fully booted, slide the second hard drive into the
HD2 position.
9. Push to seat the hard drive into the hard drive back plane.
10. Tighten the thumb screw.
11. Press the HD2 mirror control (ctrl) button for 5 to 10 seconds to mirror
the drives.
12. Release the mirror button when the fault LED flashes green twice per
second. The Activity LED will go solid green, occasionally flash amber.
13. The rebuild process will take more than two hours to complete. After
the rebuild is complete, the HD2 fault LED will be off and the access
LED will be on solid green.

Application Processor Card (CXi)
The optional Application Processor Card (APC) allows the system to host
the Mitel 6000 Managed Application Server (MAS) that can run 6040 Office
Server, Live Business Gateway, Mobile Extension, and Teleworker
Solution. Each of the applications will be released with guidelines defining
conditions, performance, and installation combinations. For information on
how to program and use software blades and services, refer to the 6000
MAS documentation at http://edocs.mitel.com.

118

Upgrades and FRUs

After you install the APC, continue by installing the APC hard drive
(page 121) and configuring for 6000 MAS (page 122).
To install the APC in a CXi:
1. Remove the controller, hard drives, and APC from their packaging.
2. Remove the top cover of the controller (see page 101).
3. Remove the Stratum Clock module if installed.
4. Place the APC on the main board connectors. The connectors are
spaced irregularly to assist in alignment (see Figure 13).
5. To seat the connectors, grasp the main board with your fingertips and
press down firmly on the middle of one side of the APC with your
thumbs as shown. Repeat for the other side of the APC next to the fan
(Figure 14). You should hear and feel the connectors seating
themselves.
Tip: To ensure that the APC is seated securely, press down on the APC
over each of the four connectors, one at a time. Once the APC is properly
installed, the four corners of the APC will rest against the standoffs located
at each corner of the APC.

6. Prepare the heat spreader for installation by removing the protective
strips from the adhesive heat pads (see Figure 15).
7. Place the four screws (supplied) in the heat spreader, and lower the
heat spreader onto the APC. Align the cutout on the heat spreader
above the memory modules on the APC.
8. Tighten the screws in an alternating pattern until they are snug. Do not
over-tighten.
9. Replace the Stratum Clock module.
10. Continue with the “APC Hard Drive (CXi)” procedure on page 121.

119

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 13: APC module on the main board - CXi

Figure 14: Seat the APC

120

Upgrades and FRUs

Figure 15: Remove protective strips from APC heat pads

APC Hard Drive (CXi)
If you are installing the optional Application Processor Card, then you must
also install a hard drive to support the APC's operating system and
applications. If you are replacing an APC hard drive with one that does not
have the 6000 MAS software installed, refer to “Install 6000 MAS
Software” on page 87.
To install the APC hard drive in a CXi:
1. Unplug the ribbon cable and the power cable from the old hard drive.
2. Remove the screws connecting the bracket to the back of the
controller, then slide the bracket forward and remove it.
3. If a System hard drive is already installed in the upper bracket position,
unscrew it from the bracket and move it to the lower bracket position.
The power and IDE cables can remain connected.
4. Lower the APC hard drive into the upper bracket position. Ensure that
the hard drive jumpers are set to master.
5. Secure the hard drives to the bracket with the screws provided.
6. Connect the power and IDE cables to the corresponding connectors
on the hard drive and main board. The cables are keyed for proper
connection (see Figure 16).
Tip: Connect the System hard drive IDE cable to the main board connector
labeled MPC8270 HARDDRIVE. Connect the APC hard drive IDE cable to
the main board connector labeled ETX HARDDRIVE.

7. Slide the bracket back into the chassis, then fasten the screws
connecting the bracket to the back of the controller.

121

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

8. Replace the top cover (page 101).
9. Power up the controller (see page 22).

Figure 16: Connecting cables to APC - CXi

Configure the System for 6000 MAS
To configure the 3300 and APC to support MAS:
1. Power down the 3300 controller.
2. Install the Application Processor Card in the 3300 controller.
3. Install the APC hard drive (on which the software is preloaded) in the
3300.
4. Power-up the 3300.
5. Program the WAN Settings form, in the 3300 System Administration
Tool, to support APC.
6. Launch the secure telnet client.
-

Enter open using port <2005> (command with
example IP address, open 192.168.1.2 2005).

Enter the 3300 username and password.

7. Follow on-screen instructions to configure the 6000 MAS and blades.
Refer to the 6000 MAS documentation on Mitel OnLine.

122

Upgrades and FRUs

Redundant Power Supply (MXe)
To add a redundant power supply in an MXe:
Tip: It is not necessary to power down the controller to add a power supply.

1. Remove the power supply unit blanking panel.
2. Slide the new power supply unit into the power supply carrier on the
rear of the controller.
3. Push to seat the power supply into the power supply back plane.
4. Secure the thumb screw and connect the power cord.
5. Set the AC power switch to ON. AC and DC LEDs will illuminate.
To replace a power supply:
1. Set the AC power switch to OFF.
2. Remove the power cord from the AC receptacle on the power supply.
3. Loosen the thumb screw on the power supply.
4. Slide the power supply unit out of the power supply carrier on the rear
of the controller.
5. Continue with the “To add a redundant power supply in an MXe:”
procedure, above, beginning with step 2.

E2T Processor (MXe)
Tip: Refer to Engineering Guidelines to determine when a second processor
is necessary.

To add an E2T processor in an MXe:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Remove the controller cover (see page 101).
3. Disconnect cables from the main board.
4. Disconnect ribbon cable from the interconnect card or RAID controller.
5. Remove the single captive screw that secures the main board to the
chassis.
6. With the rear of the controller facing you, slide main board towards the
front of the chassis and pull it up.

123

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

7. Set the main board on a flat surface with the under side facing up.
8. Seat the E2T onto the main board and secure with four screws.
9. Set the main board on the chassis and attach to the chassis with the
captive screw.
10. Attach the cables to the main board.
11. Connect the ribbon cable to the interconnect card or RAID controller.
12. Replace the cover and reconnect the cables to the controller.
13. Power up the controller (see page 22).

Figure 17: MXe: RTC / E2T/ APC on the Main Board, bottom view

124

Upgrades and FRUs

Replace Controller FRUs
This section contains detailed information on replacing the 3300 ICP Field
Replaceable Units (FRUs) (see page 363 for part numbers).
The section is organized as follows:
•

“LX, 100, 250, 700-User Hard Drive” on page 126

•

“MX Hard Drive” on page 127

•

“MXe Hard Drive, Single” on page 128

•

“CX/CXi Hard Drive” on page 131

•

“System ID Module” on page 133

•

“System i-Button (CX/CXi and MXe)” on page 133

•

“Analog Main Board (MX Controller)” on page 134

•

“Analog Main Board (MXe Controller)” on page 136

•

“Analog Main Board (CX/CXi Controller)” on page 137

•

“RTC Processor (MXe)” on page 138

•

“Cooling Fan (MXe)” on page 139

•

“Power Supply Unit (MXe)” on page 139

•

“Stratum 3 Clock Module” on page 140.
Tip: See also “Add or Replace Controller FRUs” on page 104 and “Add
Controller FRUs” on page 116.

Hard Drive Replacement Overview
CAUTION: If you move a programmed hard drive from one
controller type to another (for example, an MX system to an
LX or CX system), you MUST manually install the software
(see page 77) and restore the database. A new hard drive
purchased from Mitel is configured for installation in any
system.
CAUTION: Both hard drives in a redundant hard drive MXe
must have the same part number.

125

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

CAUTION: If you install a new hard drive, with Release 6.0
or later software, in a system running older software, you
must change the RTC file name (see page 300).
The file name for all platforms, for Release 6.0 and later is:
/partition1/Rtc8260.
Prior to Release 6.0: LX, 250/700-user: /partition1/Rtc8260;
MX: /partition1/Lite200UP; 100-user: /partition1/Lite8260

LX, 100, 250, 700-User Hard Drive
To replace the hard drive in the LX, 100, 250, or 700-user controller:
Tip: Use this procedure only to replace a controller hard drive in a system
that’s already installed. To install a hard drive in a new system, see page 19.

1. If possible, back up your database (or locate the most recent backup).
2. Power down the controller (see page 99) and disconnect all cables.
3. Place the controller on the work area with the bottom facing up.
4. Remove the hard drive backing plate from the controller by removing
the six (6) small border screws (the four large screws secure the hard
drive to the backing plate). Keep the screws.
5. Unplug the ribbon cable and the power cable from the old hard drive.
6. Connect the ribbon cable and power cable to the new hard drive.

Figure 18: LX and 700-User Controller Hard Drive Installation

126

Upgrades and FRUs

7. Secure the new hard drive backing plate with the hard drive attached,
to the controller cover using the screws provided.
8. Remount the controller.
9. Restore the connections to the Maintenance PC.
10. Return power to the controller, but do not connect to the network.
11. Manually install the software on the hard drive (see page 77).
12. Reconnect the controller to the network.
13. If you backed up your database in Step 1, restore the database (see
page 63).

MX Hard Drive
To replace the hard drive in an MX controller:
Tip: Use this procedure only to replace a controller hard drive in a system
that’s already installed. To install a hard drive in a new system, see page 19.

1. If possible, back up your database (or locate the most recent backup).
2. Power down the controller (see page 99) and disconnect all cables.
3. Remove the controller cover (see page 100).
4. Remove the four screws that secure the hard drive to the controller.
5. Remove the old hard drive (behind slot 4).
6. Unplug the ribbon cable and the power cable from the old hard drive.

Figure 19: MX Controller Hard Drive Installation

127

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

7. Connect the ribbon cable and power cable to the new hard drive.
8. Install the new hard drive (remove and discard the backing plate).
9. Secure the hard drive plate to the controller using the screws provided.
10. Replace the controller cover (see page 100).
11. Remount the controller.
12. Restore the connections to the Maintenance PC.
13. Return power to the controller, but do not connect to the network.
14. Manually install the software on the hard drive (see “Installing System
Software Manually” on page 77).
15. Reconnect the controller to the network.
16. If you backed up your database in Step 1, restore the database (see
“Restore a Database” on page 63).

MXe Hard Drive, Single
To replace the hard drive in a single hard drive MXe:
Tip: Use this procedure only to replace a controller hard drive in a system
that’s already installed. To install a hard drive in a new system, see “Hard
Drive” on page 19.
Tip: In a redundant hard drive system, each of the hard drives is
hot-swappable. In a single hard drive system, you must power down the
controller to replace the hard drive.

1. If possible, back up your database (or locate the most recent backup).
2. Power down the controller (see page 99).
3. Loosen the captive screw and slide the defective hard (HD1) drive
from the hard drive carrier.
4. Slide the new hard drive into the hard drive carrier and tighten the
screw.
5. Push to seat the hard drive into the hard drive back plane.
6. Tighten the thumb screw.
7. Return power to the controller, but do not connect to the network.

128

Upgrades and FRUs

8. Manually install the software on the hard drive (see “Installing System
Software Manually” on page 77).
9. Reconnect the controller to the network.
10. If you backed up your database in Step 1, restore the database (see
“Restore a Database” on page 63).

MXe Hard Drive, Redundant
CAUTION: Both hard drives must have the same part
number.
Refer to “MXe Hard Drive, Both Redundant Drives” on page 130 when you
have to replace both hard drives under the following conditions:
•

both of the hard drives have failed OR

•

the replacement hard drive part number is different from that of the
defective hard drive.

To replace a hard drive in a redundant hard drive MXe:
Tip: Refer to Table 96: RAID Fault and Access LEDs p.(337) for a complete
description of LED activity.
Tip: We recommend that you perform a replacement with rebuild outside of
business hours.

1. If the hard drive is already off-line (normally or faulted) go to step 4.
2. Using a small pointed object (paper clip), press the mirror control (ctrl)
button, for less than five seconds, of the hard drive to be removed.
-

Release the button when the Access LED starts flashing once per
second.

Hard drive is off-line when the Access LED is off and the fault LED
is orange.

3. Release the retaining screw securing the hard drive carrier to the
controller.
4. Slide the defective hard drive out of the hard drive carrier.
5. Remove the four screws securing the hard drive to the hard drive
carrier.

129

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

6. Install the new hard drive in the hard drive carrier with the four screws.
7. Slide the hard drive into the controller.
8. Push to seat the hard drive into the hard drive back plane.
9. Tighten the thumb screw.
10. To copy data onto the new drive, press the mirror control button for the
new hard disk for 5 to 10 seconds.
-

Release the button when the Access LED starts flashing twice per
second.

The rebuild process is indicated by the Access LED solid green and
the Fault LED flashing green.

The rebuild is complete when the Fault LED is off (approximately
two hours).

MXe Hard Drive, Both Redundant Drives
CAUTION: Both hard drives must have the same part
number.
CAUTION: You must install only the first hard drive before
you boot the system.
After the system is fully booted, slide the second hard drive
into the HD2 position.
Use this procedure when both drives have failed or when you need to
replace both drives because replacement hard drive part number is
different from that of the defective hard drive.
To replace both hard drives in a redundant hard drive MXe:
1. Ensure that you have a database backup.
2. Power down the controller (see page 99).
3. Loosen the captive screws and slide the hard drives from the hard
drive carrier.
4. Clear the sockets (refer to Knowledge Base Article 06-2806-00012).
5. Replace the old hard drive with the new hard drive, in the hard drive
carrier, with the four screws.

130

Upgrades and FRUs

Slide the first hard drive into the HD1 position. DO NOT INSTALL
the second hard drive at this time.

6. Push to seat the first hard drive into the hard drive back plane.
7. Tighten the thumb screw.
8. Return power to the controller, but do not connect to the network.
9. Manually install the software on the hard drive (see “Installing System
Software Manually” on page 77).
10. Reconnect the controller to the network.
11. Replace the second old hard drive with the second new hard drive in
the hard drive carrier with the four screws.
12. Slide the second hard drive into the HD2 position.
13. Push to seat the hard drive into the hard drive back plane.
14. Tighten the thumb screw.
15. To copy data onto the new drive, press the HD2 mirror control button
for the new hard disk for 5 to 10 seconds.
-

Release the button when the Access LED starts flashing twice per
second.

The rebuild process is indicated by the Access LED solid green and
the Fault LED flashing green.

16. The rebuild is complete when the Fault LED is off (approximately 20G
per hour).

CX/CXi Hard Drive
To replace the hard drive in a CX or CXi:
Tip: Use this procedure only to replace a controller hard drive in a system
that’s already installed. To install a hard drive in a new system, see “Hard
Drive” on page 19.

1. If possible, back up your database (or locate the most recent backup).
2. Power down the controller (see page 99).
3. Disconnect all cables.
4. Remove the controller cover (see page 101).
5. Unplug the ribbon cable and the power cable from the old hard drive.

131

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

6. Remove the screws connecting the bracket to the back of the
controller, then slide the bracket forward and remove it. (Removal is
unnecessary if the drive is installed in the upper bracket position).
7. Replace the drive with the new one (1) and secure it to the bracket (2).
(If the bracket was removed, re-install it and secure it to the back of the
controller). Ensure that the jumpers on the new drive are set to the
Master setting.
8. Connect the power and IDE cables to the corresponding connectors
on the hard drive and main board (3). The cables are keyed for proper
connection.

Figure 20: CX Controller Hard Drive Installation
9. Replace the controller cover (see page 101).
10. Remount the controller.
11. Restore the connections to the Maintenance PC.
12. Return power to the controller, but do not connect to the network.
13. Manually install the software on the hard drive (see “Installing System
Software Manually” on page 77).

132

Upgrades and FRUs

14. Reconnect the controller to the network.
15. If you backed up your database in Step 1, restore the database (see
“Restore a Database” on page 63).

System ID Module
To replace the system ID module:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Disconnect all cables.
3. Remove the controller cover (see page 99 or page 100).
4. Remove the old System ID module from the main board:
-

100-user controller: behind slot 2.

MX controller: behind slot 4.

LX, 250, or 700-user controller: between slots 1 and 8.

5. Remove the cover from the new System ID module’s connector.
6. Install the new System ID module and secure with the screw provided.
7. Replace the controller cover (see page 99 or page 100).
8. Reconnect all the cables to the controller.
9. Power up the controller (see page 22).
Tip: If you replace with a new System ID, you must program the options (see
page 25) and then restore the database (see page 63).

System i-Button (CX/CXi and MXe)
To replace the system i-button in a CX, CXi, or MXe:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Disconnect all cables.
3. Remove the controller cover (see page 101).
4. Remove the old system i-button from the main board. Slightly pull out
the metal clips holding the i-button in place.
5. Insert the system i-button in the twin tab connector located on the main
board (see Figure 21 on page 134).
6. Replace the controller cover (see page 101).

133

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Tip: If you replace with a new System ID, you must program the options (see
page 25) and then restore the database (see page 63).

Figure 21: Installing the System i-Button

Analog Main Board (MX Controller)
To replace the analog main board in an MX:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Remove the cover (see page 100).
3. Remove the Analog Option Board, if one has been installed, by
reversing the installation procedure (page 113).
4. Disconnect the three power supply connectors.
5. Remove the ribbon cable by flipping up the clip on the connectors at
each end of the cable (see Figure 22 on page 135).
6. Remove the four standoffs and the two screws at the front of the board
(refer to Figure 23 on page 136).

134

Upgrades and FRUs

7. Remove the two screws from the hold-down for the Amphenol cable
assembly on the back of the unit.
8. Remove the clock module, behind MMC Slot 2.
9. Remove the Analog Main Board.
10. Insert the new Analog Main Board.
11. Replace the two screws in the hold-down for the Amphenol cable
assembly on the back of the unit.
12. Replace the two screws at the front of the board and the four standoffs.
13. Replace the ribbon cable by sliding it under the guides on the side and
up into the connector. Flip the clip down to secure the cable.
14. Replace the three Power Supply connectors.
15. Replace the top cover.
16. Power up the controller (see page 22).

Figure 22: Analog Main Board Ribbon Cable

135

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 23: Screws and Standoffs on the Analog Main Board

Analog Main Board (MXe Controller)
To replace the analog main board (AMB) in an MXe:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Disconnect the power supply cable.
3. Remove the top cover (see page 101).
4. Disconnect the power cable and remove the ribbon cable on the AMB
by flipping up the clip on the connectors at each end of the cable.
5. Remove the Analog Main Board.
6. Place the new AMB on the power supply carrier and slide the port
interfaces through the slots at the rear of the controller.
7. Secure the AMB to the carrier with the captive screw provided.
8. Attach the ribbon cable to the controller by lifting up the clip and
inserting the cable vertically into the connector. Push the clip down to
secure the cable.
9. Attach the power supply cable.
10. Replace the top cover and power up the controller (see page 22).

136

Upgrades and FRUs

Analog Main Board (CX/CXi Controller)
To replace the analog main board (AMB) in a CX or CXi:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Remove the cover (page 101).
3. Remove the screw that secures the faceplate to the back panel.
4. Remove the Analog Option Board, if one has been installed, by
reversing the installation procedure (page 114).
5. Disconnect the power supply cable on the AMB.
6. Remove the ribbon cable on the AMB (not from the main board) by
flipping up the clip on the connectors at each end of the cable.
7. Remove the Analog Main Board.
8. Insert the new Analog Main Board.
9. Replace the ribbon cable by sliding it under the guides on the side and
up into the connector. Flip the clip down to secure the cable.
10. Replace the power supply cable.
11. Replace the Analog Option Board (if previously removed).
12. Replace the top cover and power up the controller (see page 22)..

Figure 24: CX/CXi, Insert the Analog Main Board

137

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 25: CX/CXi, AMB ribbon cable

RTC Processor (MXe)
To replace the RTC processor in an MXe:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Remove the controller cover (see page 101).
3. Disconnect cables from the main board.
4. Disconnect ribbon cable from the interconnect card or RAID controller.
5. Remove the single screw that secures the main board to the chassis.
6. With the rear of the controller facing you, slide main board towards the
front of the chassis and pull it up.
7. Set the main board on a flat surface with the under side facing up.
8. Remove four screws and pull off the old RTC.
9. Seat the new RTC onto the main board and secure with four screws.
10. Attach the cables to the main board.

138

Upgrades and FRUs

11. Set the main board on the chassis and attach to the chassis with the
captive screw.
12. Attach the cables to the main board.
13. Connect the ribbon cable to the interconnect card or RAID controller.
14. Replace the cover and reconnect the cables to the controller.
15. Power up the controller (see page 22).

Cooling Fan (MXe)
To replace the cooling fan in an MXe:
1. Power down the controller.
2. Remove the controller cover (see page 101).
3. Remove the two fan screws above the edge of the controller chassis.
4. Disconnect the cable and lift out the fan unit.
5. Set the new fan unit in place.
6. Secure the unit with two screws and connect the cable.
7. Replace the top cover.
8. Power up the controller (see page 22).

Power Supply Unit (MXe)
To replace a power supply unit in a single power supply MXe:
1. Set the AC power switch to OFF.
2. Remove the power cord from the AC receptacle on the power supply.
3. Loosen the thumb screw on the power supply.
4. Remove the defective power supply unit from the rear of the controller.
5. Slide the new power supply unit into the controller.
6. Push to seat the power supply into the system power connector.
7. Secure the thumb screw and connect the power cord.
8. Set the AC power switch to ON.

139

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Stratum 3 Clock Module
To replace the clock module in all controllers:
1. Power down the controller (see page 99).
2. Remove the cover (see page 99, page 101, or page 101).
3. Remove the screws from the clock module.
4. Remove the clock module.
5. Seat the new clock module onto the main board.
6. Replace the screws that you removed from the clock module.
7. Replace the top cover.
8. Power up the controller (see page 22).

140

Upgrades and FRUs

Install ASU II FRUs
The ASU II can be configured with one or two line cards. You can install
one or two 16 port ONS cards, one or two 4 + 12 port combo cards (4 LS
trunks and 12 ONS lines), or one of each.

Line Card (16 Port ONS / 4+12 Port Combo)
To install a 16 port ONS or 4 + 12 port combo card:
1. If necessary, loosen the thumb screw and remove the blanking plate
from the cabinet rear.
2. Slide the card into the slot, with the lock latch open, and seat it
securely.
3. Close the lock latch and tighten the thumb screw with a Phillips
screwdriver.
4. Connect the Amphenol cable and secure the strap.

Power Supply
To replace the ASU II AC power supply:
1. Remove the power cord from the power supply AC receptacle.
2. Loosen the thumb screw on the power supply.
3. Open the lock latch and slide the card out of the slot.
4. Slide the new power supply into the slot on the rear of the ASU II, with
the thumb screw on the right.
5. Push to seat the power supply into the system power backplane.
6. Secure the thumb screw and tighten it with a Phillips screwdriver.
7. Insert the AC power cord into the power supply AC receptacle.

141

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Install Peripheral Cabinet FRUs
Tip: The CX and CXi controllers do not support Peripheral Cabinets.

The peripheral cabinet has the following Field Replaceable Units (FRUs):
•

Circuit card (page 143)

•

Power converter (page 144)

•

Power distribution unit (page 145)

•

Cooling fan (page 146)

•

Expanded peripheral cabinet (page 149)

•

FIM (page 147)

•

Peripheral switch controller card (page 150)

Removing/Replacing the Front Panel of a Peripheral Cabinet or DSU
To remove the front panels:
1. Insert a slot screwdriver in the slot on the right side of the front grill and
pry it open.
2. Loosen the two screws on the front cover and lift the cover up and
away from the cabinet.
To replace the front panels:
1. Align the front panel screws with the holes in the cabinet and tighten
the two screws.
2. Insert the left front grill into the slot and snap it closed.

Powering Down the Peripheral Cabinet
To power down the peripheral cabinet:
1. Remove the front panels.
2. Switch off the power converter.
3. Set the power switch on the rear of the unit to ‘0’ (OFF).
4. Unplug the external power cord at the rear of the unit.

142

Upgrades and FRUs

Powering Up the Peripheral Cabinet
To power up the peripheral cabinet:
1. Ensure the voltage selector switch is set to the required setting for your
country.
2. Connect the external power cord at the rear of the unit.
3. Set the power switch on the rear of the unit to "I" (ON).
4. Switch on the power converter.
5. Replace the front panels.

Replacing Circuit Cards
Refer to “Safety Considerations” on page 98.
WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN EXIST ON
INSTALLED PERIPHERAL CARDS EVEN WHEN POWER IS
REMOVED FROM THE SYSTEM. GRASP CARDS BY THE
LOCK LATCHES ONLY. DO NOT TOUCH THE SIDES OF
CARDS.
CAUTION: To prevent static damage to electrical components, wear the anti-static wrist strap whenever you handle
circuit cards.
Tip: You can replace peripheral interface cards or DSU cards while the unit
is operating.

To remove a circuit card from a peripheral or DSU cabinet:
1. Log into the System Administration Tool (see page 8).
2. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click Maintenance Commands.
3. Enter BUSY and enter CD (courtesy down).
4. Enter STATE to confirm that all circuits are busy.
5. Pull the upper and lower latches outward until they are both in the
horizontal release position.
6. Draw the card toward you.
7. Immediately place the card in an anti-static bag.

143

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

To install a circuit card in a peripheral or DSU cabinet:
1. For cards that have switches, refer to the card’s hardware description
for information about switch settings (see page 289).
2. Check that the connector pins are straight.
3. Slide the card into the slot.
4. Move the card latches to the vertical position to secure the card.
5. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click Maintenance Commands.
6. Enter RTS to return the circuits to service.

Replacing a Power Converter
To replace a power converter in a peripheral cabinet:
1. Remove the front panels of the peripheral cabinet (see page 142).
2. Power down the peripheral cabinet (see page 142).
3. Disconnect the internal AC power cord:
a. Unscrew and remove the AC power cord access cover plate on the
rear of the unit (see Figure 26 on page 145).
b. Unplug the internal AC power cord from the rear of the AC power
converter (accessed through a cutout in the backplane).
4. Remove the converter:
a. Move the card latches on the converter to the horizontal position.
b. Carefully withdraw the converter unit from the shelf.
5. Unpack and inspect the new converter.
a. Unpack the converter and remove all packing materials.
b. Inspect the converter to ensure that the unit is not dented or
scratched, and that all fittings are secure.
6. Install the new converter:
a. Slide the replacement converter into position (slots 13 - 15).
b. Move the card latches to the vertical position to secure the
converter.
c. Plug the internal AC power cord from the Power Distribution Unit
into the AC power converter, through the cutout in the backplane.

144

Upgrades and FRUs

d. Replace the cover plate over the access cutout in the backplane,
and fasten in place with the screws removed in step 3.
7. Power up the peripheral cabinet (see page 142).
8. Replace the front panels on the peripheral cabinet (see page 142).

Figure 26: Peripheral Cabinet Power Converter Connections

Replacing the Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
Refer to “Safety Considerations” on page 98.
To replace a PDU in a peripheral cabinet:
1. Power down the unit (see page 142).
2. Remove the front panels (see page 142).
3. Remove the PDU:
a. Unplug the external power cord from the PDU.
b. Remove the PDU internal power cover plate.

145

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

c. Unplug the PDU internal power cord from the power converter.
d. Remove the outer screws on the PDU faceplate.
e. Pull the PDU out until you can access the fan power connector at
the rear of the PDU.
f. Disconnect the fan power connector and remove the PDU.
4. Install a new PDU:
a. Unpack and inspect the new PDU for damage.
b. Set the power switch on the new PDU to off (O).
c. Connect the fan power connector at the rear of the PDU.
d. Insert the PDU and replace the outer screws on the PDU faceplate.
e. Plug the PDU internal power cord into the power converter.
f. Replace the internal power access cover plate.
g. Plug the external power cord into the PDU.
5. Power up the unit (see page 142).
6. Replace the front panels (see page 142).

Replacing a Cooling Fan
Refer to “Safety Considerations” on page 98.
To replace a cooling fan in a peripheral cabinet:
1. Power down the unit (see page 142).
2. Remove the front panels (see page 142).
3. Disconnect the fan assembly.
4. Remove the defective fan.
5. Insert the new fan.
6. Replace the fan assembly.
7. Replace the front panels (see page 142).
8. Power up the unit (see page 142).

146

Upgrades and FRUs

Replacing the Fiber Interface Module (FIM)
WARNING:POWER MUST NOT BE APPLIED TO THE
PERIPHERAL CABINET WHILE THE FIM IS REPLACED.
To replace a FIM in a peripheral cabinet:
1. Power down the unit and remove the front panels (see page 142).
2. Attach the anti-static strap to your wrist.
3. If you need more room, remove the power converter and the
peripheral switch controller (PSC).
4. Disconnect the fiber cables from the FIM.
-

Place dust caps on the cable and on the FIM connectors.

5. Pull the FIM out gently from slot 17, unplugging it from the backplane.
6. Unpack the new FIM, and inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged.
7. Slide the new FIM into the bottom of slot 17 until it connects with the
backplane firmly.
8. Fasten the new FIM in place with the two screws provided or the latch
on the card guides.
9. Attach the FIM cable by following the steps in Connect the Fiber Optic
Cable (see page 42).
10. If the PSC and power converter were removed, replace them.
11. Power up the unit and replace the front panels (see page 142).

Expanding a Peripheral Cabinet II
Tip: A Peripheral Expansion Node II is no longer an orderable item. Instead,
a Peripheral Node II is ordered and converted to an Expansion Node by using
the Peripheral Node Expansion Kit.

To convert a peripheral cabinet II to an expanded peripheral
cabinet II:
1. Unpack, position, and ground the new cabinet. This cabinet will be
used as the slave cabinet.
2. Unpack the peripheral node expansion Kit. It contains 2 interconnect
cards, 1 interconnect cable, and 2 EMI filter kits.
3. Remove the front panel from the slave cabinet.

147

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

4. Remove the PSC from slot 16 in the slave cabinet, and replace it with
a peripheral interconnect card. The PSC is not required.
5. Attach an EMI Filter Kit to the back of the slave cabinet:
a. Remove the sliding door from the back of the cabinet.
b. Attach the filter kit using the screws from the sliding door.
c. Route the attached filter cable through to the front of the cabinet.
d. Attach the cable to the front of the peripheral interconnect card.
6. Install up to 12 peripheral interface cards in slots 1 through 12 of the
slave cabinet (as required for your system).
7. Proceed to connect an expanded peripheral node II to a peripheral
node II (see steps below).
To connect an expanded peripheral cabinet II to peripheral cabinet II:
1. Convert a peripheral cabinet II to an expanded peripheral cabinet II
(see steps above).
2. Unpack, position, and ground the master cabinet.
3. Remove the front panel from the master cabinet.
Tip: The master cabinet includes a power converter in slots 13 through 15,
a PSC in slot 16, and a FIM in slot 17. The slave cabinet includes a power
converter in slots 13 through 15 and a peripheral interconnect card in slot
16. An additional peripheral interconnect card and EMI filter are also available
from the peripheral node expansion kit.

4. Detach the fiber cables from the FIM in the master cabinet, and
remove them through the cable port on the back of the cabinet.
5. Install the additional peripheral interconnect card in slot 16B of the
master cabinet.
6. Attach an EMI filter kit to the back of the master cabinet:
a. Remove the sliding door from the back of the cabinet.
b. Attach the filter kit using the screws from the sliding door.
c. Route the attached filter cable through to the front of the cabinet.
d. Attach the cable to the front of the peripheral interconnect card.
e. Loosen the door screws on the back of the filter kit and slide the
door up.
f. Follow the steps in Connect the Fiber Optic Cable.

148

Upgrades and FRUs

g. Tighten the door screws on the back of the filter kit to hold the FIM
cables securely in place.
7. Install up to 12 peripheral interface cards in slots 1 through 12 of the
master cabinet (as required for your system).
8. Cable the master cabinet to the MDF, and power it up to ensure that it
works properly.
9. Attach the cabinet interconnect cable to the EMI filter kit on each
cabinet.
10. Power up the slave cabinet to ensure that it works properly.
11. Replace the front panels on both cabinets.

Installing an Expanded Peripheral Cabinet
Tip: The peripheral expansion node II is not orderable. Instead, a peripheral
node II is ordered and converted to an expansion node by using the peripheral
cabinet expansion kit (see page 147).

The expanded peripheral cabinet II consists of the following components:
•

Peripheral node II - peripheral cabinet II, power converter, peripheral
switch controller II card, fiber interface module.

•

Peripheral expansion node II - peripheral cabinet II, power converter,
peripheral interconnect cards (2), EMI filter kits (2), cabinet
interconnect cable.

Review “Safety Considerations” on page 98 before installing an expanded
peripheral cabinet.
To install an expanded peripheral cabinet:
1. Unpack, position, and ground both cabinets (see page 40).
2. Remove the front panels from both cabinets (see page 142).
-

The master cabinet includes a power converter in slots 13 to 15, a
peripheral switch controller (PSC) in slot 16, and a fiber interface
module (FIM) in slot 17.

The slave cabinet includes a power converter in slots 13 to 15, a
peripheral interconnect card in slot 16, and an additional peripheral
interconnect card with the package.

3. Install the additional peripheral interconnect card in slot 16B of the
master cabinet.

149

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

4. Install up to 12 peripheral interface cards in slots 1 to 12 of each
cabinet, as required for your system.
5. Attach an EMI filter kit to the back of the master cabinet:
a. Remove the sliding door from the back of the cabinet and attach
the filter kit using the screws from the sliding door (route the
attached filter cable through to the front of the cabinet).
b. Attach the cable to the front of the peripheral interconnect card.
c. Loosen the door screws on the back of the filter kit and slide the
door up. Follow the steps in Connect the Fiber Optic Cable.
d. Tighten the door screws on the back of the filter kit to hold the FIM
cables securely in place.
6. Cable the cabinet to the MDF (see page 45) and power it up to ensure
it works properly.
7. Repeat step 5, attaching the remaining EMI filter kit to the slave
cabinet (skip steps c and d since there is no FIM installed in the slave
cabinet).
8. Attach the cabinet interconnect cable to each EMI filter kit, connecting
the two cabinets together.
9. Power up the slave cabinet and ensure it works properly.
10. Replace the front panels of each cabinet (see page 142).

Replacing a Peripheral Switch Controller Card
CAUTION: Wear an anti-static strap whenever you handle
circuit cards.
To replace a peripheral switch controller card:
1. Power down the peripheral cabinet (see page 142).
2. Replace the faulty peripheral switch controller card with the new
peripheral switch controller card.
3. Power up the peripheral cabinet (see page 142).

150

Upgrades and FRUs

Install Digital Service Unit FRUs
Tip: The CX and CXi controllers do not support Digital Service Units.

The DSU has the following Field Replaceable Units (FRUs):
•

Circuit card (page 143)

•

BRI card (page 152)

•

BRI interface assembly (page 153)

•

Formatter cards (CEPT, DS1) (page 154)

•

PRI card (page 154)

•

Peripheral resource card (page 156)

•

FIM (page 157)

•

R2 card (page 158)

Removing/Replacing the Front Panel
See “Removing/Replacing the Front Panel of a Peripheral Cabinet or
DSU” on page 142.

Powering Down the DSU Unit
To power down the DSU:
1. Set the power switch on the rear of the unit to ‘0’ (OFF).
2. Unplug the external power cord at the rear of the unit.

Powering Up the DSU Unit
To power up the DSU:
1. Connect the external power cord at the rear of the unit.
2. Set the power switch on the rear of the unit to "I" (ON).

Replacing Circuit Cards
See “Replacing Circuit Cards” on page 143.

151

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Installing a BRI Card
Before you install the BRI card, ensure that:
•

The configuration includes a CEPT formatter card that has an unused
hybrid circuit (one Rx/Tx pair) configured with DPNSS protocol.

•

The system has a free DSU slot for the BRI card.

•

The wiring from the network termination terminal equipment (NTTE),
network termination 1 (NT1), or terminating equipment is CAT 5 UTP.

•

A computer is available for use as a BRI maintenance terminal (see
“BRI Network Services Unit” on page 37 for details).

To install a BRI card:
1. Program the customer data using the System Administration Tool (see
the Online Help for details).
2. Install the BRI interface assembly (see Figure 27 below). For details,
see “Install the Interface Assemblies” on page 49.

Figure 27: BRI Interface Assembly Installation
3. Install the BRI card. For details, see page 50).
4. Using a BNC to BNC cable, connect the Rx port on the BRI interface
assembly to the Tx port on the CEPT interface assembly (see
Figure 28 on page 153).

152

Upgrades and FRUs

5. Using a BNC to BNC cable, connect the Tx port on the BRI interface
assembly to the Rx port on the CEPT interface assembly.
6. Using the 44-pin D-type to Amphenol cable, connect the ISDN BRI
port on the BRI interface assembly to the distribution frame, RJ-45
patch panel, or network terminating rack. Refer to the Hardware
Technical Reference Manual for BRI Card cable pinouts.
7. Connect the BRI card to the maintenance PC (see “BRI Network
Services Unit”, Step 4, a and b on page 38).
8. On the BRI maintenance PC, program the BRI card using the VT100
emulator. See Technical Bulletin 58004741 (Basic Setup Guide for the
MC268 BRI Card) for more information.
Tip: Even though the Technical Bulletin is written for the SX-2000 system,
the parameters described are also applicable to the 3300 ICP system.

Figure 28: BRI Card Connections
Next: After installing the BRI card, go back to page 49.

153

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Installing a Formatter Card (CEPT, DS1)
The CEPT and DS1/T1 formatter cards are installed in any empty DSU
slot. The DSU cabinet supplies the power for the card and provides a
message interface back to the controller through the FIM interface and the
fiber optic cable.
Tip: Before you install the card, ensure that you have programmed the card
using the System Administration Tool (see the Online Help for details) and
installed the interface assembly (see “Install the Interface Assemblies” on
page 49).

To install a formatter card:
1. Install the formatter card. For details, see “Install the DSU Cards” on
page 50.
2. If you are installing a CEPT card, connect the cables from the external
network to the BNC connectors on the CEPT interface assembly.
3. If you are installing a DS1 card, connect the 22 AWG (22 IWG)
shielded twisted pair cables from the external network to the DB-15 pin
connectors on the DS1 interface assembly (see Table 72 on page 290
for the DB-15 connector pinout and Table 73 on page 291 for the
pinouts for line/network termination).
Next: Go to “To test a formatter card:” below.
To test a formatter card:
If the installation is successful, the card will boot up.
1. Inspect the LEDs on the faceplate to verify that the card is functioning
(see “BRI Card” on page 356 for details).
2. Log into the System Administration Tool (see page 8).
3. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click Maintenance Commands.
4. Enter STATE to verify that the trunks associated
with the corresponding channels are all in IDLE state.
Next: Go back to “Install the Interface Assemblies” on page 49.

Installing a PRI Card
Before you install the PRI card, ensure that:
•

The system has a free DSU slot for the PRI card.

•

The PRI card has been upgraded to use ISDN 7.0 (LW31.1+).

154

Upgrades and FRUs

•

A computer is available to connect to the PRI card as a maintenance
PC. IMAT provides the communication between the card and the
computer. Refer to page 7 for PC requirements.

•

Install IMAT on the maintenance PC (see page 88).

Installation Sequence
Install the PRI card in the following sequence:
•

Program the card using the System Administration Tool (see the
Online Help for details)

•

Install the interface assembly (see page 49)

•

Install the PRI card

•

Save the IMAT database onto the PRI card

•

Connect the PRI card to the ISDN network

•

Test the PRI card

Install the PRI Card
The PRI card is installed in any empty DSU slot. The DSU cabinet supplies
the power for the card and provides a message interface back to the
control cabinet through the FIM interface and the fiber optic cable.
Save the IMAT Database onto the PRI Card
Before you save the IMAT database onto the PRI card, you need to
configure the PRI database and connect the computer to the PRI card. For
more information, refer to the IMAT online help.
Connect the PRI card to the ISDN network
To connect the PRI card to the ISDN network:
1. Unpack and inspect the ISDN PRI cables. Retain the original package.
2. Plug the ISDN PRI cable into the PRI port(s).
3. Plug the ISDN PRI cable(s) into the network terminating equipment.
Tip: A dual-port card needs two ISDN PRI cables when using both ports.

155

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Test the PRI Card
If the installation is successful, the PRI card will boot up, configure itself
with the default database, and communicate with the system.
To test the PRI card:
1. Inspect the LEDs on the faceplate to verify that the card is functioning.
See Faceplate LEDs on page 356.
2. Log into the System Administration Tool (see page 8).
3. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click Maintenance Commands.
4. Enter STATE to verify that the trunks associated
with the PRI channels are all in IDLE state.

Installing a Peripheral Resource Card (PRC)
Each FIM in the DSU must have a peripheral resource card (PRC) installed
above it.
WARNING:POWER MUST NOT BE APPLIED TO THE
PERIPHERAL CABINET WHILE YOU ARE INSTALLING THE
PERIPHERAL RESOURCE CARD.
To install a peripheral resource card:
1. Unpack the PRC.
2. Slide the PRC into the top of slot 1 until it connects firmly with the
backplane (see Figure 69 on page 292).
3. Fasten the PRC in place using the two screws provided, or use the
latches on the card guides.
4. If a second PRC is required, install it in the same manner in the top of
slot 6 (see Figure 69 on page 292).
Next: After installing the PRC, go back to “Install the Interface Assemblies”
on page 49.

156

Upgrades and FRUs

Replacing a DSU FIM
Refer to “Safety Considerations” on page 98.
To replace a DSU FIM:
1. Power down the unit (see page 151).
2. Remove the front panels (see page 142).
3. Attach an anti-static strap to your wrist.
4. Remove adjoining DSU cards.
a. Pull out the 2 DSU cards next to the FIM being replaced in order to
access the FIM slot.
5. Remove the FIM.
a. Disconnect the internal optical fiber cables from the FIM faceplate.
Mark the cable connectors so they are replaced correctly on the
new FIM.
b. Remove the screws or release the latches on the FIM.
c. Pull the FIM out gently from slot 1 or 6, unplugging it from the
backplane.
6. Install a new FIM.
a. Slide the new FIM into the bottom slot 1 or 6, making sure it is firmly
connected to the backplane DIN connector.
b. Fasten the screws or release the latches on the FIM.
c. Remove the plastic caps from the cable connectors on the FIM
faceplate and connect the optical fiber cables to those connectors.
7. Replace the DSU cards.
8. Power up the unit (see page 151).
9. Replace the front panels (see page 142).

157

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Installing a DSU FIM
WARNING:FIBER OPTIC SOURCES EMIT INFRARED LIGHT
INVISIBLE TO THE HUMAN EYE THAT CAN DAMAGE THE
RETINA. NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY INTO A SOURCE OR INTO
THE END OF A FIBER ENERGIZED BY A SOURCE. WHEN
WORKING WITH RAW FIBER OPTIC CABLE, BE CAREFUL OF
FIBER ENDS OR SLIVERS THAT CAN PUNCTURE THE SKIN
AND CAUSE IRRITATION.
To install a DSU FIM:
1. Attach the anti-static strap to your wrist.
2. Unpack the FIM. Inspect the FIM to ensure that it is not damaged.
3. Remove the DSU unit front door
a. Pry open the two latches on the right hand side of the black cover
panel on the front door, and swing the cover panel off to the left.
b. Loosen the two screws under the black panel to release the front
door.
c. Pull the top corners of the front door out and lift it off the lip at the
bottom front of the unit.
4. Remove the DSU cards from the cabinet. Insert each circuit card in a
separate anti-static bag.
5. Slide the FIM into the bottom slot 1 or slot 6 until it connects with the
backplane firmly. Fasten the FIM in place with the two screws provided
or use the latch on the card guides.
6. Remove the anti-static strap from your wrist.

Installing an R2 Card
Before you install the R2 card, ensure that:
•

The system has a free DSU slot for the R2 card

•

A computer is available to connect to the R2 card as a maintenance
PC. IMAT provides the communication between the card and the
computer. Refer to page 7 for PC requirements.

•

Install IMAT on the maintenance PC (see page 88).

158

Upgrades and FRUs

Installation Sequence
Install the R2 card in the following sequence:
•

Program the card using the System Administration Tool (see the
Online Help for details)

•

Install the interface assembly (see page 49)

•

Install the R2 card

•

Save the IMAT database onto the R2 card

•

Connect the R2 card to the PSTN network

•

Test the R2 card

Install the R2 Card
The R2 card is installed in any empty DSU slot. The DSU cabinet supplies
the power for the card and provides a message interface back to the
control cabinet through the FIM interface and the fiber optic cable.
Save the IMAT Database to the R2 Card
Before you save the IMAT database to the R2 card, you need to configure
the R2 database and connect the computer to the R2 card. For more
information, refer to the IMAT online help.
Connecting the R2 Card to the PSTN Network
To connect the R2 card to the PSTN network:
1. Unpack and inspect the R2 coaxial cables. See “R2 Card
Connections” on page 160. Retain the original package.
2. Plug the R2 cable(s) into the R2 port(s).
See Table 74 on page 292 for the R2 card RJ-45 connector pinout.

159

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 29: R2 Card Connections
3. Plug the R2 cable(s) into the network terminating equipment.
See Table 74 on page 292 for the R2 card RJ-45 connector pinout.
Tip: A dual-port card needs two coaxial cables if you are using both ports.
Tip: The R2 coaxial cables have both transmit (arrow pointing away from
cable) and receive (arrow pointing towards cable) connectors. When you set
the card for trunk side termination (jumper at NT position), connect the R2
coaxial cable transmit lead to the network receive connector, and the R2
coaxial receive lead to the network transmit connector. When you set the
card for line side termination (jumper at LT position), connect the R2 coaxial
cable transmit lead to the network transmit connector, and the R2 coaxial
receive lead to the network receive connector.

Testing the R2 Card
If the installation is successful, the R2 card will boot up, configure itself with
the default database and communicate with the system.
To test the R2 card:
1. Inspect the LEDs on the faceplate to verify that the card is functioning.
See Faceplate LEDs on page 359.
2. Log into the System Administration Tool (see page 8).

160

Upgrades and FRUs

3. In the All forms (alphabetical) list, click Maintenance Commands.
4. Enter STATE to verify that the trunks associated
with the R2 channels are all in IDLE state.
Next: After installing the R2 card, go back to “Install the Interface
Assemblies” on page 49.

Install SUPERSET HUB FRUs
Installing a Fiber Interface Module
To install a FIM in a SUPERSET HUB:
1. Power down the SUPERSET HUB unit by disconnecting the power
cord.
2. Disconnect the fiber optic cables from the fiber interface module.
3. Remove the two screws which secure the FIM to the unit and remove
the FIM.
4. Replace the FIM. Ensure that the edge connector on the FIM is
correctly located in the socket inside the unit.
5. Replace the two screws which secure the FIM to the unit.

161

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Migrate an SX-2000 PBX
Only the MicroLight can be migrated using this procedure. To migrate an
SX-2000 Light Non-redundant system simply replace the control cabinet
with a 3300 controller. Similarly replace a 3200 ICP controller with a 3300
controller. You cannot migrate the SX-2000 Light redundant control
system to an equivalent 3300 ICP.
To upgrade SX-2000 MicroLIGHT hardware for 3300 ICP control:
1. Remove the Main Controller (MMC) from slot 1/1/1.
2. Install a triple FIM in that slot.
3. Remove any FIM carrier cards in the DSU slots.
4. Do NOT remove any other cards.
Tip: Refer to Knowledge Base Article 04-1000-00068 (TB 58005193) for
Migration procedure details.

An SX-2000 MicroLIGHT system converted to 3300 control uses fiber
interface modules (FIM) of the triple FIM carrier card as required:
•

One triple FIM carrier card

•

One control resources card

•

One peripheral switch control (PSC) Card

•

One to eight peripheral interface cards (PIC)

•

Optionally, one to four DSU cards 0 DSU1 through DSU4.
Triple FIM Carrier Card Port

When connected, support

Circuit 1 (bottom)

PER cards

Circuit 2

DSU in slots 2 and 3

Circuit 3 (top)

DSU in slots 4 and 5

Any DSU or peripheral cabinets that were connected to the MicroLIGHT,
must now be connected by fiber directly to the 3300 ICP controller.

162

Upgrades and FRUs

Figure 30: SX-2000 MicroLIGHT under 3300 control

163

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

164

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

166

Troubleshooting

About this Chapter
This chapter provides standard procedures to troubleshoot the most
common problems and is organized as follows:
•

Troubleshooting Tools (page 168)

•

Using the Phone Debug Option (page 170)

•

Using the Dual Mode Phone Debug Option (page 171)

•

General Troubleshooting Steps (page 181)

•

View Alarms (page 182)

•

Embedded System Management (ESM) (page 183)

•

Software Installation and Upgrade (page 183)

•

Downgrading to a Previous Software Release (page 185)

•

Software Backup and Restore (page 186)

•

Audio File Downloads (page 188)

•

Troubleshoot Hardware
-

Alarms (page 189)

Embedded T1/E1 (PRI, T1/D4, or MSDN/DPNSS) (page 191)

Embedded BRI (page 193)

Network Services Units (NSUs) (page 194)

Analog Services Units (ASUs) (page 196)

In-Line Power (page 197)

Digital Service Units (page 201)

•

Troubleshooting Digital Trunks (page 203)

•

Troubleshoot the Network

•

CXi-specific Issues (page 207)

IP Trunking (page 204)

E2T (page 206)

IP Phone Registration (page 210)

Troubleshoot Phones and Peripherals
-

Phone Connection (page 217)

Phone Audio Quality (page 222)

167

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

IP Phone Boot Sequence (page 225)

Checking the IP Phone Progress Display (page 230)

IP Console (page 231)

IMPORTANT: Please see “Before You Contact Technical Support” on
page 179 before contacting Mitel Technical Support.
Tip: Maintenance and troubleshooting of your LAN/WAN network is the
responsibility of your network provider. Mitel Technical Support can help you
isolate minor network problems; Technical Support will escalate complex
network problem to Professional Services, a billable service.
Tip: For information on troubleshooting resiliency problems, refer to the
Mitel 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel OnLine.

Troubleshooting Tools
Table 8 below lists the tools available to help you troubleshoot a 3300 ICP
system.
Table 8: Troubleshooting Tools
Tool Name

Location

Function

Applies to

Alarms Detail
Form

System
Administration
Tool (Maintenance
and Diagnostics).

Provides the definition
and location of the
alarms.

3300 ICP
system.

Logs

System
Administration
Tool (Maintenance
and Diagnostics).

Provides a history of the
software logs.

3300 ICP
software.

Device
Connectivity
Form

System
Administration
Tool (Maintenance
and Diagnostics)

Reports previous and
latest Layer 2 MAC and
port number.

IP Phones.

L2 STAT
commands

System
Administration
Tool (Maintenance
and Diagnostics)

Provides L2 switch ports
details: MAC address,
status, Spanning Tree
information

CXi and MXe
internal L2
switch.

IMAT

Maintenance or
IMAT PC.

Allows you to load
databases on the NSU
PRI.

PRI/QSIG and
R2 NSUs.
(Page 1 of 3)

168

Troubleshooting

Table 8: Troubleshooting Tools (continued)
Tool Name

Location

Function

Applies to

IP Phone
Analyzer

IP Phone Analyzer
PC

Supports IP Phone
troubleshooting.

IP Phones.

Java Console

Console PC

To troubleshoot IP
Consoles (see Note).

5550 IP
Console.

LEDs

Front of each unit.

To provide overall status
of unit.

3300 ICP
hardware.

Back of MXe.

To provide status of
power supplies and
RAID controller.

3300 ICP
hardware.

NSU Shell

NSU Maintenance
Port.

Lists NSU error
messages.

All NSUs.

Logviewer
(see
page 237)

FTP Logs on
controller (ftp from
Maintenance PC)

Provides a history of
software logs (pstswlog,
xrtc, xe2t, premortem).

3300 ICP
software.

RTC Shell

Controller
Maintenance Port

Shows error messages
during the installation of
the 3300. Monitors the
boot sequence.

3300 ICP
software.

Phone Debug
Option

IP Phones with
display.

Allows you to

IP Phone with
display.

• Monitor the phone
settings
• Program a static IP
address (see page 54)
• Hard code connection
speed and duplex
mode (reboot while
pressing 9)
Auto-negotiation is
preferred.

(Page 2 of 3)

169

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 8: Troubleshooting Tools (continued)
Tool Name

Location

Dual Mode
Phone Debug
Option

5215 IP Phone
(Dual Mode), 5220
IP Phone (Dual
Mode, 5330 IP
Phone, and 5340
IP Phone.

Function

Allows you to
configure/view:

Applies to
Dual Mode IP
Phones

• Network parameters
• Hardware
components
• Set the phone mode
• PIN, IP address,
DHCP, Video.

SMDR

Controller (telnet
from Maintenance
PC).

Provides the call paths
(call logs).

3300 ICP
system.

Note: To turn on the Java console: at the IP Console PC, select
Start/Settings/Control Panel, and launch Java Plug-in.
(Page 3 of 3)

Using the Phone Debug Option
You can use the debug function on display IP Phones and Appliances,
excluding the Dual Mode IP Phones (see below). Press the Up/Down
volume keys, or softkeys (if available) to navigate the options.
To use the phone debug option:
1. Hold down both volume keys at the same time.
2. Enter debug (33284) on the telephone key pad (handset on hook).
3. On a 5020/5010 IP Phone, press Superkey to display categories.
4. View detail for the following categories:

170

Version info (Main and Boot loads)

Network (IP information, such as the telephone’s IP Address,
Subnet Mask, ICP List, DHCP Server Address, TFTP Server
Address, Gateway IP (Router) VLAN/Priority, DSCP)

Telephony/DSP (Telephone Directory Number and other design
information)

Connection (Link Reset; Hard Reset; Toggle ERROR persistence;
CDP Support; Port Settings; Static Settings)

Troubleshooting

Browser Config (Proxy Server Configuration, Debug Stream
On/Off, etc.)

Memory Stats (Various design memory details)

5. Press Phone View to exit the debug menu, or
Press Cancel on the 5020 IP Phone.

Using the Dual Mode Phone Debug Option
On the 5215 IP Phone (Dual Mode), press * (yes), 0 (default), and # (no);
on the 5220 IP Phone (Dual Mode), press the three softkeys to select
menu items.
Accessing the Configuration Menu
Method A: To access the menu during the phone boot sequence:
•

Hold down both volume keys until NETWORK PARAMETERS?
appears.

Method B: If the phone is up and running with the MiNet main load:
1. Hold down both volume keys at the same time.
2. Continue to hold the down volume key and release the up volume key.
3. Press 234 on the telephone key pad and then release the down key.
-

NETWORK PARAMETERS? appears.

4. Proceed to “Viewing/Modifying Network Parameters” on page 172,
“Configuring Hardware Components” on page 173, “Setting the Phone
Mode” on page 173, or “Using Tools and Features” on page 173.
Method C: Using hotkeys, at power up, press and hold the following key
combinations:
Key Sequence

Function

* and 6 (M)

Change mode to MiNet

* and 7 (S)

Change mode to SIP

Jump to “Config Teleworker” menu

Erase the PIN and VCON configuration

any other keypad keys

Display “Configure Phone” prompt

Note: Hotkeys access provides limited access. Methods A and B provide full
access

171

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Viewing/Modifying Network Parameters
You can view and modify the following network parameters on the phone:
•

Phone IP address (current and static)

•

Gateway IP address (current and static)

•

Subnet mask (current and static)

•

Current controller IP address

•

TUG1, TUG2, TUG3, and TUG4 IP addresses (current)

•

TFTP server IP address (current)

•

VLAN ID and priority (current and static)

•

DSCP value

•

IPA IP address (current and static)

•

TUG IP address (static)

•

TFTP SVC IP and port (static).

To view and modify network parameters:
1. Access the Configuration Menu (see page 171).
2. At NETWORK PARAMETERS?, press Yes. VIEW CURRENT
VALUES? appears.
3. Do one of the following:
-

Press Yes, and then press the Up/Down volume keys to view each
setting. When you return to VIEW CURRENT VALUES?, press No.
VIEW STATIC VALUES? appears.

Press No. VIEW STATIC VALUES? appears.

4. Do one of the following:
-

Press Yes, and then press the Up/Down volume keys to view each
setting. When you return to VIEW STATIC VALUES?, press No.
MODIFY STATIC VALUES? appears.

Press No. MODIFY STATIC VALUES? appears.

5. Do one of the following and then reboot the phone:
-

172

Press Yes, and then press the Up/Down volume keys to scroll
through each setting. Use the keypad to modify parameter(s), and
then follow the prompts to store the changes and reboot the phone.

Troubleshooting

To reset the factory defaults, press Default, and then follow the
prompts to set and store the factory defaults and reboot the phone.

6. To exit the current menu without a reboot:
-

To return to the main menu, press Yes at EXIT MENU?

To return to the default display, press Superkey.

Configuring Hardware Components
You can configure the speed and duplex for the LAN and PC ports.
To manually configure hardware components:
1. Access the Configuration Menu (see page 171).
2. Press No until HARDWARE CONFIG? appears, and then press Yes.
MODIFY SETTINGS? appears.
3. Do one of the following and then reboot the phone:
-

To modify the current hardware components, press Yes, and then
follow the prompts to modify each setting and store the changes.

To reset the factory defaults, press Default, and then follow the
prompts to set and store the factory defaults.

4. To exit the current menu without a reboot:
-

To return to the main menu, press Yes at EXIT MENU?

To return to the default display, press Superkey.

Setting the Phone Mode
You can program the 5215 or 5220 IP Phone (Dual Mode) to use MiNET
or to work remotely using either SIP or Teleworker Solution (6010).
For SIP configuration information, refer to the 5207/5215/5220 IP Phone
Installation Guide (56006499, Rev A) packaged with the phone, and to the
5215/5220 IP Phone SIP User Guide available at www.mitel.com.
Using Tools and Features
•

“Erasing the Registration PIN” on page 174

•

“Pinging IP Addresses” on page 174

•

“Conducting a DHCP Trace” on page 174

•

“Configuring Video Conferencing Parameters” on page 175

•

“Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 176.

173

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Erasing the Registration PIN
1. Access the Configuration Menu (see page 171).
2. Press No until TOOLS AND FEATURES? appears, and then press
Yes. ERASE PIN? appears.
3. Press Yes, and then follow the prompts to erase the PIN and to store
the changes and reboot the phone.
4. To exit the current menu without a reboot:
-

To return to the main menu, press Yes at EXIT MENU?

To return to the default display, press Superkey.

Pinging IP Addresses
1. Access the Configuration Menu during the phone boot sequence.
2. Press No until TOOLS AND FEATURES? appears.
3. Press Yes, and then press No until PING TEST? appears.
4. Press Yes and then follow the prompts to conduct the PING test.
5. To exit, do one of the following:
-

To return to the main menu, press Yes at EXIT MENU?.

To return to the default display, press Superkey.

Conducting a DHCP Trace
There is a delay while the phone performs DHCP discovery. The result of
the trace displays the following information:
•

Phone and Gateway IP addresses

•

Subnet mask

•

WINS, DNS, TFTP, ICP and Video servers

•

DHCP server and Mitel IDs

•

Lease

•

T1 and T2

•

VLAND ID and priority

•

HTTP proxy

•

IPA address.

174

Troubleshooting

To conduct a DHCP trace on the Dual Mode phone:
1. Access the Configuration Menu (see page 171).
2. Press No until TOOLS AND FEATURES? appears.
3. Press Yes, and then press No until DHCP Trace? appears.
4. Press Yes, and press the Up/Down volume keys to view the results of
the DHCP trace.
5. To exit, do one of the following:
-

When you return to DHCP TRACE?, press No.

To return to the default display, press Superkey.

Configuring Video Conferencing Parameters
To configure video conferencing on the 5220 IP Phone (Dual Boot):
1. Access the Configuration Menu (see page 171).
2. Press No until TOOLS AND FEATURES? appears.
3. Press Yes and then press No until VIDEO CONFIGURATION?
appears.
4. Press Yes. VIEW PARAMETERS? appears.
5. Do one of the following:
-

Press Yes and then follow the prompts. When you return to VIEW
PARAMETERS?, press No. MODIFY PARAMETERS appears.

To continue, press No. MODIFY PARAMETERS appears.

6. Do one of the following:
-

Press Yes and follow the prompts to modify the video conferencing
parameters, store the changes, and reboot the phone.

To set the factory default settings, press Default and follow the
prompts to set and store the factory defaults and reboot the phone.

7. To exit the current menu without a reboot:
-

To return to the main menu, press Yes at EXIT MENU?

To return to the default display, press Superkey.

175

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Restoring Factory Default Settings
Tip: Restoring the factory default settings on the 5215 or 5220 IP Phone
(Dual Mode) will erase the static network parameters.

1. Access the Configuration Menu (see page 171).
2. Press No until TOOLS AND FEATURES? appears.
3. Press Yes and then press No until RESTORE DEFAULTS? appears.
4. Press Yes and then follow the prompts to set and store the factory
defaults and reboot the phone.
5. To exit the current menu without a reboot:
-

To return to the main menu, press Yes at EXIT MENU?

To return to the default display, press Superkey.

IEEE 802.1X Authentication for IP Phones
The 5215 Dual Mode, 5220 Dual Mode, and 5235 IP Phones support IEEE
802.1X Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) -Message Digest 5
(MD5) Challenge authentication protocol. Refer to the 3300 ICP
Engineering Guidelines for more information about this protocol.
If the network switches and their ports support 802.1.x authorization, the
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server checks the
username and password of the IP phones against the entries in the
database:
•

If the username and password of the IP phone match the username
and password on the RADIUS server, the IP phone is granted access
to the port services. The IP phone boots up.

•

If the username and password don’t match, the IP phone is denied port
access. The IP phone does not boot up.

•

If a username and password are not configured for the IP phone, you
are prompted to enter them.

Configuring an Authentication Username and Password
1. Power up or reboot the 5215 Dual Mode, 5220 Dual Mode, or 5235 IP
Phone.
2. Wait for the prompt: PORT ACCESS CONTROL
PRESS # TO CONTINUE.

176

Troubleshooting

3. Press #.
4. Enter a username of up to 20 characters in length. This username
must match a name that is programmed on the RADIUS server. Use
the phone keys in the table below to enter the characters:
DTMF Key

Alphanumeric Characters (in order)

,&$!?%'"-_1

abc2

def3

ghi4

jkl5

mno6

pqrs7

tuv8

wxyz9

Backup and edit previous char

./:@0

Commit entered data
By default, the user name and password are entered in upper case
letters. However, you can use both upper and lower case. To change
to lower case, press the Volume Down key while entering a letter. All
subsequent letters will be in lower case. To return to upper case, press
the Volume Up key while entering a letter.

5. Press # to commit the username.
6. Enter a password from 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters in length. This
password must match the password that you have programmed on the
RADIUS server for the user.
7. Press # to commit the password. The message, “Waiting for 802.1X
authentication” appears in the phone display.
After the server authenticates the username and password, the IP
phone boots up.

177

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Erasing an Authentication Username and Password
1. Access the configuration menu on the 5215 Dual Mode, 5220 Dual
Mode, or 5235 IP Phone. See “Accessing the Configuration Menu” on
page 171.
2. From NETWORK PARAMETERS? press No until on the telephone
keypad until TOOLS AND FEATURES? appears.
3. Press Yes.
4. Press No until EDIT 8021X SETTINGS appears.
5. Press Yes. ERASE 8021X DATA? appears in the display.
6. Press Yes to erase the current username and password.
7. Press Yes. The phone erases the data from its flash and then reboots.
Tip: The IP phone usernames and passwords that you configured for
EAP-MD5 Challenge Authentication do not need to be reprogrammed
if power to the phone is lost.

Enabling or Disabling 802.1X Authentication
By default, EAP- MD5 Challenge Authentication Protocol is enabled on
5215 Dual Mode, 5220 Dual Mode, and 5235 IP Phones. If your network
does not use this protocol, you do need to disable support for it on these
phones.
1. Access the configuration menu. See “Accessing the Configuration
Menu” on page 171.
2. From NETWORK PARAMETERS? press No until on the telephone
keypad until TOOLS AND FEATURES? appears.
3. Press Yes.
4. Press No until EDIT 8021X SETTINGS appears.
5. Press Yes. ERASE 8021X DATA? appears in the display.
6. Press No. If currently enabled, you are prompted to disable 8021X. If
currently disabled, you are prompted to enable 8021X.
7. Press Yes.
8. Press Yes. The phone erases the data from its flash and then reboots.

178

Troubleshooting

Before You Contact Technical Support
If you cannot find the source of the problem in this chapter, please collect
the required information listed in the applicable section(s) before calling
Mitel Technical Support (see “Technical Support” on page 11 for the
number to call).
You also need the following information when calling Technical Support:
Serial number(s) of your equipment and software.
Nature of the problem.
What you were doing when the problem occurred.
Troubleshooting steps taken.
Troubleshooting results.
Your network diagram.
DHCP server configuration and settings.
Layer 2 switch configuration and settings.
Whether the problem is between IP and IP, IP and remote IP, remote
IP and TDM, etc.
Alarm log details.
NSU Maintenance log details (if applicable).
IP Phone information (refer to the table).
Table 9: Collecting IP Phone Information
Question

Comment

Note: There are several new L2 maintenance commands that are useful for collecting
details: l2_poe_satus; l2_stat_maclist; l2_stat_port; l2_stat_spanning_tree; l2_stat_sw
Is there a PC attached to the IP
Phone?

If yes, please have the Network Interface Card
(NIC) settings of the PC ready. It is
recommended that NO power saving options
and NO flow control options be enabled.

Have there been broadcast storms?

Look for a broadcast storm in a Sniffer trace.

Is your cabling CAT 5 or better?

None.

Do your L2 or L3 switch statistics
show any issues such as Runts, etc.?

Runs/Collision/Frame error may indicate an
issue with NIC or a duplex mismatch.
(Page 1 of 2)

179

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 9: Collecting IP Phone Information (continued)
Question

Comment

What is the L2 port setting for IP
phone and controller?

For IP phones, we recommend Trunk Port.

Does your L2 switch have CDP
enabled, spanning tree enabled, or
Port Fast enabled?

None.

What is your speed setting? (10/100,
Full/Half, Auto, Fixed?)

None.

Do the symptoms improve if the IP
phone is set to “auto and lock”?

For controllers, we recommend Access Port.
Mitel recommends setting “Auto” on phones. In
some unique PC/network, the IP phone
may require to hard coding or setting to “auto
and lock” mode.

Do you have the assert information
from the debug menu?

Assert value is saved in the debug mode and
reports the last reason that the phone
rebooted.

What phone set are you using (5020,
5220, 5220 Dual Mode)?

None.

Is there a pattern? For example, does
the problem follow the phone? Can
you ping
the IP phone?

None.

Have you noted any display
information?

None.

Have you tried increasing keepAlives
up to 1 minute via the System
Administration
tool registry entries?

None.

Do you have a complex network?

If yes, a network topology diagram is required.

Can you obtain a packet capture via
Ethereal at the phone level?

Packet capture helps us to analyze the state of
the network and the condition of
the phone.

Can you obtain an IP Phone Analysis
(IPA) for the phone in question?

IPA provides crucial information about how the
phone is reacting
(Page 2 of 2)

180

Troubleshooting

General Troubleshooting Steps
Follow the steps below if you can’t find the problem when using the
troubleshooting tables in this chapter.
1. Verify the status of the LEDs (see page 331 for more information).
2. In the System Administration Tool, review the Alarm Details form
(Maintenance and Diagnostics). Identify and fix each alarm.
3. For IP Phone and physical network connectivity problems:
-

Verify that the device has power.

Verify the status of the port link integrity LEDs at each end of the
cable.

Verify that each device transmits a link integrity pulse (LINK LED
on).

If the link is down, try with another port.Verify that proper cabling is
installed between the end devices.

Verify that a crossover cable was not installed instead of a
straight-though cable, and vice-versa.

4. For network media problems:
-

If there is excessive noise, check for cabling problems.

If there are excessive collisions, check for duplex mismatch
problems.

For Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC): check if there is a faulty NIC
card or flow-control.

If there are excessive runt frames, check for bad cables, duplex
mismatches or bad PC NIC.

5. For network connectivity problems, identify the path between two end
devices by doing the following PING test (in order):
-

Local

Local gateway

Remote gateway

Remote IP.

181

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

View Alarms
Alarms indicate the functional state of the system.
An alarm state can be viewed on either the front panel of the controller (see
LEDs—Appendix D: Status LEDs on page 331) or on the attendant console.

Alarm Levels
•

No alarm: The system is functioning properly.

•

Minor: The system has detected a minor problem that may affect
service.

•

Major: The system has detected a problem that is causing a serious
degradation of service.

•

Critical: The system has detected a serious loss of call processing
capability. System Fail Transfer is invoked by a Critical Alarm.

View Alarms
To view alarms, go to the Alarms Details form in the Maintenance and
Diagnostics section of the System Administration Tool.
To view more information on an alarm, use the show fault maintenance command.
Alarm Categories are defined in the System Administration Tool online
Help.

182

Troubleshooting

Troubleshoot Software
Embedded System Management (ESM)
Table 10: ESM Troubleshooting
Symptom

Probable Causes

Corrective Action

ESM Tool does
not launch

Cookies are disabled
in Internet Explorer.

Enable cookies (see Internet
Explorer Online Help for more
information).

Proxy server is
enabled on your PC.

Disable proxy server in Internet
Explorer (Tools, Internet Options,
Connection, LAN settings).

Installation and Upgrade
Table 11: Software Installation and Upgrade Troubleshooting
Error
message on
RTC shells
Fail to load file
Fail to log in

Probable Causes

Corrective Action

IIS/PWS/FTP
server is not
running or not
installed.

Go to your FTP site properties and re-start
FTP services (see “Network Configuration
Examples” on page 317 for information on
Windows 2000 FTP site properties). OR
Re-install your FTP server.

The installation
files are not in the
home directories
of the FTP server.

1. Check and identify the home directory of
your FTP site properties (default is
c:/inetpub/ftproot), and ensure that
boot_install, sysro.tar is there.
2. If the files are not there, run the
setup.exe again to ensure that all these
files are copied to this home directory
(not the 3300 directory).
(Page 1 of 2)

183

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 11: Software Installation and Upgrade Troubleshooting
(continued)
Error
message on
RTC shells

Probable Causes

Corrective Action

FTP user (3300)
cannot log in FTP
server (by default,
the FTP user
defined in
Vxworks is ftp and
the password is
ftp).

1. Check the security tab of your FTP site
and ensure that your FTP site allows
“anonymous” connection.
2. Verify if there is an FTP username
defined in your FTP server's user
domain. If there is, ensure that the
username and password are correct,
OR delete the user from user domain in
order to allow “anonymous” login.
3. Confirm that the FTP user name and
password in Vxworks are ftp and ftp.
You may change them to match those
defined on your server's user domain (or
vice versa). Tip: You may ftp from a
computer into the FTP server and login
as user defined in Vxworks to confirm ftp
user can access FTP server

No network
connectivity
between your FTP
server and the
3300 controller

1. Ensure that your FTP server and the
controller are on the same subnet.
2. If not, verify if the gateway IP addresses
are defined, and that the router is able to
route between two subnets.
3. If you changed the IP address on the
FTP server, ensure that in “FTP site
properties” you select the corresponding
IP address on the FTP site tab.
Typically, “unassigned”.
4. Verify that the Host IP address in
Vxworks is pointing to your FTP server,
and bootdevice is set to motfcc.
Tips: To avoid troubleshooting router
related issue, you should connect your
FTP server directly to the controller (FTP
server and controller on the same
subnet).

The Firewall
application on the
FTP server is
running.

Disable the Firewall application.

(Page 2 of 2)

184

Troubleshooting

Table 12: SysID or Password Error
Symptom

Probable Causes

Corrective Action

License and
Option Selection
error: “Password
does not match
the purchased
options you
selected”.

The System ID or
i-Button has not
been installed.

Install the SysID module or i-Button.

If you still can’t fix the problem, call Technical Support. Make sure you
have the following information on hand before calling:
The controller’s VxWorks parameters (bootdevice, host file, inet on
ethernet, host IP address).
The FTP site properties (home directory, IP address of FTP site, user
defined in user domain).
The error message(s) in the RTC shell.

Downgrading to a Previous Software Release
If it becomes necessary to downgrade the system software:
•
•

ensure that you have an off-board database backup that was created
in the software version that you are going back to
use the “Installing System Software Manually” procedure on page 77.
WARNING:YOU MAY NOT DOWNGRADE THE LX
CONTROLLER TO A SOFTWARE VERSION PRIOR TO
RELEASE 5.0. A DOWNGRADE WOULD RENDER THE
CONTROLLER INOPERABLE.

185

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Backup and Restore
Table 13: Software Backup and Restore Troubleshooting

Symptom
Backup/restore
failure (only fail to
FTP files between
PC).
Note: If Java
Plug-in console
view is enabled,
you should see the
security warning.

Probable
Causes

Corrective Action

Java version is
not correct. OR
higher version
of Java is
installed.

1. Verify that the correct version of Java
is installed (see “Install the Java
Plug-In” on page 93).

Backup/restore
applet is not
trusted
(identitydb.obj
not on PC).

1. Go to the Backup or Restore form in
System Administration Tool
(Maintenance and Diagnostics).

Backup/restore
applet is not
trusted
(identitydb.obj
not in right
directory.

Verify the file is in the correct
profile (the profile used to
log onto the PC).

Backup/restore
applet is not
trusted
(identitydb.obj
has wrong
extension).

Verify that the extension of the file is .obj
(not .obj.obj, or .obj.txt, or anything else).
Tip: Disable the Hide file extensions for
known file types option to see the
complete extension of the file. In the
folder window, select:
For Windows NT: View/Options/View.
For Windows 2000: Tools/Folder
Options/View.

2. If another version is installed, remove
it, re-install the correct version, and
reboot the PC.

2. Click the link to download the
identitydb.obj file to the Maintenance
PC. Save the file in:
For Windows NT:
WINNT/Profile/ .
For Windows 2000:
Documents and Settings/

(Page 1 of 2)

186

Troubleshooting

Table 13: Software Backup and Restore Troubleshooting
(continued)
Symptom

Probable
Causes

Backup procedure
repeats on its own

Internet
Explorer
timeout

Execute timeout.reg or timeout_4.reg
from software CD/
Product_Support/Registry. (See
README_for_timeout_reg_files.doc in
Product_Support/Registry)

Database backup,
with voice mail
messages
included, fails

Lack of free
space in the db
partition

Determine the amount of free space in
the db partition and if there is enough
space for voice mail messages.

Corrective Action

You can see the free space and required
space by entering commands in the RTC
window:
• dosFsShow “/vmail”
• debugVolInfo = 1
• debugVolInfo = 0
Refer to Troubleshooting Guide
04-2806-00011 for detailed instructions.
(Page 2 of 2)

If you still can’t fix the problem, call Technical Support. Make sure you
have the following information on hand before calling:
Java plug-in version
Maintenance PC username
Maintenance PC IP address
Location of identitydb.obj file on the Maintenance PC
Logs from the Maintenance Port (RTC Shell).

187

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Audio File Downloads
Table 14: Audio File Downloads Troubleshooting
Probable
Causes

Corrective Action

Audio File cannot
be located

Corrupted file

Verify that the audio file is not corrupted.

Audio File is
rejected

Incorrect audio
file
specifications

Verify that the audio file meets the
required specifications (see System
Audio File Updates form in the System
Administration Tool).

System Greeting is
in the wrong
language

Incorrect
language file
downloaded

Download a file in the correct language
using the System Audio File Updated
form or Enterprise Manager.

System error log is
generated

Downloading
file when
system is
unavailable

Verify that you are not downloading a file
during a backup, restore or upgrade, or
while someone is recording the same
greeting from a telephone.

Symptom

188

Troubleshooting

Troubleshoot Hardware
Alarms
Table 15: Alarm Troubleshooting
Alarm

Probable Cause

Corrective Action

E2T ICP Com

E2T card has no IP
address.

If you are using the controller’s
internal DHCP server for the E2T:
ensure you assigned a static IP
address to the E2T using the correct
MAC address (see Step 3 in page 29).
If you are using an external DHCP
server for the system: verify that
options are programmed correctly
(see page 307).

DHCP is corrupted.

Rebuild the DHCP scope.

Incorrectly
programmed E2T IP
address or setup
using a debug cable.

Verify that E2T VxWorks parameters
are correct (see “Controller
Configuration Settings (RTC)” on
page 300). (No debug cable on MXe).

Compression
channels or 30 voice
mail ports
programmed but
DSP module not
installed (voice mail
DSP requirement
does not apply to LX
or 700-user
controller).

Use the Show Status Dsp
maintenance command to identify
status of DSPs in the controller.
Install required DSP module(s) (“DSP
Module” on page 105).

DSP module(s) for
compression
installed, but license
not enabled.

Enable compression license in
System Administration Tool in the
License and Option Selection form.

DSP Status

(Page 1 of 2)

189

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 15: Alarm Troubleshooting (continued)
Alarm

Probable Cause

Corrective Action

DSP Card
Status

DSP card is
defective.

For a defective DSP module, ensure
that the module is seated securely.
For an embedded DSP failure, replace
the controller. Use Show Status Dsp
to identify the location of the
defective module.

Fan

Fan is defective
(MXe).

Replace the fan (see page 139).
See note.

One PSU

Power supply unit is
defective (MXe).

Replace the PSU (see page 139).
See note.

Two PSU

Power supply unit is
defective (MXe).

Replace the PSU (see page 139).
See note.

RAID Hard Disk Hard disk has a fault
(MXe).

Replace the hard disk (see page 128).
See note.

Note: Enter the Show Status Redundant maintenance command to identified
the failed component.
A minor Fan, Power Supply, or RAID alarm in the MXe means that only one of
the components has failed. A major alarm means that both have failed.
(Page 2 of 2)

190

Troubleshooting

Embedded T1/E1 (PRI, T1/D4, or MSDN/DPNSS)
Table 16: Embedded PRI Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Embedded PRI
calls fail and all
Status LEDs on
the Dual T1/E1
Framer are dark

Probable
Cause
Configuration

Corrective Action
Verify that embedded PRI is programmed
properly in the following forms (see also
Program Embedded PRI/Q.SIG in the
Online Help):
• Controller Module Configuration
• Dual T1/E1 Framer Configuration
• Link Descriptor Assignment
• Digital Link Assignment
After the Digital Link Assignment form is
completed, the T1/E1 Framer status LEDs
should come on. This takes about 15
seconds.

Embedded PRI
Links are “not
seizable”,
Status LEDs
show RED
alarm

Configuration or
Wiring

Ensure that the ISDN cable is plugged into
the correct RJ-45 port on the Dual T1/E1
MMC. Verify that the ISDN cable is
correctly wired.
Change the “Termination Mode” setting in
the Link Descriptor Assignment form either LT or NT. This change takes about
30 seconds to take effect.

Embedded PRI
links are “not
seizable”,
Status LEDs
show flashing
GREEN

Configuration

Verify the “Network Side/QSIG Master”
setting in the Protocol Assignment form.
Check the “Inverted D-Channel” setting in
the Link Descriptor Assignment form normally it is set to “No”. Each of these
changes takes approximately 30 seconds.

Embedded
DPNSS links
are “not
seizable”, Green
LED is ON

Configuration

Ensure that the “Address for Message
Control” field in the Link Descriptor
Assignment form is set appropriately (“A”
or “B” depending on the far end.
If the configuration is correct, wait for
about one minute until every circuit has
finished negotiation with the far end.
(Page 1 of 2)

191

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 16: Embedded PRI Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable
Cause

Corrective Action

Distorted voice
or loud noise
over PRI/QSIG
call

Voice Encoding
is not set
properly

In the Link Descriptor Assignment for the
PRI/QSIG trunk, set the “Voice Encoding”
to Nil for T1 on NA or E1 on Euro
controller.
Note: You cannot use the same Voice
Encoding settings as a PRI NSU.

High number of
slips

Configuration of
Network
Synchronization
form

Ensure that the synchronization source
being selected is to a digital PSTN trunk
(like PRI or T1/D4)

Outgoing calls
fail with reorder
tone

Configuration of
ARS or Protocol
Assignment

Enter the CCS TRACE maintenance
command to ensure that the proper digits
are being sent out.
Check the Digit Modification with the
Per-Call programming for PRI to make
sure digits are not being inserted or
absorbed unnecessarily.
Ensure that the “Protocol” field in the
Protocol Assignment form is correct for the
PSTN link (not for DPNSS).

Incoming calls
fail

Configuration of
Trunk forms

Verify in the Trunk Service Assignment
form that there is an Answer Point set up
for non-DID trunks for Day and Night
services. For dial-in trunks, verify that the
“Dial in Trunks Incoming Digit Modification
- Absorb” field is set to 0 and that the “Dial
In Trunks - Incoming Digit Modification Insert” field is set appropriately for dial in
trunks.
(Page 2 of 2)

192

Troubleshooting

Embedded BRI
Table 17: Embedded BRI Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Embedded BRI
calls fail and all
Status LEDs on
the Quad BRI
Framer are dark

Probable
Cause
Configuration

Corrective Action
Verify embedded BRI is programmed
properly in the following forms (see also
Program Embedded BRI in the online
Help):
• Controller Module Configuration
• Quad BRI Framer Configuration
• Link Descriptor Assignment
• Digital Link Assignment
• Protocol Assignment
After the Digital Link Assignment form is
completed, the red Quad BRI Framer
status LED should come on. This takes
about 15 seconds.

Embedded BRI
Links are “not
seizable”,
Status LEDs
show RED
alarm

Configuration or
Wiring

Ensure that the ISDN cable is plugged into
the correct RJ-45 port on the Quad BRI
MMC. Verify that the ISDN cable is
correctly wired (straight through for trunk
interface, crossover for terminal). Note
that 3-4 and 5-6 are the relevant pins for
the cable.
Toggle the “Bus Type” setting in the
Protocol Assignment (either S or T). This
change takes about 30 seconds to take
effect.
Ensure that the Manual TEI value is
correct (if required).

High number of
slips

Configuration of
Network
Synchronization
form.

Ensure that the synchronization source
being selected is not connected to a BRI
terminal.
If there is a digital E1 trunk, that should be
used as the first synchronization choice.
(Page 1 of 2)

193

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 17: Embedded BRI Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable
Cause

Corrective Action

Outgoing calls
fail with reorder
tone

Configuration of
ARS or
configuration of
Per Call
Capabilities

Enter the CCS TRACE maintenance
command to ensure that the proper digits
are being sent out.
Check the Digit Modification with the
Per-Call programming for BRI to make
sure digits are not being inserted or
absorbed unnecessarily.

Incoming calls
fail

Configuration of
Trunk forms

Verify in the Trunk Service Assignment
form that there is an Answer Point set up
for non-DDI trunks for Day and Night
services.
For dial-in trunks, verify that the “Dial-in
Trunks Incoming Digit Modification Absorb” field is not left blank and that the
“Dial In Trunks - Incoming Digit
Modification - Insert” field is set
appropriately for dial-in trunks.
(Page 2 of 2)

Network Services Units (NSUs)
Table 18: NSU Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable Cause

Corrective Action

NSU fails to come Automatic NSU
up after upgrade or upgrade is in
progress
new installation
(Both the red and
amber LEDs, or
just the amber
LED, are marching
between L0/L1)

Wait 15–20 minutes for the NSU
upgrade to complete.

NSU keeps
resetting with no
IMAT db error
message

Use IMAT to save the corresponding
database to NSU (PRI/QSIG).

No IMAT database
is saved to the
NSU (PRI/QSIG).

CAUTION: Do not power down
when the amber LED is marching between L0/L1. Powering
down the NSU may corrupt the
NSU software.

(Page 1 of 3)

194

Troubleshooting

Table 18: NSU Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable Cause

Changing NSU
NSU does not
from T1 to E1, NSU reflash
remains
unassigned

Corrective Action
• Flash the NSU (refer to Technical
Bulletin 58004932)
OR
• Delete datetag.txt via ftp
OR
• From the debug terminal, issue
force dl for the NSU.

The LEDs are
marching green
and amber for
more than 30
minutes during an
NSU upgrade

Corrupted NSU
software.

Refer to Technical Bulletin 58004932
for information on flashing the NSU.

NSU fails to boot,
with an error
message.
Boot line timeout

No fiber connection Fix the fiber connection, and ensure
between the
that the LEDs of both FIMs are solid
controller and NSU. green.
Universal NSU
1. Ensure that the NSU is
programmed as a Universal T1 or
programming is not
E1 (not T1 or CEPT).
complete.
2. Program the proper link descriptor
with the proper integrated access,
and assign to the corresponding
NSU unit (for example: ISDN node
for PRI protocol, T1D4 for T1D4,
DPNSS for MSDN).
3. Program at least one trunk.

PRI/QSIG NSU
fails to boot

Database not
compatible with
new load.

1. Connect IMAT to the PRI NSU and
start IMAT.
2. Download the database from the
NSU to IMAT.
3. Save the database from IMAT to
the NSU.
4. A message appears asking if you
want to convert the database.
Select Yes.
5. When the database has finished
saving, reset the NSU.
(Page 2 of 3)

195

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 18: NSU Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable Cause

Corrective Action

FTP into the NSU
fails.

Release 4.1 and
later requires a
username and
password to login

Enter:
username, mitel
password, passwd1

NSU is up, but L0
or L1 LED is solid
red

No physical
connection to far
end.

1. Verify and fix wiring.

NSU is up, but
L0/L1 LED is
flashing green

Layer 2 is not up.
Layer 2 protocol
mismatch.

1. Check your IMAT database and
verify with your Telco which
protocol you should use.

2. Check DIP Switch 6. If it is UP, set
it to DOWN to see if this makes any
difference (see Table 53 on
page 268).

2. Check the DSU wiring.
Distorted voice or
loud noise on NSU

Voice Encoding is
not set properly.

Change Voice encoding in the link
descriptor to invert for T1, and ADI
invert for CEPT (this does not apply
to Embedded PRI).
(Page 3 of 3)

If you still can’t fix the problem, contact Technical Support. Make sure you
have the following information on hand before calling:
Error message from NSU Maintenance port.
Boot sequence from NSU Maintenance port.
Symptom appears in Troubleshooting table?
PRI: can access IMAT database?

Analog Services Units (ASUs)
•

Verify the status of the LEDs (see “Analog Services Unit LEDs” on
page 351).

•

Verify that the IP addresses reserved for the ASUs are not used
elsewhere on the system (see “Analog Services Unit” on page 38).

196

Troubleshooting

In-Line Power
Use this section to troubleshoot problems with in-line powering of IP
devices.
1. Verify the following:
-

Ensure power is applied to the power unit.

Ensure you are not using crossover Ethernet cables.

Ensure that the input Ethernet cable is connected to the Data In
port of the power unit.

Ensure that the output Ethernet cable is connected to the Data and
Power Out port of the power unit.

Ensure that the input and output cables of a port pair are used for
the same IP Phone.

2. Go through Table 19 below.
3. If you cannot solve the problem using Table 19, go through the steps
in “General Troubleshooting Steps” on page 181.
4. If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical Support (see
“Before You Contact Technical Support” on page 179).
Tip: Running the power unit with an Power Inactive LED ON will not damage
the Power Unit (the port power is disconnected, and a low power pulse checks
the line status every 5 seconds).

Table 19: In-Line Power Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable cause

Power unit is
No power at outlet.
plugged in, but
OR
does not power up. faulty power outlet.
OR
faulty power cord.

Corrective Action
1. Plug a known functioning device in
the power outlet.
2. Verify that the power outlet
protection circuit has not tripped.
3. Verify that the voltage of the power
outlet is within specifications.
4. Verify that the Power Unit power
cord works correctly (including
good and solid ground
connection).
(Page 1 of 4)

197

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 19: In-Line Power Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

Power unit is
functioning, but
fans do not work.

Blocked fan
opening OR
faulty internal
power supply.

Verify that all the fan openings are
clear of any blocking material.

Power unit is
functioning, but AC
LED is OFF.

Internal circuitry
fault OR
internal power
supply failure.

1. If the fans are working, there is
probably an internal circuit fault.
2. If the fans are not working, there is
probably an internal power supply
failure.

Power unit
Power on self-test
powered up, but
(POST) not
Alarm LED still ON. completed OR
internal fault.

1. Verify if POST sequence is as
listed or not.

IP device does not
work, and both
Port Status LEDs
are OFF (Power
unit is not detecting
IP device).

1. Verify you are using a standard
UTP Category 5, 6 or 6e cable
(with 8 wires–4 pairs).

Wiring problem
OR
faulty IP device
OR
faulty Power Unit.

2. If the Alarm LED stays ON after
the POST sequence, there is an
internal fault.

2. Verify that you are not using a
crossover cable.
3. Verify that the connections for the
port pair both correspond to the
same IP device, and that the port
connections are not reversed.
4. Verify that the cables connected to
the Data In and Data Out ports
correspond to the same IP device.
5. Connect the IP device to a
different port pair on the Power
Unit. If the device works normally,
the original port is probably faulty.
6. Connect the IP device directly to
the Power Unit using a short
cable. If the device works
normally, the original cable (or one
of its connectors) is faulty.
7. If possible, connect the IP device
to a different Power Unit. If the
device works normally, the original
Power Unit is probably faulty.
(Page 2 of 4)

198

Troubleshooting

Table 19: In-Line Power Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

IP device works,
but there is no data
link.

Wiring problem
OR
Faulty IP device
OR
Faulty Power Unit.
OR
Missing/faulty local
power adapter.

1. Verify that the port’s Power Active
LED is continuously ON.
2. Verify that the connections for the
port pair both correspond to the
same IP device, and that the port
connections are not reversed.
3. The IP device may require a local
power adapter to operate. If an
adapter is already in use, replace
it with a known working adapter. If
this works, replace the faulty
adapter.
4. Verify you are using a standard
UTP Category 5, 6 or 6e cable
(with 8 wires–4 pairs).
5. Verify that the cable length
between the Power Unit and the IP
device does not exceed
100 metres.
6. Verify that you are not using any
crossover cables.
7. Verify that the Power Unit is
connected to a switch/hub with a
good RJ-45 patch cord
connection.
8. Connect the IP device directly to
the Power Unit using a short
cable. If the device works
normally, the original cable (or one
of its connectors) is faulty.
9. Try to connect a known working IP
device to the same port (test
device). If the test device works
and the link is established, there is
probably a faulty data link in the
original IP device.
10.Connect the IP device to a
different port pair. If the device
works, one of the original ports is
probably faulty, or there is a bad
RJ-45 connection.
(Page 3 of 4)

199

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 19: In-Line Power Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

IP device not
operating, with
Power Inactive
LED ON.

Discharged
capacitor in IP
device
OR
wiring problem
OR
missing/Faulty
local power
adapter
OR
faulty port.

1. Wait 5 to 10 seconds. If the Power
Active LED turns ON, there was a
discharged capacitor in the IP
device.
2. Verify that you are not using any
crossover cables.
3. The IP device may require a local
power adapter to operate. If an
adapter is already in use, replace
it with a known working adapter. If
this works, replace the faulty
adapter.
4. Connect the IP device directly to
the Power Unit using a short
cable. If the device works
normally, the original cable (or one
of its connectors) is faulty.
5. Connect the IP device to a
different port pair. If the device
works, one of the original ports is
probably faulty, or there is a bad
RJ-45 connection.
6. Unplug the IP device, and verify
that the Power Inactive LED turns
OFF. If it does not, the port is
probably faulty, or the RJ-45
socket is shorted.

IP device powered
correctly, but
Power Active LED
is OFF.
IP device does not
work, but Green
Port Status LED
ON.

Re-connect the IP device to a
different port pair. If the new port pair
Active Power LED turns ON, there is
a fault in the original output port
(probably a faulty LED).
Wrong connection
OR
faulty IP device.

1. Verify that the IP device is actually
connected to that port.
2. Replace the device by a known
working IP device (test device). If
the test device powers up, the
original IP device is probably
faulty.
(Page 4 of 4)

200

Troubleshooting

Power Over Ethernet
The CXi controller’s Layer 2 switch can provide 120 Watts of power to
802.3af-compliant devices according to the following general rules:
•

Up to 16 IP Phones are supported

•

Up to four PKMs (PKM12 or PKM48) are supported on Dual Mode IP
phones. Only one PKM can be attached to a set. Multiple PKMs on a
set require an AC adapter.

•

Conference units require an AC adapter.

•

Port 1 has the highest priority, port 16 the lowest. If the power budget
is exceeded, power will be turned off to the ports, starting with port 16
and ending with port 1, until less than 120 Watts is being consumed.
Tip: Refer to Table 134 on page 377 for a list of all Mitel IP Phones and their
power consumption.

Digital Service Units (DSU)
Tip: The CX and CXi controllers do not support Digital Service Units.

BRI Card Alarms and Call Logs
To query alarms or call logs:
1. Log into the BRI maintenance terminal.
2. Enter the Configuration menu item number.
3. Enter the Debug menu item number.
4. Enter the Alarms and Call Log menu item number.
5. Do one of the following:
-

To query the alarms, enter the Query Alarms menu item number.

To query the call logs, enter the Query Call Logs menu item
number.

To clear and reset the call log:
1. Log into the BRI maintenance terminal.
2. Enter the Configuration menu item number.
3. Enter the Debug menu item number.

201

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

4. Enter the Alarms and Call Log menu item number.
5. Enter the Restart Call Log menu item number. The following
message appears: ARE YOU SURE? (Y or N)
6. Enter Y.
To query the status of the BRI channels:
1. Log into the BRI maintenance terminal.
2. Enter the Configuration menu item number.
3. Enter the Debug menu item number.
4. Enter the Alarms and Call Log menu item number.
5. To query the BRI status, enter 5.
To query BRI or PRI port statistics or the management link status:
1. Log into the BRI maintenance terminal.
2. Enter the Configuration menu item number.
3. Enter the Debug menu item number.
4. Enter the Alarms and Call Log menu item number.
5. Do one of the following:

202

To query the BRI port statistics, enter 7, and then enter .

To query the PRI port statistics, enter 8.

To query the management link status, enter 9.

Troubleshooting

Troubleshoot Digital Trunks
Digital Trunking
The following table lists key maintenance commands that you can use to
collect Digital Trunk INFOrmation.
Table 20: Digital Trunk Troubleshooting
Symptoms

DTINFO Command
Qualifiers

Description

Any problem

show link config all
show framer config all
show link info
show vdsu table

Displays link, framer, and
vdsu configuration
information.

Link alarms - Part 1 show framer stats all
(trunks unavailable, show framer regs all
network synch
issues)

Displays framer statistics and
its register settings.
Collect output from the
"dtstats read", "net state" and
"show faults digital links".

Link alarms - Part 2
(Trunks not in idle
when there are no
calls up)

show vdsu alarms
show vdsu channel

Displays the state of vdsu
alarms and channels. Use
this command with "dtstats
read" and "state" commands.

Outgoing or
incoming calls
rejected

trace vdsu namnum

Displays the calling/called
number and name of the call.
It also displays the reason an
ISDN call was disconnected.
Use this command to verify
that ARS is setup correctly.

Call problems (calls
dropped/ rejected,
set displays not
correct, and so
forth)

trace tsp l2l3
OR
trace tsp cc
OR
trace vdsu cp
trace vdsu vb

Displays L2 or L3 or call
control trace.
If the problem is not protocol
related, turn on the "cp/vb"
tracing.

Call problems are
generating
message output
that you need to
capture

enable logtofile
disable logtofile

Saves logging traces to a file
named "DigTrkTrace.rtf" in
the "/db" directory.

203

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Troubleshoot the Network
IP Trunking
Tip: To rule out DHCP problems, and isolate network-related issues, we
recommend that you program the IP Phone with a static IP Address (see
“Setting Static IP Address on IP Display Set” on page 54).

Table 21: IP Trunk Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

IP trunk does not
recover after router
crash

ICMP redirect is
enabled.

1. On the RTC shell, use routeShow
to identify the addition RouteHost
entries, then use routeDelete to
remove the entry.
2. For a permanent solution:
•

Make sure that the route has a
“permanent” static route to the
remote IP trunk network.

•

Turn IP redirect off.

•

Turn on the routing protocol
between local router and ISP
router.

LAN
Table 22: LAN Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

Device fails to
transmit data.

Packet collision.

Data packet is
altered between
transmit and
receive.

CRC/FCS and
alignment errors

Refer to “Troubleshooting Using L2
Statistics” in the System
Administration Tool OnLine Help.

Receiving device
counts an error.

Frame length
errors.

204

Troubleshooting

If you still can’t find the problem, call Mitel Technical Support (see “Before
You Contact Technical Support” on page 179). Make sure you have the
following information on hand before calling:
network diagram
routeShow result
PING test result between controller and IP Phone
rmess verify result
State xnet all result
Tip: There are several new L2 maintenance commands that are useful for
collecting details: l2_poe_satus; l2_stat_maclist; l2_stat_port;
l2_stat_spanning_tree; l2_stat_sw.

205

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

E2T
Table 23: LX E2T Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

E2T fails to
initialize

Changing from a hard
coded E2T IP address to
requesting one from the
DHCP server.
(If any IP addresses
remain on the E2T (at
“inet on ethernet”, “host
inet”, or “gateway inet”),
the E2T will use them
and will obtain the rest of
its parameters from the
DHCP server.)

This change is made by changing
the flags (f) parameter in the
bootline of the E2T from 0x0
(hardcode) to 0x40 (DHCP).
When changing the flag from 0x0
to 0x40 on the E2T, make sure
that you blank out ALL IP
addresses in the bootline of E2T.

Table 24: MXe E2T Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

E2T fails to
initialize

1. Secure telnet to port 2007 (this is the
E2T serial port on the MXe)
2. Secure telnet to port 2002 (VxWorks
shell on the RTC)
3. At the VxWorks shell on the
RTC type: "ToggleCpu 1" to
reset the E2T card
4. Watch the port 2007 (E2T)
telnet session.
5. Hit 3 spaces to interrupt the
boot process.
6. Verify the bootline parameters
as described in Table 23, “LX
E2T Troubleshooting,” on
page 206.

206

Troubleshooting

CXi-specific Issues
Table 25: CXi Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

Unable to
connect to the
controller

Database being used is
from a system that had
dual-VLANs enabled,
so the management PC,
untagged on VLAN 1,
cannot reach the
controller on the Voice
VLAN.

Run vlan_off command from the
RTC console (through the RS-232
serial port) to reset the controller
and disable the VLANs.
Run vlan_on to enable the
VLANs.
The commands will cause the
controller to reboot, so wait a
couple minutes before trying to
connect with your PC, attached to
CX port 17.

IP Phones on
third-party
Layer 2 switch
cannot connect
with the CXi

System has VLAN
enabled but the “tagging”
is being removed prior to
connecting with Port 17.

The CXi must receive VLAN tags
(if VLAN enabled) to allow an IP
phone to connect with the CXi.
The third-party L2 switch needs to
pass the Q and P tags to Port 17.

Unable to
connect to the
DSL modem

Bad connection,
incorrect password,
incorrect username, or
wrong protocol.

Review Maintenance Logs for:
Wan_port: state=down,
proto=pppoe, cause=wan=start.
Review ISP information sheet and
make sure that the username, pw
and protocol are correct.
Disable and Enable the WAN
Access in Internet Gateway/Wan
Settings.

CXi ports 1 - 16
not functioning.

Layer2 port IP Address is
not programmed.

Ensure IP Network Configuration
is properly programmed.
(Page 1 of 3)

207

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 25: CXi Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

Connection
failures: ISP,
IP trunks,
IP phones.

Network configuration
programming problem.

Verify programming in the
following forms:

1. System IP Configuration
The address cannot
conflict with the L2 Switch
IP Address, and it must be
on a different subnet than
the WAN Ethernet IP
Address.
2. Layer 2 Switch form
To program global settings
and configure the Ethernet
ports for the Layer 2
switch.
3. IP Routing form
Lists routes to destination
networks on the LAN.
4. WAN Settings form
To enable the WAN
interface and provide
internet connectivity
settings for Static IP,
DHCP, or PPPoE.
5. Remote Access (PPTP)
6. Firewall Control
7. Port Forward Table

No routing IP
traffic correctly

Default Gateway should
be third-party router (if
one is installed),
otherwise L2 IP Address
should equal Gateway.

IP Routing form indicates a
network list. All subnets
referenced on this network list will
follow the default gateway,
otherwise the route will be
directed to the WAN port (ensure
that it is enabled).
(Page 2 of 3)

208

Troubleshooting

Table 25: CXi Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

No power on
CXi ports 1 - 16

Device is pulling too
much power; power is
disabled in
programming; 120 Watt
budget has been
exceeded.

Refer to Engineering Guidelines,
Mitel IP Phone Power. When
power budget is exceeded ports
will shut down from port 16 to
port 1.
Run the L2 Poestatus
maintenance command. Check
Layer 2 Switch programming.
Check device for fault.

Connection
failures: IP
trunks

IP trunks cannot work
through the WAN port.

Install a third-party router (default
gateway) and disable the WAN
port OR,
install a third-party router (default
gateway), change Network list to
include routes that will follow
default gateway and enable WAN
port.
Note: IP trunk will follow default
gateway (3rd party router).
(Page 3 of 3)

PC Network Connectivity
Table 26: E2T Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

Loss of PC
network
connectivity via
IP phone

IP phone lost power.
IP phone reset via the
debug menu.
IP phone lost
connectivity ~ 10
minutes; then will
execute hard reset and
DHCP discovery.

Connection will be automatically
restored in 1 - 2 seconds.

209

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

IP Phone Registration
1. Record the error message on the IP Phone display, then go through
Table 27 below.
Tip: To rule out DHCP problems, and isolate network-related issues, we
recommend that you program the IP Phone with a static IP Address (see
“Setting Static IP Address on IP Display Set” on page 54).
Note: IP sets require a firmware upgrade to support the new DHCP options
introduced in Release 7.0; otherwise, the sets will fail to boot. Such failures
can occur, for example, in a resilient cluster of mixed software releases
or when sets with old firmware are added to a controller after it was
upgraded to Release 7.0. For the sets to boot, DHCP options 128-133
must be present in the DHCP server. After the sets have booted, options
128-133 may be removed to avoid future conflicts with standardized or
other vendors’ use of these options.

2. If you still can’t fix the problem, call Mitel Technical Support.
Tip: Use the debug option on display IP phones to view Version, Network,
Telephony/DSP, Connection Browser Config, and memory Stats details (see
page 170).

Make sure you have the following information on hand before calling:
Is the problem with the local or remote subnet?
DHCP server(s) settings
Layer 2 switch configuration and settings
Router configuration and settings
Network Diagram
IP addressing scheme
VLAN configuration and settings

210

Troubleshooting

Table 27: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting
Error Message
on Display

Probable
Cause

Corrective Action

Invalid VLAN ID

DHCP Option 43
or 125 on
Release 7.0 or
later systems or
132 and/or 133
for earlier
releases not set
correctly.

1. Identify the location of DHCP server and
which DHCP server is assigned the IP
address for the corresponding subnet (see
page 317 for examples).
2. For an external Microsoft DHCP server (NT
server, etc.), make sure that the option type
is set to LONG.
Note: For Windows 2000, refer to
page 308.
3. For a Cisco® Router DHCP server, make
sure that the option type is set to hex, and
padded with 0s (for example, 0x00000002
for VLAN 2).
4. For the controller internal DHCP server, set
the option type to numeric.

Duplicated IP
address

DHCP discovery
OR
DHCP OFFER X
REJ

Existing data
device owns the
IP address.

1. Check the IP address on the phone display.
2. Disconnect the IP Phone.
3. From a PC on the same subnet, ping the
suspected IP Phone. If there is a response,
identify the data device, and resolve the
conflict.

Corrupted DHCP
server

1. On the suspected DHCP server, disable
then recreate the scope.
2. If this is a Microsoft DHCP server, reboot
the server.

DHCP option 43
or 125 on
Release 7.0 or
later systems or
option 130
(MITEL IP
PHONE) for
earlier Releases
is not
programmed.

Identify the location of DHCP server and set to
Option 130 as String type with value of
“MITEL IP PHONE”.

DHCP server
does not have
enough IP
addresses.

Create a larger scope with more IP addresses
on the DHCP server.

(Page 1 of 6)

211

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 27: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message
on Display

Probable
Cause

Corrective Action

(Cont’d)

DHCP server
cannot assign IP
addresses for the
corresponding
subnet, even
though there are
enough IP
addresses.

1. For a Microsoft DHCP server, reboot the
server.
2. For the controller internal DHCP server,
disable DHCP and rebuild the scope.

L2 switch port is
shut down or not
configured
properly.

1. Check the L2 switch, and ensure that the
port is not shut down.
2. Ensure that this port can access the DHCP
server subnet (that is, access the port for
the same VLAN, etc.).

DHCP Option 43
or 125 on
Release 7.0 or
later systems or
Option 30
(MITEL IP
PHONE) for
earlier Releases
is not programmed on the
second scope of
the DHCP server
(or on the
second DHCP
server)
OR
VLAN ID is not
assigned
properly

1. Identify if there is one DHCP server for both
VLANs, or if there is one DHCP server per
VLAN (see “Network Configuration
Examples” on page 317).
2. For one DHCP server for both VLANs,
ensure that option 43 or 125 is properly
configured (Release 7.0 and later) or that
option 130 is programmed as String type
with value of “MITEL IP PHONE “ (prior to
Release 7.0), in the scope of Voice LAN.
3. For one DHCP server per VLAN, ensure
that option 43 or 125 (Release 7.0 and later)
or 130 (prior to Release 7.0) is defined.
4. Verify that the proper VLAN ID is assigned
in option 43 or 125 (Release 7.0 and later),
or 132 (prior to Release 7.0).

One DHCP
server for two
VLANs network
configuration: IP
helper address
on the router
interface is not
set up correctly.

1. On the router interface (on which DHCP is
not residing), enter the IP helper address
and specify the IP address of the DHCP
server on the other side of the subnet (that
is, always set up IP helper address on the
DHCP server client side).
2. Ensure the second scope is created for the
corresponding VLAN (see “Network
Configuration Examples” on page 317 for
more information).

DHCP Discovery
OR
DHCP OFFER X
REJ
(VLAN) (after
releasing the
first IP from the
native DHCP
server)

(Page 2 of 6)

212

Troubleshooting

Table 27: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message
on Display

Probable
Cause

Corrective Action

(Cont’d)

The L2 switch
port for the
phone interface
is shut down or
not configured
properly

1. Check the L2 switch and ensure that the
port is not shut down.
2. For a Cisco L2 switch, ensure that this is
a trunk port with Dot1q encapsulation,
and that this trunk port allows both native
and Voice LAN to pass through.
3. For an HP L2 switch, ensure that Native
Lan is untagged, and that Voice LAN is
tagged (see “Network Configuration
Examples” on page 317).
4. Verify whether there are two physical
interfaces to the router (one per VLAN),
or a router on a stick configuration (one
physical with virtual sub-interfaces).
5. Ensure that the port(s) on both sides (L2
switch and router) are not shut down
(“Network Configuration Examples” on
page 317).
6. If there is a physical interface on the
router for each VLAN, make sure that the
L2 switch is set to correctly access port
for the corresponding VLAN/ subnet (see
“Network Configuration Examples” on
page 317).
7. If there is one physical interface on the
router for multiple VLANs, ensure that
this is a trunk port on the L2 switch, and
ensure that this trunk port allows both
native and voice LAN to pass through.
8. On the router subinterface, ensure that
the proper VLAN is associated to the
remote subinterface (see “Network
Configuration Examples” on page 317).
(Page 3 of 6)

213

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 27: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message
on Display

Probable
Cause

Corrective Action

TFTP load
failure

DHCP option
43 or 125 on
Release 7.0 or
later systems or
option 128 for
earlier
Releases is not
set up to point
to the right
TFTP server
(Controller).

Check the DHCP server, and confirm that
option 43, 125, or 128 is pointing to the
right TFTP server (usually, the controller
RTC IP address).

No network
connectivity
between the
controller and
the phone.

1. Confirm that the controller is connected
to the network.
2. For a Cisco L2 switch: verify that the L2
switch is access port (Voice LAN).
3. For an HP L2 switch: verify that the L2
switch is untagged (Voice LAN).
4. If the router is involved, make sure that
the router's MTU is set to 600 or more.

Firmware on
controller is
missing or
corrupted.

1. Verify that the firmware
(ipp510bootenc.bin, etc.) is in the
sysro/tftp directory (particularly if the
user has manually copied the firmware).
2. Confirm if TFTP on the controller is
corrupted (this can be verified by
connecting the IP Phone directly on the
controller, or by observing the behavior of
other IP Phones).
Tips: If you have Option 132/133
programmed on the controller’s internal
DHCP server, disable them before trying
Step 2.
(Page 4 of 6)

214

Troubleshooting

Table 27: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message
on Display

Probable
Cause

Corrective Action

Waiting for link

DHCP option
43 or 125 on
Release 7.0 or
later systems or
option 129 for
earlier
Releases is not
programmed
correctly.

Check Option 43, 125, or 129 on DHCP to
confirm that the IP address is programmed
correctly (RTC IP Address of controller).

The Layer 2
switch port may
be running
spanning tree.

Turn port fast on or disable Spanning tree
(whichever is possible).

The application
server is
broadcasting or
multicasting on
IP Phone port
or on PC
behind the IP
Phone.

Turn off multicasting.

The PC behind
the IP Phone is
changing speed
100/10.

Depending on the NIC, you may need to
hardcode to 100 MBps instead of auto
negotiation.

IP phone fails to
receive
Keepalive
message in
30 seconds.

Verify if the network or the controller is
down.

There is
electrical
interference.

Verify the power source, and change the
location of the power source.

Waiting for link
OR
Lost link to
Server

(Page 5 of 6)

215

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 27: IP Phone Registration Troubleshooting (continued)
Error Message
on Display

Probable
Cause

Corrective Action

TFTP Fail
(Remote IP
phone
(statically
programmed IP
address)
cannot access
MN3300 across
WAN).

The Layer 2
switch port for
the phone
interface is shut
down or not
configured
properly.

1. Check the Layer 2 switch and ensure that
the port is not shut down (see “Network
Configuration Examples” on page 317 for
more information).
2. For a Cisco Layer 2 switch: verify that this
is a trunk port with Dot1q encapsulation,
and ensure this trunk port allows both
native and voice LAN to pass through.
3. For an HP Layer 2 switch: verify that
Native Lan is untagged and Voice Lan is
tagged.

The Layer 2
switch port for
router interface
is shut down or
not configured
properly.

1. Verify which configuration you have (see
“Network Configuration Examples” on
page 317 for more information).
2. Ensure the port(s) on both sides (Layer 2
switch and router) are not shut down.
3. If there is physical interface on the router
for each VLAN, make sure that the Layer
2 switch is set to access the port for the
corresponding VLAN/subnet correctly;
OR
If this is a router on a switch, verify that
this is a trunk port on L2 switch, and
ensure this trunk port allows both native
and voice LAN to pass through.
4. On the router's subinterface, verify that
the proper VLAN is associated to the
subinterface (see “Network Configuration
Examples” on page 317).

Typo in IP
address, VLAN
ID, gateway.

1. Delete and reprogram the static IP
address. If there is no VLAN or priority,
leave them as blank.
2. Verify that the gateway IP address is
correct.
(Page 6 of 6)

216

Troubleshooting

Troubleshoot Phones and Peripherals
Phone Connection
If you can’t fix the problem using Table 28, call Mitel Technical Support
(see “Before You Contact Technical Support” on page 179).
Tip: Use the debug option on display IP phones to view
Version, Network, Telephony/DSP, Connection Browser Config, memory
Stats details (see page 170).

Table 28: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Can't make calls
externally (display phone
may show call barred).

Probable
Causes
COR restricted.

Corrective Action
1. Identify the numbers dialed by
the user, then check the route
used in ARS.
2. Remove the COR number from
COR group table in COR
assignment used in the route,
OR
Change the COR group number
in the route assignment form.

COS restricted
for PRI or QSIG
trunk.

Enable Public network access
via DPNSS in the set's COS.

Cannot make call over
analog loop trunk
(intermittent problem).

PBX is sending
the dialing digits
too fast for
Telco's receiver
on the LOOP
trunk.

Insert a tone plan in the digit
modification assignment for the
route used by analog loop trunk
(tone plan is used to insert one or
two seconds delay without any
tone detection).

If NONE of the sets are
responding.

Problem with
controller.

Perform a system check on the
controller.

Sets cannot receive DID
calls.

Non-DID is
enabled in
Station Service
Assignment
form.

Disable non-DID in the set's COS.

(Page 1 of 5)

217

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 28: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms
No dial tone on set.

Probable
Causes

Corrective Action

Set is not
programmed.

In System Administration Tool,
program the extension
accordingly.

Wrong wiring

Check the wiring between the
phone jack and the ASU,
peripheral cabinet, MDF, etc.

Faulty handset
wire.

1. Replace the handset cord.
2. Replace the handset.
3. Replace the set.

Circuit is
manbusy.

1. Enter the Maintenance
command STATE .
2. Enter the Maintenance
command RTS .

Sets take 10-12 seconds
to receive incoming
calls.

Circuit is locked
out.

Verify the wiring between the
phone and the patch panel.

ANI/DNIS
number delivery
trunk option is
enabled in T1
trunk's COS.

Disable the ANI/DNIS number
delivery in the trunk's COS.
Tip: You can assign an unused
COS to verify if this is the problem.

Dialing digit
conflict.

Check the following forms for any
potential dialing conflict:
- Station Service Assignment
- Miscellaneous Assignment
- Feature Access Code
- Agent ID Assignment
- System Option Assignment
(Page 2 of 5)

218

Troubleshooting

Table 28: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms
IP to IP calls OK, but not
IP to TDM calls (rings
once, then call drops).

Probable
Causes

Corrective Action

E2T not loaded.

1. Verify that the E2T IP address is
programmed correctly.
2. Verify that the E2T IP address is
not used elsewhere on the
network.
3. If the E2T IP address was
hardcoded with a debug table,
verify its settings (see Table 77
on page 301).

All resilient IP Phones
are not functioning (no
dial tone) after the
primary ICP goes out of
service.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

Resilient phones do not
fail over to their
secondary ICP when
their primary fails.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

Some resilient phones
are not functioning (no
dial tone) after the
primary ICP goes out of
service.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

One resilient phone is
not functioning (no dial
tone) after its primary
ICP goes out of service.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

While on a call at a
resilient phone, the
primary ICP goes out of
service and the call is
immediately dropped (no
call survival). After you
hang up the IP phone
and go off-hook again,
the IP phone is
functioning on its
secondary ICP.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

(Page 3 of 5)

219

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 28: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable
Causes

Corrective Action

While on a call at a
resilient phone, the
primary ICP goes out of
service, and the call is
immediately dropped (no
call survival). After you
hang up the IP phone
and go off-hook again,
the IP phone remains out
of service.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

After an IP phone fails
over to its secondary
ICP, you can make calls
from it, but other TDM
phones, trunks, or IP
devices in the cluster
cannot call it.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

After the primary ICP is
returned to service, the
IP phones do not fail
back to the primary. If an
IP phone is on its
secondary ICP, you hear
beeps every 20 seconds,
and the phone displays
"Fail ".

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

Message waiting
indicator on a resilient
phone continues flashing
for a Callback message
that has already been
returned.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

Hot desk users cannot
log in after their IP
phones fail over to the
secondary ICP.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.

Hot Desk user does not
receive voice mail.

Refer to the 3300 ICP Resiliency document on Mitel
OnLine for corrective action.
(Page 4 of 5)

220

Troubleshooting

Table 28: Phone Connection Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable
Causes

Corrective Action

A 5215 Dual Mode, 5220
Dual Mode, or 5235 IP
Phone fails to boot up.
Set display shows “Port
Access Control – Press
# to Continue”.

802.1X port
authentication
is enabled in
network. IP
phone is not
configured with
a username and
password.

Configure username and
password on IP phone. See
“Configuring an Authentication
Username and Password” on
page 176.
OR
Disable 802.1X support in the
Layer 2 switch. See “Enabling or
Disabling 802.1X Authentication”
on page 178.

A 5215 Dual Mode, 5220
Dual Mode, or 5235 IP
Phone fails to boot up.
Set display shows “Port
Access Failure –
Rebooting”.

802.1X port
authentication
is enabled in
network. IP
phone is not
configured with
correct
username and
password.

Check the username and
password of the IP phone in
database of the RADIUS server.
Configure the correct username
and password in the IP phone.
See “Configuring an
Authentication Username and
Password” on page 176
OR
Erase the username and
password that is stored in the
phone. See “Erasing an
Authentication Username and
Password” on page 178. Reboot
the phone in order to re-enter the
username and password.

802.1X port
authentication
is enabled in
network. PC is
connected to
network through
IP Phone. PC is
not configured
with correct
username and
password.

Check the username and
password of the PC in database of
the RADIUS server. Configure the
correct username and password
on the PC.
OR
Disable 802.1X support in the PC
if enabled.
OR
Ensure RADIUS EAP is
“EAP-MD5”.
(Page 5 of 5)

221

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Phone Audio Quality
If you can’t fix the problem using Table 29, call Mitel Technical Support
(see “Before You Contact Technical Support” on page 179).
Make sure you have the following information on hand before calling:
Setup scenario
Is there a common denominator (router, only one side of subnet, etc.)
Other call scenarios (IP to IP, IP to TDM, etc.)
Layer 2 switch configuration and settings
Router configuration and settings
Network diagram
IP addressing scheme
VLAN configuration and settings
Layer 2 switch port statistics for FCS, collision and duplex mismatch.
Tip: Use the debug option on display IP phones to view Version, Network,
Telephony/DSP, Connection Browser Config, memory Stats details (see
page 170).

Table 29: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable
cause

Corrective Action

One-way audio
between
Remote IP to
TDM (VM)

No gateway IP
address
programmed on
E2T.

1. If E2T gets IP address from DHCP
server, make sure that Option 03
(Router) is assigned to the scope with
the proper IP address for the subnet.
2. If E2T is hardcoded with a static IP
address, make sure that the gateway IP
address is programmed properly in
VxWorks.

Distorted audio
only on NSU

Voice encoding
is not inverted.

For T1, enable invert for Voice encoding
in link descriptor. For CEPT or API, enable
ADI invert for voice encoding. (This does
not apply to Embedded PRI.)
(Page 1 of 3)

222

Troubleshooting

Table 29: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms

Probable
cause

Broken Audio,
intermittent

Handsfree on
the far end.

Ensure that neither device is using
handsfree. Some handsfree phones only
operate at half duplex.

Packet loss,
jitter via
network.

1. Identify the speech path between the
two end points, including router, switch
WAN in the audio stream.

Corrective Action

2. The network administrator needs to
apply QOS/TOS to minimize jitter over
slow speed interface (T1, Frame Relay,
etc.), and give voice traffic priority over
data.
Limited
bandwidth and
too many calls
across router, or
combination
data and voice.

1. Limit the number of calls to remote
subnets.

Physical port
error (CRC,
faulty cable,
duplex
mismatch,
HUB).

1. Identify the speech path between the
two end points, including router, switch
WAN in the audio stream.

2. The network administrator needs to
apply QOS/TOS to give voice traffic
priority over data.

2. Verify that there is no duplex mismatch
in each port settings, or faulty cable, or
faulty port.
3. Make sure that the IP Phone is not
plugged into a HUB.

Compression
zone enabled.

Compression will save bandwidth, but may
cause noticeable clipping. If not sure,
disable compression to see if it makes a
difference.

Router's CPU is
exhausted or
congested.

Router may be running excessive filtering.
The network administrator may need to
monitor the performance of the router.
(Page 2 of 3)

223

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 29: Audio Quality Problems Troubleshooting (continued)
Symptoms
Echo

Probable
cause

Corrective Action

Handsfree
mode is used.

Check if far end is using handsfree. Switch
to handset mode to see if this corrects it,
or lower the volume in handsfree mode.

Echo Canceller
is beyond
specifications.

1. Identify the path between the two end
points, and verify if Trunk is always
involved.
2. Check with Telco to see if the trunk is
within specs. On a typical T1, the input
signal should be -15 dB. If it is too
high(-5 dB for example), echo may
result.
If this is the case, keep an echo log to
isolate the problem.

Echo between
IP Phones

Network jitter
issue.

If the problem only occurs between IP
devices, check network jitter issue above.

Layer 2 switch
setting problem.

1. Check the L2 switch for duplex
mismatch and spanning tree.
2. Turn off spanning tree between the L2
switch and the IP Phone if possible (use
the PortFast setting).

Far end phone
is on handsfree

Check if far end is using handsfree. Switch
to handset mode to see if this corrects it,
or lower the volume in handsfree mode.

In conference
call, echo is
noticed from
external trunk

1. Identify the path between the two end
points, and verify if Trunk is always
involved.

There is an
audio path
between the
users as well as
between the
phones.

Provide better acoustic shielding between
users, e.g. close the door, provide
sound-deadening partitions.

2. Check with Telco to see if the trunk is
within specs. On a typical T1, the input
signal should be -15 dB. If it is too
high(-5 dB for example), echo may
result. Keep a log to isolate the problem.

(Page 3 of 3)

224

Troubleshooting

IP Phone Boot Sequence
After you connect an IP Phone to the network, it goes through the following
boot sequence (this applies to Release 5.0 and later):
Tip: MAC Addresses, and Main and Boot versions in the following table are
examples for illustration purposes. The numbers displayed at the install site
may be different. The x’s are IP Address, VLAN, and Priority place holders.

Table 30: IP Phone Boot Sequence
Boot Sequence

Phone Display

1. Waiting for an Ethernet link to be
established.

Waiting for LAN link
to come up

2. If an Ethernet link is not established,
continue with the bootup process.

Bad LAN link
Check Ethernet cable

3. The first stage for bootup.
Note: Refer to Table 31 on page 227 for
802.1x Port Access Control messages.

08-00-0F-AA-BB-CC
Booting: 04.02.01.06

4. IP Phone contacts DHCP server to obtain IP
address and VLAN information and a list of
the controller addresses in the network.
Note: Go to Table 32 if DHCP or TFTP fails.

Waiting for DHCP
Booting: 04.02.01.06
--------------------DHCP: Discovery
Booting: 04.02.01.06

5. The internal DHCP server provides one of
these options:

Using option 125
Using option 43
Using option 128+
--------------------Using option 125:n
Using option 43:n

An external DHCP server provides one of
these options:
(where n is the number of the sub-option if
encapsulation is used for the option.)
6. The DHCP server on the default VLAN
responds with an Offer. If Option 43 or 125
(or option 130 prior to Release 7.0) is not
properly set on the server, the set awaits
further Offers (n is offer number).

DHCP: Offer n Rej
Booting: 04.02.01.06
--------------DHCP: Offer n Acc
Booting: 04.02.01.06

7. The set replies with a Request and the
server replies with an Acknowledgement.

DHCP: Ack
Booting: 04.02.01.06

8. If the data in the Ack does not contain a
VLAN ID and a packet Priority value, the set
retains DHCP data, jumps to Step 11.
(Page 1 of 3)

225

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 30: IP Phone Boot Sequence (continued)
Boot Sequence
9. If the data included in the Ack does include a
VLAN ID and packet Priority value, the set
discards DHCP data and sends an untagged
Release.

Phone Display
DHCP: Releasing
Booting: 04.02.01.06
--------------------Vlan x Priority x
Booting: 04.02.01.06

10.The set goes through the Discovery/Offer/
Request/Ack sequence again.The packets
sent are tagged to include VLAN and Priority
values supplied by the first DHCP server.
11.The TFTP server downloads the boot image
and displays the set IP address. If there is no
boot image, the set jumps to Step 13.
Refer to Table 33 (page 229) for a
description of possible error messages.

xx.xx.xx.xx
Downloading

12.The boot file is copied to flash if it is a
different version than the one in flash.

Upgrading Flash
DO NOT POWER DOWN

13.If the boot load is the same as in flash, it is
not copied.

xx.xx.xx.xx
Upgrade not required

14.The set downloads a main image. A failure
causes a phone reset, and the process starts
again at step 1.

xx.xx.xx.xx
Download failed
--------------------xx.xx.xx.xx
Downloading
--------------------xx.xx.xx.xx
Starting main

15.The set resets and the main load executes.

MAIN 08.04.01.01
BOOT 04.02.01.06
--------------------Set xx.xx.xx.xx
ICP xx.xx.xx.xx
--------------------Waiting for ACK...
ICP xx.xx.xx.xx
--------------------Waiting for COMMS...
ICP xx.xx.xx.xx

The display changes to waiting for link.
The set requests registration with the ICP
(the first time request requires a PIN
registration).
The set waits for the ICP to take control.

(Page 2 of 3)

226

Troubleshooting

Table 30: IP Phone Boot Sequence (continued)
Boot Sequence

Phone Display

16.After the main boot load is downloaded,
(and only when a phone in a resilient network
has homed to the wrong ICP) the phone
seeks out the IP address of its primary 3300
ICP from the DHCP ICP Redirect list of 3300
ICPs in the network.
It is possible for the phone to be redirected
and you may see this display again.

Set xx.xx.xx.xx
ICP xx.xx.xx.xx

17.Once communication is established, the idle
display appears on the set.

--------------------Set xx.xx.xx.xx
ICP xx.xx.xx.xx

(Page 3 of 3)

Table 31: IP Phone Port Access Control Sequence
Sequence

Phone Display

1. Checking the L2 switch for 802.1x Port
Access Control.

Waiting for 802.1x
authentication

2. With access control, the L2 switch will
ask for user and password (unless the
data is stored in NVRAM).

PORT ACCESS CONTROL
PRESS # TO CONTINUE
------------------------USER (# to end)
__
------------------------PASSWORD (# to end)
__

3. If Port Access Control fails.

Port Access Failure
REBOOTING. . .
------------------------Waiting for 802.1x
authentication

4. If the data exchange succeeds or if the
L2 switch does not support 802.1x Port
Access Control.

Waiting for LLDP

227

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 32: IP Phone Error Handling Displays
Message Description

Phone Display

Note: Check the IP Parameters (TFTP address, netmask, gateway address), to
make sure that they are valid, before calling Mitel.
If TFTP fails, usually due to incorrect TFTP
Server or Gateway IP address, review IP
parameters and correct errors.

RTCS creat err
BOOTING xx.xx.xx.xx
------------------------If add err
BOOTING xx.xx.xx.x
------------------------RTCS Bind err
BOOTING xx.xx.xx.x

The TFTP server sent an “I am busy” error
so the phone will delay and retry.

xx.xx.xx.xx
Waiting for TFTP

If the phone received a bad packet from the
TFTP server, audit the TFTP server
configuration and the network path.

xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTP Err:

This error indicates that you must review
the IP parameters on the DHCP server or
manually entered for the phone.

xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTPerr: Packet send

Internal TFTP errors - contact Mitel
Technical Support.

xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTPerr: Sock create
-----------------------xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTPerr: Sock bind
-----------------------xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTPerr: Packet alloc

228

Troubleshooting

Table 33: Download and Software Error Displays
Message Description

Phone Display

Note: Check the IP Parameters (TFTP address, netmask, gateway address), to
make sure that they are valid, before calling Mitel.
These errors indicate that the Flash was
not upgraded. The phone will pause for 3
seconds and continue.

L2 download err
------------------------Boot download err
------------------------L2&Boot download err

The ICP instructs the phone to get a new
main executable. Two-line display set:

TFTP MAIN FROM
xx.xx.xx.xx
------------------------TFTP MAINLOAD

Single-line display set:
If the phone received a bad packet from the
TFTP server, audit the TFTP server
configuration and the network path.

xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTP Err:

This error indicates that you must review
the IP parameters on the DHCP server or
manually entered for the phone.

xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTPerr: Packet send

Internal TFTP errors - contact Mitel
Technical Support.

xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTPerr: Sock create
-----------------------xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTPerr: Sock bind
-----------------------xx.xx.xx.xx
TFTPerr: Packet alloc

TFTP IP address is missing from the
configuration string.

125:TFTP tag missing OR
43:TFTP tag missing

ICP IP address is missing from the
configuration string.

125:ICP tag missing OR
43:ICP tag missing

Encapsulation is incorrect.

Bad 125 subopt endOR
Bad 43 subopt end

229

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Checking the IP Phone Progress Display
A progress bar, consisting of flashing rectangles, is displayed in the upper
right corner of the IP Phone display whenever a phone is trying to re-home
(except on boot-up) to any ICP controller. The set will display a progress
bar if a resilient IP phone re-homes as a result of a Hot Desk login.
Three rectangles indicate the progress of the activity:
•

Left block flashing - waiting for TCP link connection with ICP

•

Left block solid and middle block flashing - waiting for registration
message acknowledgement from ICP

•

Left and middle blocks solid, right block flashing - waiting for MiNET
communications with the ICP that will take over the display at this
point.

When the three rectangles are solid, the activity is complete. If the IP
Phone does not complete the activity after several minutes, check the
progress status by pressing the ∗ key on the dial pad.
Re-home Sequence

Resilient Phone Display

Resilient waiting for link UI
(first block flashing)

Resilient waiting for ACK UI
(second block flashing)

Resilient waiting for COMMS UI
(third block flashing)

Phone connected to secondary ICP
(solid block)

230

Troubleshooting

IP Console
Table 34: IP Console Problems Troubleshooting
Symptoms

Probable cause

Corrective Action

IP console
fails to
register (red
LED is lit on
TKB)

TKB (keyboard) does not have a
reserved IP
address
OR
does not have the
right IP address
OR
is not
communicating with
the right controller.

1. Check DHCP lease to confirm if an
expected IP address is assigned to
TKB.

Console PC does
not have the proper
IP address.

If the IP address of PC is on different
subnet than the TKB, make sure that the
router between these two subnets is
functional.

PC NIC has 802.1Q
enabled on Data
side while L2 switch
is not configured to
accept tagged
frame on Native
VLAN.

Disable 802.1Q on PC NIC
Note: Only use 802.1Q on PC if PC and
TKB are on the same VLAN (e.g 2) which
L2 switch accepts tagged frame on the
specified VLAN.

IP Console has
been registered
and IP console is
reinstalled.

Delete the MAC address from IP console
form and then re-register using the IP
Console Configuration Wizard
(Start/MN5550 IP console/Tools).
Note: Do not reinstall the IP Console
software unless you need to (new
installation, corrupted software, etc.). You
should always use the Configuration
Wizard to register to a different controller.

User does not have
local administration
privileges.

Add local administration privileges for the
user.

IP Console
fails to
launch

2. If not assigned properly, ensure that you
enter the MAC address of TKB properly
in the Multiline Set Assignment form in
System Administration Tool.
3. Recycle the power of the TKB to ensure
that the TKB is reloaded properly.

231

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

232

Chapter 6

Maintenance

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

234

Maintenance

General Maintenance Procedures
Checking the System
1. Click Maintenance Commands in the System Administration Tool.
2. Enter the following commands:
-

SH ST AL: Checks for system alarms. There should be no alarms.

DBMS STAT: Checks the status of the initialized flag. The flag is
on if the system is in sync. If the flag is off, enter DBMS Save.

PROG R DIS: Displays the scheduled system reset. By default, the
system reboots at 2:15 a.m. daily ONLY if there is memory
fragmentation. To force a system reboot at the scheduled time, see
the Programmed Reboot command.

ME S: Checks the status of the communication links. All links
should be open.

PCM TO: Checks for circuit switch link faults; there should be none.

DBMS CH B or F: Brief checks the sanity of the database. Full
checks the sanity and the current status of the database.

3. Click Maintenance Logs - Error to check for error logs or click
Maintenance Logs - All to see all maintenance logs.
4. Check that you have recent backups of the database and hard drive.
Tip: You should make a backup at least once a week. Keep a copy of the
last 3 backups.

Checking Controller Hardware Profile
1. Click System Hardware Modules in the System Administration Tool.
2. Click System Hardware Compute Cards for data on the RTC / E2T.
•

Verify that the IP address of the E2T is the correct one.

•

Slot 1 is always the RTC. For a 100-User controller, this form
displays the details on the RTC only.

•

Verify the value of the Core Speed field:
For a 133 MHz system, the value is 132000000.
For a 300 MHz system, the value is 297000000.
For a 450 MHz system, the value is 450000000.

235

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Maintaining Security
Maintaining VoIP Security
In an IP-enabled network, secure connections between IP endpoints is
required and can be achieved in the following ways:
•

Media Signaling Security ensures all messages transmitted over IP
are encrypted.

•

Voice Streaming Security ensures all voice packets transmitted over
IP are encrypted. For more information about Secure RTP (SRTP),
see Voice Streaming Security in the Online Help.

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Security Certificate
To install the certificate:
1. On the Security Alert window, click View Certificate. The General
window displays an error message meaning that you must trust the
certificate and the Certifying Authority (CA) that issued the certificate.
2. Click Certification Path. Within the certificate chain, it is the Mitel
Root CA that we need to trust.
3. Select Mitel Networks Root CA and click View Certificate.
4. Click Install Certificate.
5. Click Next to navigate through the Certificate Import Wizard windows.
6. Click Finish on the Completing the Certificate Import Wizard window.
7. Click Yes on the Root Certificate Store window.
8. Click OK until you can view the web page.

236

Maintenance

View Logs
This section contains the following:
•

Viewing Maintenance or Software Logs (below)

•

Collecting System Logs, Release 5.2 and Later (page 238)

•

Collecting System Logs, Release 5.1 (page 239)

•

Viewing Logs Remotely, TCP/IP Socket Numbers (page 241)

•

Viewing Login and Logout Audit Logs (page 242)

Viewing Maintenance or Software Logs
To view maintenance or software logs:
1. Log into the System Administration Tool (see page 8).
2. Click the desired log category (Maintenance or Software).
-

To view all the logs in the category, click All Maintenance Logs (or
All Software Logs).

To view error logs, click Error.

To view warning logs, click Warning.

To view information, click Info.

3. To highlight the desired log, move your cursor over it and click once.
The details of the log are displayed in the lower half of the screen.
Table 35: System Reset Causes
Reset Cause Interpretation

Root Cause

0x3

Hard reset

Unknown reset

0x13

Checkstop reset
(see PPC82XX
manual)

Double bus fault as documented in the
Power PC Manual

0x43

Watchdog reset

The watchdog task was unable to write to
the hardware watchdog. A higher priority
task is running or interrupts are disabled.
This is a software problem.

0x83

Power-on reset

The system lost AC power.
(Page 1 of 2)

237

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 35: System Reset Causes (continued)
Reset Cause Interpretation

Root Cause

0x103

Programmed reset

The system software intentionally
restarted the system.

0x203

Push-button reset

The front panel reset button was pressed.
(Page 2 of 2)

Collecting System Logs, Release 5.2 and Later
Product Support may request logs in the event of a system failure (see
Table 36 below). In the event of a system lockup, go to "Collecting System
Lockup Logs - Release 5.1 System" on page 240.
Table 36: System Logs
Log Type

Log Purpose

pstswlog.db

Current system software and maintenance logs

backup pstswlog.db

May contain additional logs if the pstswlogdb is
overwritten

xrtc

Software exception or trap on RTC

xe2t

Software exception or trap on E2T

premortem***.txt

Network statistics on RTC

e2tpremortem.txt

Network statistics on E2T

system.wvr

System lockup events. Generated by entering debug
commands or pre-installed sysinfo.txt during the lockup
(refer to “Collecting System Lockup Logs - Release 5.1
System” on page 240).

output from RTC
console

Additional error logs only output to the RTC console (see
“Collecting System Lockup Logs - Release 5.1 System”
on page 240).

diag.dat

Voice mail event file. Enter errlog_flush() before dumping
the logs.

diag.sav

Voice mail backup event file.

master.dat

Voice mail master index for all mailboxes.

238

Maintenance

Collecting System Logs - Release 5.2 and Later
To download the system diagnostics file to your computer:
1. Select Maintenance and Diagnostics from the Selection drop-down
list.
2. Click System Diagnostics Reporting.
3. Select the Download the files to my computer radio button.
4. Click Send System Diagnostics Report.
5. A warning window opens reminding you that this process may take a
few minutes. Click OK to continue.
6. When the File Download dialog box appears, click Save (not Open).
7. Navigate to the desired folder on your computer or network drive.
8. Rename the file if desired (the file extension remains .tar.gz).
9. Click Save. The file is downloaded to your computer.
Collecting System Lockup Logs - Release 5.2 and Later
Use the Remote on/off button to generate a debug diagnostic file. This
procedure applies to 100, 250-700 user, MX, and LX platforms running
Release 5.1.5.8 or higher only.
To collect system lockup logs:
1. Press and hold the Remote on/off button until all of the alarm
indicators on the panel light (approximately 3 seconds).
2. Complete the procedure above, “Collecting System Logs - Release
5.2 and Later”.

Collecting System Logs, Release 5.1
Collecting System Logs - Release 5.1 System
To collect the logs on a Release 5.1 system:
1. Log into the System Administration Tool (see page 8).
2. Select System Diagnostics and then click Export.
3. Click Export and then click Continue.
4. After the File Download dialog box appears, click Save.

239

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

5. Navigate to a folder or network drive on your PC. Ensure that the file
extension is set to (.tar).
6. Click Save and then click Close.
To collect the logs through PC to controller network connectivity:
1. At the DOS prompt, type cd c:\3300log (example folder name)
Type ftp
Enter the ESM username and password when prompted.
You should see the ftp prompt when you successfully log in.
Type binary
Type hash
Type prompt
2. Type cd /db/database/files
Type get pstswlog.db
3. Type cd /db/database/sw_log_backup
Type mget *.db
4. Type cd /db
Type get xrtc
Type get xe2t
Type get e2tpremortem.txt
Type mget premortem*.txt
5. Type cd /db/spylog
Type get system.wvr
6. Type cd /vmail /c/voxdrv
Type get diag.dat
Type get diag.sav
Type cd /vmail/c/vm
Type get master.dat
7. Type bye.
8. Zip all of the files in the folder that you created (c:\3300log in this
example) and send to Product Support in an e-mail with your problem
ticket number.
Collecting System Lockup Logs - Release 5.1 System
In the event of a system lockup for software prior to Release 5.2, complete
this procedure, then go to “To collect the logs through PC to controller
network connectivity:” on page 240. This procedure is needed to obtain
system.wvr logs and output from RTC console.

240

Maintenance

To prepare to for collecting system lockup logs:
1. Save the “HardResetHook” commands in a text file called sysinfo.txt.
The file is also available at ftp://ftp.mitel.com/outgoing/.
wvSpy 20, “system.wvr”, 3
i
HardResetHookAddTaskName “DRATask
...
...
HardResetHookGroupTaskTrace
2. FTP sysinfo.txt file into the db directory of the 3300 ICP:
At the DOS prompt, type cd c:\sysinfo.txt
Type ftp
Login with the ESM username and password.
Type binary
Type cd /db
Type put sysinfo.txt (OR enter each command at the RTC console)
Type bye
3. Execute the sysinfo.txt on the RTC Console if the 3300 ICP locks up:
Access RTC Console via communication software (i.e. HyperTerm).
Type cd “/db”
Type " prompt, enter
open 2002

For RS-232 maintenance session, set the serial port parameters:
Port: COM1
Baud Rate: 9600
Data Bits: 8 data bits
Stop Bit: 1
Parity: None

2. At the −> prompt, type LSMeasure and press Enter.
3. Enter 7 to exit the LSMeasure tool when the tests are complete.

250

Appendix A

Hardware Reference

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

252

Hardware Reference

System Configurations
There are several basic options for the 3300 ICP:
•

100-user system

•

CXi system with embedded Analog and an Ethernet Layer 2 switch

•

CX system without embedded Analog and without Ethernet ports

•

MX system with embedded Analog

•

MXe system without embedded Analog

•

MXe system with embedded Analog

•

LX, 250 and 700-user system

•

LX controller with 512 MB memory on the RTC for 1400 users

Controller Hardware Details
For detailed information on the 3300 ICP components, see the Hardware
Technical Reference Manual on Mitel OnLine.
Table 39: 3300 Controller Versions
Controller

133 MHz

266 MHz

300 MHz

450 MHz

100-User

n/a

50002211

n/a

3300 CXi (with Ethernet)

n/a

50004640
50005097

n/a

3300 CX (without Ethernet)

n/a

50004641
50005096

n/a

3300 MX with Analog

n/a

50004190

n/a

3300 MX without Analog

n/a

50004343

n/a

3300 MXe

n/a

50005100
50005080

250-User

50001262

n/a

50002970

n/a

3300 LX / 700-User

50001263

n/a

50002971

50004191

n/a

50004942

3300 LX controller 512M

Note: See page 235 to determine your controller speed. Part numbers

are usually on a Mitel sticker at the back of the controller.

253

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Controller Components
Tip: For each module, the leftmost connectors correspond to Port 1 for that
module, and the rightmost to Port 2.

Figure 31: LX, 250/700 Users Controller — Front Panel

Figure 32: MX Controller — Front Panel

254

Hardware Reference

Figure 33: MX Controller — Back Panel

Figure 34: MXe Controller — Front Panel

255

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 35: MXe Controller — Back Panel, Redundant with Analog

Figure 36: MXe Controller — Back Panel, Non-Redundant

Figure 37: MXe Controller — Hard Drive Jumper Settings

256

Hardware Reference

Figure 38: CX Controller — Front Panel

Figure 39: CXi Controller — Front Panel (200ICP place-holder)

257

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 40: CX Controller — Back Panel

Figure 41: CXi Controller — Back Panel

Figure 42: 100-User Controller — Front Panel
Tip: The 100-user controller has 2 Ethernet ports, but only the leftmost port
can be used.

258

Hardware Reference

Controller Cabinet Numbering
•

Cabinet 1 (hardcoded): internal.

•

Cabinets 2 to 5 (hardcoded): CIM ports, from left to right (not CX/CXi).

•

Cabinets 6 to 13 (6 to 9 for the MX and 100-user): module ports (left
to right).

T1/E1 Combo Card
The T1/E1 combo module provides T1 trunking and DSP functionality for
the CX with Release 6.0 software and for all controllers (266/300 MHz
minimum) with Release 7.0 software. The DSP provides resources for
CLASS tone generation, Record a Call conferences, DMTF receivers,
voice compression. The card also provides voice echo cancellation.

Figure 43: T1/E1 Combo Card (prior to Release 7.0)

259

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 44: T1/E1 Combo Card - Resilient, from Release 7.0
Table 40: T1/E1 Combo Card Tip/Ring Assignments
NT/LT Settings
Pin

Signal
NT (Default)

Rx Ring

Tx Ring

Rx Tip

Tx Tip

N/C

Tx Ring

Rx Ring

Tx Tip

Rx Tip

N/C

Note: Network and Line Termination settings are software-controlled. DO NOT
move the jumpers.
The settings apply to both connectors on the resilient card.

260

Hardware Reference

Dual T1/E1 Framer
Figure 45 below shows the dual T1/E1 module, which provides embedded
PRI and embedded T1/D4 functionality to a minimum 300 MHz controller.

Figure 45: Dual T1/E1 Framer

Quad BRI Framer
Figure 46 below shows the Quad BRI module which provides embedded
BRI functionality to a minimum 300 MHz controller.

Figure 46: Quad BRI Framer
RJ-45 Pin Orientation
The RJ-45 connector is used for Ethernet, CIM, Music on Hold, Paging,
RS-232 Maintenance ports, and E1 and T1 interfaces.

Figure 47: RJ-45 pin orientation

261

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Analog Board (MX Controller)
The Analog Boards provide connectivity for analog trunks and telephones
(POTS and On-Premise Station, ONS).
Table 41: Embedded Analog - Circuits/Ports
Circuits/Ports

Analog Main Board

Analog Option Board

LS CLASS Circuits

ONS CLASS Circuits

Power Fail Transfer Circuits

Music On Hold Port

Loudspeaker Port

Table 42: Embedded Analog Cabinet Configuration
Slot

Card Type

Hybrid LS ONS (6 LS + 2 ONS)

Hybrid LS ONS (6 LS + 2 ONS) optional

1 Port E & M Trunk

1 Port Loudspeaker Pager

No card present

ASU Controller

Copper I/F

Table 43: Embedded Analog Music on Hold Connector Pinout
Conductor

Signal

Virtual Circuit PLID

Shield

MOH_COM

4131

Ring

MOH_1

Tip

MOH_2

Note: The Music On Hold port uses a 3.5mm stereo jack for input signal connection. It will
also accept a 3.5mm mono plug. The two input signals are equivalent to the left and right
channel signals from a stereo source and are combined internally into a single channel.

262

Hardware Reference

Table 44: Embedded Analog Pager Connector Pinout
Pin

Signal

Virtual PLID

Common contact

Normally closed contact

Normally open contact

Page1 (Tip)

4141

Page2 (Ring)

4141

No connection

Not used

Note: The Paging port is an 8-pin RJ-45 connector on the rear panel of the MX controller.
The paging port has a tip/ring pair for audio and contact closures for zone control. The
normally closed contact opens when paging and the normally open contact closes when
paging. See “RJ-45 Pin Orientation” on page 261.

Table 45: Embedded Analog Amphenol Connector Pinout
Pin

Color Code

Analog Main Board

Analog Option Board

PLID

26/1

W/BL, BL/W

ONS Ring/Tip 1 PFT #1

4-1-1-1

27/2

W/O, O/W

ONS Ring/Tip 2 PFT #2

4-1-1-2

28/3

W/G, G/W

ONS Ring/Tip 3

4-1-2-1

29/4

W/BR, BR/W

ONS Ring/Tip 4

4-1-2-2

30/5 - 35/10 NOT USED
36/11

BK/BL, BL/BK

LS Ring/Tip 1 PFT #1

4-1-1-3

37/12

BK/O, O/BK

LS Ring/Tip 2 PFT #2

4-1-1-4

38/13

BK/G, G/BK

LS Ring/Tip 3

4-1-1-5

39/14

BK/BR, BR/BK

LS Ring/Tip 4

4-1-1-6

40/15

BK/S, S/BK

LS Ring/Tip 5

4-1-1-7

LS Ring/Tip 6

41/16

Y/BL, BL/Y

42/17

Y/O, O/Y

LS Ring/Tip 7

4-1-1-8
4-1-2-3

43/18

Y/G, G/Y

LS Ring/Tip 8

4-1-2-4

44/19

Y/BR, BR/Y

LS Ring/Tip 9

4-1-2-5

45/20

Y/S, S/Y

LS Ring/Tip 10

4-1-2-6
(Page 1 of 2)

263

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 45: Embedded Analog Amphenol Connector Pinout
(continued)
Pin

Color Code

Analog Main Board

Analog Option Board

PLID

46/21

V/BL, BL/V

LS Ring/Tip 11

4-1-2-7

47/22

V/O, O/V

LS Ring/Tip 12

4-1-2-8

48/23 - 50/25 NOT USED
Note: Power Fail Transfer is provided internally between the LS trunks and the ONS lines.
Preselected DTMF or rotary telephones can be connected directly to CO trunks in the
event of system failure. In the event of a failure, the controller can switch phones on ONS
circuits at PLID 4/1/1/1 and 4/1/1/2 to Central Office trunks at PLID 4/1/1/3 and 4/1/1/4.
(Page 2 of 2)

Analog Board (CX and MXe Controllers)
Analog Boards provide connectivity for analog trunks and telephones.
Table 46: Embedded Analog - Circuits/Ports
Circuits/Ports

Analog Main Board
CX and MXe

Analog Option Board
CX only

LS CLASS Circuits

ONS CLASS Circuits

Power Fail Transfer Circuits

Music On Hold Port

Loudspeaker Port (Page)

Table 47: Analog Main Board/Analog Option Board Port Assignment
Analog Option Board Ports (CX only)
1

1/2
PLIDs

4124

4123

4122

4121

4125

4126

4127

4128

4129

41210

Analog Main Board Ports (CX and MXe)
Page

Relay

1/2

4141

ONS Ports

LS Ports

4114

4113

4112

4111

4115

4116

4117

4118

4119

41110

Note: AMB PLIDs - PFT#1 ONS 4-1-1-1 -> LS 4-1-1-5; PFT#2 ONS 4-1-1-2 -> LS 4-1-1-6

264

Hardware Reference

Table 48: Analog Main Board/Analog Option Board Pinouts
Port

Pin Number

LS 1 - 6

ONS 1 - 4

ONS 3 - 4

Relay 1/2

Paging

Function

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Contact sensor

RLY1_Common

RLY1_no

RLY1_nc

RLY2_Common

RLY2_no

Paging signal

Paging relay common

No paging contact

Table 49: Embedded Analog Music on Hold Connector Pinout
Conductor

Signal

Virtual Circuit PLID

Shield

MOH_COM

4131

Ring

MOH_1

Tip

MOH_2

Note: The Music On Hold port requires a 3.5mm stereo jack for input signal connection.
The two input signals are equivalent to the left and right channel signals from a stereo
source and are combined internally into a single channel.

265

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Controller Alarm Port Pinouts
Table 50: Controller Alarm Port Pinout
Pin

Signal

Critical Alarm

Not Used

Critical Alarm Return

Minor Alarm

Not Used

Minor Alarm Return

Major Alarm

Not Used

Major Alarm Return

Controller Remote Alarm Behavior
Table 51: Controller Remote Alarm Behavior
Action

Behavior

Power-up or push-button
reset

Remote alarms are enabled by default and the LED
is turned off. Press the remote alarm button to
disable remote alarms. Disabled when the LED is
ON.

Software-activated
reboot

Remote alarms remain in the state that they were in
prior to the reboot.

Software Install or
Upgrade

If remote alarms are disabled, an install/upgrade
may enable the alarms.

Power failure

When the system comes back up, the remote alarm
will be enabled, the default.

266

Hardware Reference

Network Services Units
The Network Services Unit provides connectivity to digital trunks.
There are three variants of the NSUs:
•

Universal NSU

•

R2 NSU

•

BRI NSU

Universal/R2 NSU

Figure 48: Universal NSU—Front Panel

Figure 49: R2 NSU—Front Panel

Figure 50: Universal/R2 NSU—Back Panel

267

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Universal and R2 NSU DIP Switch Settings
Table 52: Message Link DIP Switch Setting
DIP Switch
Rear panel,
left side

Use

Notes

Primary NSU

Set to 1 (up). Connected to the controller

Secondary NSU

Set to 2 (down). Connected to another NSU

Table 53: T1/E1 Ports DIP Switches Defined
DIP Switch

Use

Notes

Tx Ground

Ground when down; floating when up.

Rx Ground

Ground when down; floating when up.

Impedance selector #1

120 ohm (enabled when down).

Impedance selector #2

100 ohm (enabled when down).

Impedance selector #3

75 ohm (enabled when down).

LT/NT selector

Up for NT; down for LT.

Table 54: T1/E1 Ports DIP Switch Settings
Impedance
(ohms)

Trunk
Mode

1 Tx
Gnd

2 Rx
Gnd

3
120
ohm

4
100
ohm

5
75
ohm

6
LT/NT

100

T1
(T1/D4)

Down

Up/Down

120

E1 (PRI)

Down

Up/Down

E1 (R2)

Note

Down

Up/Down

Note: The Ground setting is site-dependent. Normally, Tx is grounded and Rx is
not grounded, but that depends on which remote connection is grounded. These
switches are used only with the coaxial adapter (BNC adapter required); leave up
(floating) for twisted pair connection to the E1 port.
Note: See for Table 58 on page 270 for T1 and E1 Connector Pin Allocation for
setting dip switch 6, LT/NT.

268

Hardware Reference

Universal and R2 NSU Pin Allocations
Table 55: CIM Port Connector (Controller, NSU and ASU)
RJ-45 Connector Pin

Signal Name

RX+

RX-

TX+

Not used

TX-

Not used

Note: The Universal ASU connects to the controller over a Category 5
Universal Twisted Pair (UTP) crossover cable through a CIM interface. The
Category 5 cable is of the same type used for Ethernet connections and within
the cable twisted pairs are arranged as: 1,2: 3,6; 4,5; 7,8. Each tied pair is
connected to a 75 ohm resistor. The Universal ASU can be located up to 30
meters (98.4 feet) away from the controller. The interface employs a single
standard 8-pin modular jack consisting of 2 balanced signal pairs and is located
on the front of the unit.

Table 56: Ethernet Connector
RJ-45 Connector Pin

Signal Name

TX+

TX-

RX+

Not used

RX-

Not used

269

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 57: RS-232 Maintenance Connector
RJ-45 Connector Pin

Signal Name

DCD (data carrier detector)

RXD (receive data)

TXD (transmit data)

DTR (data terminal ready)

GND (ground)

Not used

RTS (ready to send)

CTS (clear to send)

Not used

Table 58: T1 and E1 Connector Pin Allocation
Signal Name

RJ-45 Connector
Pin

NT Mode: Switch-6 UP

LT Mode: Switch-6 DOWN

RX Ring

TX Ring

RX Tip

TX Tip

Unused

TX Ring

RX Ring

TX Tip

RX Tip

Unused

270

Hardware Reference

Table 59: NSU Trunk Type Programming Information
NSU

Protocol

Link Descriptor
(Integrated
Access)

MSDN Trunk
Circuit Descriptor
Type

Universal T1/E1

T1/E1 PRI/QSIG

ISDN Node

Universal T1
Universal E1

Universal T1

T1 E&M

T1D4

Universal T1

Universal T1/E1

T1/E1 MSDN

DPNSS

Universal T1
Universal E1

ISDN Node

BRI NSU

Figure 51: BRI NSU—Front Panel

Figure 52: BRI NSU—Back Panel

271

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 60: BRI Connector Pinout (Amphenol 25-pin)
Pin

Signal

T11

T12

T13

T14

T15

R10

R11

R12

R13

R14

T10

R15

BRI NSU DIP Switch Settings
Table 61 below shows the settings for the CEPT port DIP switch for the
BRI NSU.
Table 61: CEPT Mode - E1 Port DIP Switch Settings
Switch

Use

Setting

Notes

Tx Ground

Up: Floating
Down: Ground

Not required for RJ-45 connector.

Rx Ground

Up: Floating
Down: Ground

Not required for RJ-45 connector

Note: This setting is site-dependent. Normally Tx is grounded and Rx is not
grounded, but that depends on which remote connection is grounded. These
switches are used only with the coaxial adapter; leave up (floating) with twisted
pair connection. Not required for RJ-45 connector.

272

Hardware Reference

Analog Services Unit
The Analog Services Unit (ASU) provides connectivity for analog trunks
and telephones (POTS and On-Premise Station, ONS). There are three
variants of 3300 ASUs:
•

ASU

•

Universal ASU

•

ASU II (only on systems running Release 7.0 and later).

For information specific to embedded analog, refer to page 262.

Figure 53: ASU—Front Panel

Figure 54: Universal ASU—Front Panel

Figure 55: Universal ASU—Back Panel

273

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 56: ASU II—Front Panel with a Line Card

Figure 57: ASU II—Back Panel
There are two line card available for the ASU II:
•

16 port ONS card

•

4 + 12 port Combo card (4 LS trunks and 12 ONS lines).
Table 62: ASU II Card Lock Latch Color Code
Card Type

Latch Color

16 Port ONS Card

White

4 + 12 Port Combo

Green

274

Hardware Reference

Table 63: ASU II 25-Pair Male D-Type Connector Pinout
Pin

Color Code

16 port ONS

PLID

4 + 12 port
Combo

PLID

26/1

W/BL, BL/W

ONS Tip/Ring 1

n1x1

ONS Tip/Ring 1

n1x1

27/2

W/O, O/W

ONS Tip/Ring 2

n1x2

ONS Tip/Ring 2

n1x2

28/3

W/G, G/W

ONS Tip/Ring 3

n1x3

ONS Tip/Ring 3

n1x3

29/4

W/BR, BR/W

ONS Tip/Ring 4

n1x4

ONS Tip/Ring 4

n1x4

30/5

W/S, S/W

ONS Tip/Ring 5

n1x5

ONS Tip/Ring 5

n1x5

31/6

R/BL, BL/R

ONS Tip/Ring 6

n1x6

ONS Tip/Ring 6

n1x6

32/7

R/O, O/R

ONS Tip/Ring 7

n1x7

ONS Tip/Ring 7

n1x7

33/8

R/G, G/R

ONS Tip/Ring 8

n1x8

ONS Tip/Ring 8

n1x8

34/9

R/BR, BR/R

ONS Tip/Ring 9

n1x9

ONS Tip/Ring 9

n1x9

35/10

R/S, S/R

ONS Tip/Ring 10

n 1 x 10

ONS Tip/Ring 10

n 1 x 10

36/11

BK/BL, BL/BK

ONS Tip/Ring 11

n 1 x 11

ONS Tip/Ring 11

n 1 x 11

37/12

BK/O, O/BK

ONS Tip/Ring 12

n 1 x 12

ONS Tip/Ring 12

n 1 x 12

38/13

BK/G, G/BK

ONS Tip/Ring 13

n 1 x 13

N/C

39/14

BK/BR, BR/BK

ONS Tip/Ring 14

n 1 x 14

N/C

40/15

BK/S, S/BK

ONS Tip/Ring 15

n 1 x 15

N/C

41/16

Y/BL, BL/Y

ONS Tip/Ring 16

n 1 x 16

N/C

42/17

Y/O, O/Y

N/C

43/18

Y/G, G/Y

N/C

44/19

Y/BR, BR/Y

N/C

45/20

Y/S, S/Y

N/C

46/21

V/BL, BL/V

N/C

LS Ring/Tip 1

n 1 x 13

47/22

V/O, O/V

N/C

LS Ring/Tip 2

n 1 x 14

48/23

V/G, G/V

N/C

LS Ring/Tip 3

n 1 x 15

49/24

V/BR, BR/V

N/C

LS Ring/Tip 4

n 1 x 16

50/25

V/S, S/V

N/C

Note: In the PLID column, n represents the unit number and x represents the number of
the slot in which the card is installed (either one or two).

275

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 64: ASU 25-Pair D-Type Connector Pinout
Pin

Color Code

ASU

PLID

Universal ASU

PLID

26/1

W/BL, BL/W

ONS Ring/Tip 1

n111

ONS Ring/Tip 1

n111

27/2

W/O, O/W

ONS Ring/Tip 2

n112

ONS Ring/Tip 2

n112

28/3

W/G, G/W

ONS Ring/Tip 3

n113

ONS Ring/Tip 3

n113

29/4

W/BR, BR/W

ONS Ring/Tip 4

n114

ONS Ring/Tip 4

n114

30/5

W/S, S/W

ONS Ring/Tip 5

n115

ONS Ring/Tip 5

n115

31/6

R/BL, BL/R

ONS Ring/Tip 6

n116

ONS Ring/Tip 6

n116

32/7

R/O, O/R

ONS Ring/Tip 7

n117

ONS Ring/Tip 7

n117

33/8

R/G, G/R

ONS Ring/Tip 8

n118

ONS Ring/Tip 8

n118

34/9

R/BR, BR/R

ONS Ring/Tip 9

n121

ONS Ring/Tip 9

n121

35/10

R/S, S/R

ONS Ring/Tip 10

n122

ONS Ring/Tip 10

n122

36/11

BK/BL, BL/BK

ONS Ring/Tip 11

n123

ONS Ring/Tip 11

n123

37/12

BK/O, O/BK

ONS Ring/Tip 12

n124

ONS Ring/Tip 12

n124

38/13

BK/G, G/BK

ONS Ring/Tip 13

n125

ONS Ring/Tip 13

n125

39/14

BK/BR, BR/BK

ONS Ring/Tip 14

n126

ONS Ring/Tip 14

n126

40/15

BK/S, S/BK

ONS Ring/Tip 15

n127

ONS Ring/Tip 15

n127

41/16

Y/BL, BL/Y

ONS Ring/Tip 16

n128

ONS Ring/Tip 16

n128

42/17

Y/O, O/Y

ONS Ring/Tip 17

n131

LS Ring/Tip 1

n131

43/18

Y/G, G/Y

ONS Ring/Tip 18

n132

LS Ring/Tip 1-1

1 MPD

44/19

Y/BR, BR/Y

ONS Ring/Tip 19

n133

LS Ring/Tip 2

n132

45/20

Y/S, S/Y

ONS Ring/Tip 20

n134

LS Ring/Tip 1-2

2 MPD

46/21

V/BL, BL/V

ONS Ring/Tip 21

n135

LS Ring/Tip 3

n133

47/22

V/O, O/V

ONS Ring/Tip 22

n136

LS Ring/Tip 1-3

3 MPD

48/23

V/G, G/V

ONS Ring/Tip 23

n137

LS Ring/Tip 4

n134

49/24

V/BR, BR/V

ONS Ring/Tip 24

n138

LS Ring/Tip 1-4

4 MPD

50/25

V/S, S/V

N/C

Note: In the PLID column, n represents the unit number: LX is 2 - 5; MX is 2 and 3.
The LS Ring/Tip 1-n connections are used in the UK for Meter Pulse Detection (MPD).
These ports should be wired across the corresponding LS Ring/Tip connection of the
trunk. We recommend that the MPD connections are made at the last hard wired point.

276

Hardware Reference

Table 65: ASU II Combo Card SFT/PFT Port Connections
LS Port

ONS Port

Note: Up to four SFT/PFT calls can occur at the same time between pairs of LS
and ONS ports. ONS is supported against an LS trunk.

Table 66: Universal ASU Music on Hold Connector Pinout
Pin

Signal

Virtual Circuit

1/2

Tip/Ring 1

n141

3/6

Tip/Ring 2

n142

4/5

Tip/Ring 3

n143

7/8

Tip/Ring 4

n144

Note: CIM 1: n = 2. CIM 2: n = 3.
Note: The four MOH tip/ring pairs occupy an 8-pin female modular jack on the rear panel.
MOH can be assigned to either of the first two ports on a Universal ASU E&M card.

Table 67: Universal ASU Pager Connector Pinout
Pin

Signal

Zone

Virtual Circuit

Tip

n151

Ring

n151

Common contact

Tip

n152

Ring

n152

Normally open contact

Common contact

Normally open contact

Note: CIM 1: n = 2. CIM 2: n = 3.
Note: The Paging port is a standard 8-pin modular RJ-45 connector on the rear panel.
Note: Each paging port has a tip/ring pair for audio and a second tip/ring pair contact
closures for zone control. The contact closes when paging on zones.

277

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

5485 IP Paging Unit
Table 68: 5485 IP Paging Unit Pinout
Pin

Color Code

Signal

BR/R

Audio output, Positive

R/BR

Audio output, Negative

BK/BL

Relay Closure (normally closed)

BK/O

Relay Closure (normally open)

BL/BK

Page Control input

O/BK

Figure 58: 5485 IP Paging Unit Cross Connection

278

Hardware Reference

Peripheral Cabinet
Each peripheral cabinet contains peripheral interface cards providing ONS
and/or DNI ports. Each cabinet has one peripheral switch controller (PSC)
card for control of peripheral cards and one fiber interface module (FIM)
that provides connection to the controller.

Figure 59: Peripheral Cabinet Components
The following peripheral interface cards can be installed in peripheral
cabinets (some cards are only available in specific countries):
•

DNI line card

•

LS/GS trunk card

•

ONS CLASS/CLIP line card

•

ONS line card

•

E&M tie trunk card

•

OPS line card

•

DID/loop tie trunk card.

279

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Peripheral Cabinet Card Layout

280

Hardware Reference

Fiber Interface Module

Figure 60: Peripheral Cabinet FIM
E&M Trunk Card

Figure 61: Switchable Interface Configurations

281

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

E&M Trunk Card

Figure 62: SN-1 and SN-2 Switches
LG/GS Trunk Card

Figure 63: Message Registration Arrangements

282

Hardware Reference

OPS Line Card

Figure 64: OPS Line Card
About Peripheral Interface Cabling
Peripheral equipment is connected to the interface circuits of the system
via a cross-connect field. Peripheral interface cards are connected to the
cross-connect field by 25-pair cables. Cables terminate at the node on
50-pin jacks, J1 through J8, with the number of cables being dependent on
the quantity and type of interface cards installed in the node.
Jacks J1 through J8 are hardwired to backplane connectors in slots 1
through 12 to form four slot groups, each comprising three adjacent cards
and each associated with a pair of jacks. Two adjacent slot groups are
shown in backplane connector arrangements. The circuits of interface
cards contained in a slot group are evenly distributed to the relevant pair
of jacks, such that, half the circuits of each card in a group are connected
to the odd-numbered jack and half to the even-numbered jack. Peripheral
wiring (backplane) details the hardwire connections between one slot
group and the associated jacks. The wiring sequence is identical for the
remaining three slot groups.
Cable plugs P1 through P8 are secured to J1 through J8 with hook and
loop type fasteners. The type of equipment used and the layout of the
cross-connect field cables is at the discretion of the installation company.
Installation information for such equipment must be obtained from the
equipment manufacturer.

283

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 65: Peripheral Cabinet Backplane Connectors

Figure 66: Peripheral Cabinet Backplane Wiring

284

Hardware Reference

Peripheral Cabinet Cabling
The following three tables show the pinout signals of the interface cards as
they appear on J1 through J8. The following abbreviations are used in the
tables:
•

ONS L C: ONS line card and ONS CLASS/CLIP line card

•

OPS L C: OPS line card

•

LS/GS trunk: loop start/ground start trunk card

•

E&M trunk: E&M trunk card

•

DID/LT trunk: direct inward dialing/loop tie trunk card

•

DID/2 trunk: direct inward dialing

•

COV L C: SUPERSET 4 line card

•

DNI L C: digital network interface line card.

Use the appropriate tables to cable the peripheral cabinet card connectors
to the main distribution frame.
Tip: When cabling the SX-2000 MicroLIGHT node connectors, use the
cabling tables that correspond to the peripheral interface card slot in the
node.

Connectors for customer supplied 25-pair cables terminating on peripheral
backplane (to MDF) and SFT unit (to MDF) use AMP Champ or equivalent
cable connectors:
•

50-pin RS (receptacle - screw lock)

•

female

•

screw lock

•

90 tapered slide-on hood.

285

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 69: Peripheral Cabinet Card Slot Pinouts (Cards 1, 4, 7 and 10)
Peripheral Pin Color
Code
Backplane
Jacks

J1 (slot 1)
J3 (slot 4)
J5 (slot 7)
J7 (slot 10)

J2 (slot 1)
J4 (slot 4)
J6 (slot 7)
J8 (slot 10)

286

ONS OPS
LC LC

LS/GS
Trunk

E&M
Trunk

DID/LT
Trunk

DID/2 COV DNI
Trunk L C L C

W/BL

BL/W

W/O

1MWB

1T(MR)

1T1

O/W

1MWA

1R(MR) 1R1

W/G

G/W

1SG

W/BR

2MWB

2T(MR)

BR/W

2MWA

2R(MR) 1SB

W/S

S/W

R/BL

3MWB

3T(MR)

2T1

BL/R

3MWA

3R(MR) 2R1

R/O

O/R

2SG

R/G

4MWB

4T(MR)

G/R

4MWA

4R(MR) 2SB

W/BL

BL/W

W/O

10T

5MWB

5T(MR)

3T1

10T

O/W

10R

5MWA

5R(MR) 3R1

10R

W/G

11T

G/W

11R

3SG

11R

10T

12T

10R

12R

W/BR

12T

6MWB

6T(MR)

BR/W

12R

6MWA

6R(MR) 3SB

W/S

12T

11T

13T

S/W

13R

43R

11R

13R
14T

R/BL

14T

7MWB

7T(MR)

4T1

12T

BL/R

14R

7MWA

7R(MR) 4R1

12R

R/O

15T

O/R

15R

5SG

15R

R/G

16T

8MWB

8T(MR)

G/R

16R

8MWA

8R(MR) 4SB

14R

16T
16R

Hardware Reference

Table 70: Peripheral Cabinet Card Slot Pinouts (Card 2, 5, 8 and 11)
Peripheral Pin
Backplane
Jacks

Color
Code

ONS
LC

R/BR

BR/R

R/S

1MWB

1T(MR)

1T1

S/R

1MWA

1R(MR) 1R1

BK/BL

J3 (slot 5)

BL/BK

1SG

J5 (slot 8)

BK/O

2MWB

2T(MR)

O/BK

2MWA

2R(MR) 1SB

BK/G

G/BK

BK/BR 6T

3MWB

3T(MR)

BR/BK 6R

3MWA

BK/S

S/BK

2SG

Y/BL

4MWB

4T(MR)

BL/Y

4MWA

4R(MR) 2SB

R/BR

BR/R

R/S

10T

5MWB

5T(MR)

3T1

10T

S/R

10R

5MWA

5R(MR) 3R1

10R

BK/BL

11T

BL/BK

11R

3SG

11R

BK/O

12T

6MWB

6T(MR)

10T

12T

O/BK

12R

6MWA

6R(MR) 3SB

BK/G

13T

13
J8 (slot 11) 39

G/BK

13R

43R

BK/BR 14T

7MWB

7T(MR)

BR/BK 14R

7MWA

BK/S

15T

S/BK

15R

4SG

15R

Y/BL

16T

8MWB

8T(MR)

16T

BL/Y

16R

8MWA

8R(MR) 4sb

16R

J1 (slot 2)

J7 (slot 11)

J2 (slot 2)
J4 (slot 5)
J6 (slot 8)

OPS
LC

LS/GS
Trunk

E&M DID/LT DID/2 COV DNI
Trunk Trunk Trunk L C L C

2T1

3R(MR) 2R1

8T
8R

10R

12R

11T

13T

11R

13R

4T1

12T

14T

7R(MR) 4R1

12R

14R

287

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 71: Peripheral Cabinet Card Slot Pinouts (Cards 3, 6, 9 and 12)
Peripheral Pin Color
Backplane
Code
Jacks
42 Y/O
17 0/Y
43 Y/G
18 G/Y
44 Y/BR
19 BR/Y
J1 (slot 3)
45 Y/S
20 S/Y
J3 (slot 6)
46 V/BL
J5 (slot 9)
21 BL/V
47 V/O
J7 (slot 12) 22 O/V
48 V/G
23 G/V
49 V/BR
24 BR/V
50 —
25 —
42 Y/O
17 0/Y
43 Y/G
18 G/Y
44 Y/BR
J2 (slot 3)
19 BR/Y
45 Y/S
J4 (slot 6)
20 S/Y
46 V/BL
J6 (slot 9)
21 BL/V
J8 (slot 12) 47 V/O
22 O/V
48 V/G
23 G/V
49 V/BR
24 BR/V
50 —
25 —

288

ONS
LC
1T
1R
2T
2R
3T
3R
4T
4R
5T
5R
6T
6R
7T
7R
8T
8R
—
—
9T
9R
10T
10R
11T
11R
12T
12R
13T
13R
14T
14R
15T
15R
16T
16R
—
—

OPS
LC
1T
1R
1MWB
1MWA
2T
2R
2MWB
2MWA
3T
3R
3MWB
3MWA
4T
4R
4MWB
4MWA
—
—
5T
5R
5MWB
5MWA
6T
6R
6MWB
6MWA
7T
7R
7MWB
7MWA
8T
8R
8MWB
8MWA
—
—

LS/GS
Trunk

E&M
Trunk

1T
1T
1R
1R
1T(MR) 1T1
1R(MR) 1R1
2T
1E
2R
1SG
2T(MR) 1M
2R(MR) 1SB
3T
2T
3R
2R
3T(MR) 2T1
3R(MR) 2R1
4T
2E
4R
2SG
4T(MR) 2M
4R(MR) 2SB
—
Spare
—
Spare
5T
3T
5R
3R
5T(MR) 3T1
5R(MR) 3R1
6T
3E
6R
3SG
6T(MR) 3M
6R(MR) 3SB
7T
4T
7R
43R
7T(MR) 4T1
7R(MR) 4R1
8T
4E
8R
4SG
8T(MR) 4M
8R(MR) 4sb
—
Spare
—
Spare

DID/LT DID/2 COV DNI
Trunk Trunk L C L C
1T
1R

1T
1R

2T
2R

3T
3R

1T
1R
2T
2R
3T
3R
4T
4R
5T
5R
6T
6R

4T
4R

—
—
3T
3R

—
—
5T
5R

4T
4R

6T
6R

7T
7R

—
—
7T
7R
8T
8R
9T
9R
10T
10R
11T
11R
12T
12R

8T
8R

—
—

1T
1R
2T
2R
3T
3R
4T
4R
5T
5R
6T
6R
7T
7R
8T
8R
—
—
9T
9R
10T
10R
11T
11R
12T
12R
13T
13R
14T
14R
15T
15R
16T
16R
—
—

Hardware Reference

Digital Service Unit
The Digital Service Unit (DSU) provides digital trunk interfaces for public
or private network access, and specialized digital functions (such as
messaging and ISDN service).

Figure 67: DSU Components
The following cards can be installed in a DSU (some cards are only
available in specific countries):
•

DS1 formatter

•

CEPT formatter

•

T1/E1 digital trunk formatter

•

BRI card (6 circuits)

•

BRI card (15 circuits)

•

Euro PRI card

•

NA PRI card

•

R2 card.

289

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

DSU Card Layout

DS1 Formatter
Table 72: DS1 DB-15 Connector Pinout
Pin

Color Code

Description

1/9

W/O, O/W

Tx Tip/Ring

2/4

W/G, G/W

Frame Ground

3/11

W/BL, BL/W

Rx Tip/Ring

Others

—

Unused

290

Hardware Reference

Table 73: DS1 Pinouts for Line/Network Termination
Pin

Line
Termination Mode

Network Termination Mode

Tx Ring

Rx Ring

Tx Tip

Rx Tip

Unused

Rx Ring

Tx Ring

Rx Tip

Tx Tip

Unused

PRI Card

Figure 68: PRI Card Termination Settings

291

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Peripheral Resource Card

Figure 69: Peripheral Resource Card Installation
R2 Card

Figure 70: R2 Card Termination Settings
Table 74: R2 Card RJ-45 Connector Pinout

292

Function

1, 2

4, 5

Hardware Reference

IP Phones
Powering Features
Table 75: IP Phone Powering Features
Option

5201, 5205,
52125215, 5230,
5235, 5330, 5340,
Navigator

5220, 5224, 5240,
TeleMatrix 3000IP

Ethernet / AC Power Adapter (48 VDC
LAN Power)

Yes

AC Power Adapter (24 VDC)

Yes

Power Dongle (Cisco-Compliant)

Yes

3300 In-line Power Dsine Hub

Yes

Spare Pair Power, 802.3af

Yes

Signal (Phantom) Pair Power, 802.3af

Yes

Optional Power Adapter for NA: 50002070 - 5x01, 5x05, 5215;
50000690 - 5x10, 5x20, 5x30, 5x40, 5305, 5310, 5485, 5550;
50002070, 50005080, 50002090 - 5235 (with a DNIC interface module);
9132-800-210-NA - 4015IP, 4025IP.

293

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

294

Appendix B

Installation Planner

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

296

Installation Planner

CXi/MXe Requirements for IP Networking
Tip: Refer to the Engineering Guidelines, Network Configuration for CXi- and
MXe-specific guidelines and, configuration and programming requirements.

LAN Requirements
•

•

A subnet with IP addresses reserved for the following:
-

the CXi/MXe system

the internal Layer 2 switch

the system gateway (router on the LAN or the CXi/MXe itself)

static IP addresses or DHCP-assigned addresses for IP phones
(DHCP-assigned addressing is recommended).

A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server within the
Broadcast Domain. The CXi and MXe include a DHCP server.
Tip: IP phones/IP devices should only be served by one DHCP server.

•

Optional:
-

a router or firewall on the same subnet as the CXi/MXe. (Note that
firewall (including NAT) is on by default for incoming connectivity
from the Internet via the WAN port.)

external Layer 2 switches (unmanaged for a voice only; managed
and VLAN-capable for a voice and data implementation). The CXi
supports as many switches as required but you cannot exceed the
maximum 64 IP users.

SMTP server address to support e-mail forwarding

DNS server address; external DHCP server information;

one PC per IP phone (phones must be dual-port models); PCs
must have 10/100BaseTx Ethernet cards.
Tip: Layer 2 switches should only be connected to Port 17 on the CXi and
the left Gigabit port on the MXe. This rule lessens the chance of spanning
tree issues (loops in the network).
Tip: IP trunks cannot work through the WAN port.

297

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

WAN Requirements
•

Internet Gateway (WAN interface) IP address details; program one of
the following address assignment methods:
Static address assignment
-

IP address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

DHCP address assignment
-

Client name (as required by ISP)

Client ID or MAC address (as required by ISP)

PPPoE address assignment

•

User name

Password

(Optional) Port Forwarding details—i.e., list of IP address and port
number for services on internal network that are to be made available
to external network.

Other Considerations
•

•

System IP Configuration form
-

Reset the controller when you change any settings, except DNS

Enter the voice VLAN priority (0-7) for expedited forwarding of
traffic, which should match the voice priority programmed on the
external L2 switches as well as the value programmed for DHCP
Option 43 or Option 125 (whichever is used). The data VLAN
default is 1. The default voice VLAN priority is 6.

Enter the Differentiated Services Code Point Value (DSCP) for
voice streaming and signaling. This value should match the value
programmed for DHCP Option 43 or Option 125 (whichever is
used). The default is 44 (for upgrades) or 46 (for new installations).

Layer 2 Switch form
-

298

Tag VLAN 1 on Trunk Ports: Select "Enabled" to enable 802.1p/Q
VLAN tagging for VLAN 1 on the 10/100/1G LAN port(s). The field
applies to untagged and VLAN 1 tagged packets only; voice VLAN
tagging is always preserved.

Installation Planner

•

IP Routing form
-

When the CXi/MXe receives a packet from a host on the LAN, it
checks the table. If a route is found on the Network List, the
CXi/MXe forwards the packet to the system Gateway or a router
connected to the local subnet. If no route is found, the CXi/MXe
forwards the packet to the internet through its WAN interface.

CXi/MXe VLAN Behavior
•

Default VLAN 1
In the default case where the CXi/MXe is on the default VLAN, the
CXi/MXe accepts tagged VLAN 1 frames and untagged frames. Any
non-VLAN 1 tagged frames are dropped. The CXi/MXe treats
untagged frames as VLAN 1 frames. The CXi/MXe prioritizes traffic
based on the priority tag and maintains two priority queues. The low
priority queue is for untagged frames and tagged VLAN 1 frames with
priority 0-3. The high priority queue is for tagged VLAN 1 frames with
priority 4-7. Traffic in the high priority queue is processed first. On
egress, all traffic on all ports is untagged with the exception of port 17
on the CXi and the two LAN ports on the MXe, where the user has the
option to tag the traffic via the “VLAN Tags on Trunk Ports” parameter.

•

Voice VLAN
In order for the phones to operate on the Voice VLAN, the CXi/MXe L2
Switch must also be on the same Voice VLAN, or unknown VLAN
frames will be dropped. With the introduction of Voice VLAN support,
the CXi/MXe will accept untagged frames and tagged VLAN 1 or Voice
VLAN frames. All other VLAN tagged frames will be dropped. Priority
queues are maintained as described above, but in this case, for Voice
VLAN tagged traffic. On egress, Voice VLAN traffic remains tagged on
all ports. Untagged frames are treated as VLAN 1 and forwarded to an
external router.

Installation
The traditional installation remains the same as for the MX and LX
controllers because the CXi and MXe rely on external routers to perform
VLAN routing just as the CX, MX, and LX do.
The main difference is that the CXi and MXe maintain Voice VLAN tags on
egress. An externally managed L2 switch connected to the CXi/MXe uplink
port(s) must tag Voice VLAN traffic unlike the setup for the other controllers
that require untagged Voice VLAN traffic.

299

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Controller Configuration Settings (RTC)
Do not change these settings unless you are directed to make changes by
an RN. Unauthorized changes may prevent the system from booting up.
Table 76: Controller Configuration Settings
Prompt

Value

Note

boot device

ata=0, 0

Boot device is Disk.

processor number

Not used.

host name

bootHost

file name

ALL platforms, after Release 6.0:
/partition1/Rtc8260
(Prior to Release 6.0:
LX/700-user: /partition1/Rtc8260
MX: /partition1/Lite200UP
100-user: /partition1/Lite8260)

inet on ethernet (e)

default IP address:
192.168.1.2:ffffff00

Boot location and file name.
File names are
case-sensitive.
[Settings prior to Release 5.0:
250/700-user: /sysro/Rtc8260
100-user: /sysro/Lite8260]
IP address and subnet mask
(hex) for controller RTC.
Provided by your IT
administrator.

inet on backplane (b)
host inet (h)

IP address of PC used for
software upgrades.

gateway inet (g)

IP address of the default
gateway for the 3300 ICP
(must be outside the DHCP
range).

user (u)

ftp

ftp password (ftp)

ftp

flags (f)

0x0

Fixed IP address (0x40 used
on E2T for DHCP).

motfcc

Other device, E2T using
Network boot from.

target name (n)
startup script (s)
other (o)

Tip: Do not use leading zeroes in the IP addresses. For example, enter
192.168.1.2; not 192.168.001.002.

300

Installation Planner

DHCP Configuration Settings
Table 77: E2T Static IP Address Programming
Option Name

Value

Notes/Example

Name

Name of E2T

Subnet

Subnet of E2T

Select subnet.

IP Address

IP address of E2T

192.168.1.5

Protocol

“BOOTP or DHCP”

Hardware Address:
Type

MAC Address

Other - Type

n/a

Address

MAC address of controller
E2T (see the Note)

Other - Address Length

n/a

Client ID

n/a

00:12:3a:4b:c5:67

Note: The E2T MAC address is found on the MAC Address label on the rear
panel of the ICP. Of the three MAC Address labels on the rear panel, use the
one that refers to “E2T MAC”, “Slot 1”.

Table 78: IP Address Range (Scope) Programming
Option Name

Value

Notes/Example

Name of the range
Subnet

System-generated

IP Range Start (see note)

Start of scope

192.168.1.15

IP Range End (see note)

End of scope

192.168.1.25

Protocol

Select “None”, “BOOTP”,
“DHCP”, or “BOOTP or
DHCP”

Default is “BOOTP or
DHCP”

Client’s class ID must
match name

Clear checkbox.

Lease Time

2 Weeks

Minimum 5 minutes.

Note: Cannot be modified once form is saved.

301

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 79: Mitel DHCP Server Options
Option ID

Name

Type

Value
(notes, example)

Router IP address

IP Address.

192.168.1.3

DNS server IP
address

IP Address

Required for the 5230 IP
Appliance.

ASCII String

Default is
“id:ipphone.mitel.com;sw
_tftp=192.168.1.2;call_sr
v=192.168.1.2;
vlan=1;l2p=6;dscp=46”

125
Vendor Specific
(Applies to
Information
Rel. 7.0 and
later systems.
Option 43 can
also be used.)
44

NetBIOS name

IP Address

Server IP address.
Required for the 5230 IP
Appliance.

TFTP Server Name

ASCII String

Required when using an
external DHCP Server.
Boot Server Host Name
(same as RTC IP
address, for E2T only).

bootfile

ASCII String

Boot file name (for E2T
only).

128
(See note)

TFTP Server
(usually the
controller RTC)

IP Address

IP address of the TFTP
server (192.168.1.2)

129
(See note)

RTC IP Address for
this controller

IP Address

IP address (192.168.1.2)
Enter up to four IP
addresses of remote
fail-over RTCs. Separate
entries with a comma and
a space.

130
(See note)

IP Phone DHCP
server
discrimination string.

ASCII String

MITEL IP PHONE

131
(See note)

IP Phone Analyzer
PC

IP Address
(Page 1 of 2)

302

Installation Planner

Table 79: Mitel DHCP Server Options (continued)
Option ID

Name

Type

Value
(notes, example)

132
(See note)

VLAN ID (optional)

HEX, numeric 2 (for external server, use
Hex LONG; for internal
server use decimal)

133
(See note)

Priority (optional)

HEX, numeric 6 (for external server, use
Hex LONG; or internal
server use decimal)

134
(See note)

DiffServ Code Point

Numeric

44 (prior to Rls 6.0)
46 (from Rls 6.0)

140

IP DECT Open
Mobility Manager
(OMM)

IP Address

IP Address of the primary
Radio Fixed Part (RFP)

150

IP DECT secondary
OMM

IP Address

IP Address of the
secondary Radio Fixed
Part (RFP)

151

SpectraLink Voice
IP Address
Priority (SVP) server

Note: Required on Release 7.0 systems to allow IP sets to upgrade to firmware
that supports options 125 and 43.
(Page 2 of 2)

Use the settings in Table 80 for all scopes supporting IP voice devices.
Table 80: DHCP Server Configuration Settings
IP Address Scope
Start Address
End Address
Subnet Mask
Lease Duration

Days:

Hours:

Minutes:

Options (at Subnet
Scope for all
devices)

Data Type

Value

003

IP Address

(Router) Default
Gateway

303

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 80: DHCP Server Configuration Settings (continued)
Options (at Global Scope for WEB devices)
DNS Server

006

IP Address

DNS Domain Name

015

ASCII String

Options (for 3300 E2T)
TFTP Server
(hostname or IP)

066

ASCII String

(typically the IP address
of the controller RTC)

TFTP BootFile

067

ASCII String

/sysro/E2T8260

Options (for IP Phones)
The following two options apply to Release 7.0 and later. The second, Option
125, is the factory-programmed default.
Vendor Specific
Information

Vendor-Identifying
Vendor-Specific
Information

125

ASCII String

Default value is,
“id:ipphone.mitel.com;sw
_tftp=192.168.1.2;call_sr
v=192.168.1.2;
vlan=1;l2p=6;dscp=46”

The following 5 options apply to software load prior to Release 7.0.
IP Phone TFTP
Server

128

IP Address

MN3300 (RTC) IP
Address

129

IP Address

Mitel IP Phone
DHCP server

130

ASCII String

MITEL IP PHONE

VLAN ID

132

Internal: Numeric
External: Long

VLAN Priority

133

Internal: Numeric
External: Long

304

(typically the IP address
of the controller RTC)

Installation Planner

Table 80: DHCP Server Configuration Settings (continued)
Note: ·Option 128-135 correspond to the following Option 43/125 tags:
Option
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135

Equivalent Option 43/125 Tag
sw_tftp
call_srv
id:ipphone.mitel.com
ipa_srv
vlan
l2p
dscp
app_proxy

The Option 125 string is auto-generated upon upgrade to Release 7.0 provided
that Options 128-135 were previously programmed in the DHCP Options form
AND Option 130 contains the "MITEL IP PHONE" discrimination string AND
there is no option 60 ipphone.mitel.com scope configured in the given subnet.

305

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Programming E2T via Debug Cable or Secure Telnet
Use the settings in Table 81 below to program the E2T using a debug
cable. The debug (Tapi) cable is an RS-232 serial cable with a PS2
connector at one end and a DB9 connector at the other. For the MXe,
connect to the controller through secure telnet to port 2007.
Tip: Use this section only if you already have a debug cable, and only if you
are directed to do so by Mitel Technical Support.

Table 81: Debug Cable E2T VxWorks Settings
Prompt

Value

Note

boot device

motfcc

Boot device is Network.

processor number

Not used.

host name

bootHost

file name

/sysro/E2T8260

inet on ethernet (e)

Boot location and file name.
IP address and subnet mask (hex)
for controller E2T (for example,
134.199.63.11:ffffff00). Obtain it
from your IT administrator.

inet on backplane (b)
host inet (h)

IP address of controller RTC.

gateway inet (g)

IP address of the end user’s default
gateway for the 3300 ICP (must be
outside the DHCP range).

user (u)

ftp

ftp password (ftp)

flags (f)

0x0

target name (n)
startup script (s)
other (o)

306

Fixed IP address (0x40 used on
E2T for DHCP).

Installation Planner

Configuring External DHCP Settings for E2T
You must reserve an IP address for the E2T on the DHCP server; assign
options 66 and 67 on the external DHCP (Windows NT) to E2T reserved
IP address. During installation of the 3300 ICP you will manually enter a
static IP address on the RTC card. The E2T card will send a DHCP
broadcast to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server. The DHCP
server (internal or external) must be enabled to supply a free IP and option
66 and 67.
In the following procedure examples
•

IP subnet for the 3300 ICP network is 10.10.18.0

•

RTC (static IP) is 10.10.18.4

•

E2T (reserved by DHCP scope) is 10.10.18.58.

To reserve an IP address for the E2T on the external DHCP server:
1. Highlight the Subnet 10.10.18.0 in the DHCP server DHCP Manager
- (Local) window.
2. Click Scope and select ADD Reservation.
3. Enter the IP address and MAC address of the E2T. The MAC address
is found on the MAC Address label on the rear panel of the ICP. Use
the MAC Address label that refers to “E2T MAC” “Slot 1”.
4. Click Add.
To add options 66 and 67 to the E2T card IP address:
1. Highlight the Subnet 10.10.18.0 in the DHCP server DHCP Manager
- (Local) window.
2. Click Scope and select Active Leases.
3. In the Active Leases dialog box, highlight the reserved IP address
and then click Properties.
4. Click Options in the Properties dialog box.
5. In the DHCP Options: Reservation window, select option 066 Boot
Server Host Name and click Add.
6. Click Value to assign the RTC IP address in the String area.
7. In the DHCP Options: Reservation window, select option 067
Bootfile Name and click Add.
8. Click Value to specify the path /sysro/e2t8260 in the String area.

307

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP Server (prior to
Release 7.0)
You can modify a Windows 2000 DHCP server to support IP Phones. A
DHCP server must be configured for each subnet. The following items
must be configured:
•

TFTP Server IP address

•

IP address of the RTC card

•

Mitel tag “MITEL IP PHONE”.

To modify a Windows 2000 DHCP Server:
1. In the Start menu, point to Programs, then Administrative Tools,
and click DHCP.
2. Highlight the Server name and point to Action, then click Set
Predefined Options.
3. In the Predefined Options and Values window, click Add.
4. In the Option Type window, set the following:
-

Name: IP phone TFTP Server IP Address

Type: IP Address

Code: 128. Then click OK.

Value: enter the IP address of the TFTP server (the controller RTC)
then click OK.

5. In the Predefined Options and Values window, click Add again.
6. In the Option Type window, set the following:
-

Name: RTC IP Address

Type: IP Address

Code: 129. Then click OK.

Value: enter the IP Address of the RTC card. Click OK.

7. In the Predefined Options and Values window click Add again.
8. In the Option Type window, set the following:

308

Name: Mitel Vendor String

Type: String

Code: 130. Then click OK.

Installation Planner

Value: MITEL IP PHONE. Click OK.
Tip: If you are using VLANs complete all of the following steps.

If you are not using VLANs complete steps 13 to 18 and step 21.
9. In the Predefined Options and Values window click Add again.
10. (optional) In the Option Type window, set the following:
-

Name: VLAN ID

Type: Hex LONG (32 bit word)

Code: 132. Then click OK.

Value: enter a numeric value for the Voice VLAN. Click OK.
Tip: The server will automatically convert the numeric value to Hex.

11. In the Predefined Options and Values window, click Add again.
12. (optional) In the Option Type window, set the following:
-

Name: Priority

Type: Hex LONG

Code: 133. Then click OK.

Value: enter a value from 1 to 7; Mitel recommends 0x6. Click OK.
Tip: The server will automatically convert the numeric value to Hex.

13. Highlight the Scope which contains the IP range for the IP Phones and
select Scope Options.
14. In Action, click Configure Options.
15. In General, select option 003 Router and enter the IP address of the
default Gateway and then click Add.
16. Select Option 128.
17. Select Option 129.
18. Select Option 130.
19. Select Option 132.
20. Select Option 133.
21. Click OK.]

309

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Configuring a Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 DHCP
Server (Rls 7.0 and later)
Neither Windows 2000 nor Windows 2003 support DHCP Options 124/125.
Options 60/43 must be used instead.
Note: Options 128-133 used in previous ICP releases are required to
provide backward compatibility with IP sets that have yet to be upgraded
with firmware (2.0.0.18 or later) that supports options 124/125 or 60/43.
After the upgrade, the old options may be removed to prevent future
conflicts with standard use or other vendors’ use of these options.
Note: If you intend to rely on LLDP VLAN Discovery in the network, you
must first upgrade the 3300 ICP to Release 7.0 or later and upgrade the
IP Phone firmware to version 2.0.0.18 or later.
Note: LLDP-MED non-compliant telephones cannot use LLDP for VLAN
discovery. They must use DHCP VLAN discovery. Non-compliant sets are:
5001, 5005, 5010, 5020 IP Phones, 5140 IP Appliance, 5201, 5205, 5207,
5215 (single mode), 5220 (single mode), 5230 IP Phones, 5240 IP
Appliance, 5485 IP Pager, and 5550 IP Console keypad.

To create Options 60/43 on a Windows 2000 (or Windows 2003)
DHCP server:
1. Upgrade the 3300 ICP to Release 7.0.
2. Upgrade the IP Phone firmware. (See page 51).
3. Start DHCP Manager.
4. In the console tree, click the applicable DHCP server branch.
5. Right-click the server, then click Define Vendor Classes followed by Add.
6. In the New Class dialog box, type “Mitel Vendor Class” or other name
for the new option.
7. Type “ipphone.mitel.com” in the right side of the text box under ASCII.

310

Installation Planner

8. Enter a null terminator (0x00) at the end of the hex string under
Binary. The completed dialog box should look like this:

9. Click OK, and then click Close.
10. On the Action menu, select Set Predefined Options.
11. In the Predefined Options and Values dialog box, select the Mitel
Vendor Class from the Option class list. Click Add.
12. In the Option Type dialog box, enter the following:
Field name
Name
Data type
Code

What to enter...
Mitel Option
String
001

13. Click OK.
14. In the Predefined Options and Values dialog box, select 001 Mitel
Option as the Option name and enter the Mitel Information Data string
with the appropriate values.
15. Enter the Mitel ID string with the appropriate values for
and ,
id:ipphone.mitel.com;sw_tftp=;call_srv=;
dscp=;vlan=;l2p=

311

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

For defaults, see Table 80 on page 303.
Tip: You can use the DHCP Options form in the System Administration
Tool to create the configuration string, then copy it into a text editor and
modify it as required.

16. Click OK.
17. Add the Mitel option to the DHCP scopes that require it, modifying the
ID string accordingly.

System Administration Tool Settings
Table 82: System Administration Tool Settings
Setting

Default

username

system

password

Personalized (enter value)

IP Phone Settings
Table 83: IP Phones Settings
IP Phone MAC Information
IP Set Registration Code
IP Set Replacement Code

312

(See System Option
Assignment)

Installation Planner

Telephone Programming Guide
Use the format below to collect information for programming the phones.
Table 84: Telephone Programming Settings
Set Programming Guide
User Name

Location

Set Type

Number

MAC Address
(optional)

Table 85: Telephone Compression Conditions
G729
compression
supported

Compression
DSP required

IP Phone to IP Phone
(except 5x01, 5x05, and 5207)

Yes

IP Phone to IP Trunk to IP Phone
(except 5x01, 5x05, and 5207)

Yes

IP Phone to TDM Phone

Yes

IP Phone to Embedded voice mail

Yes

IP Phone in conference

Yes

IP Phone on Hold, listening to music

Yes

IP Phone listening to music

n/a

TDM Phone to IP Trunk to TDM Phone

Yes

Direct Set-to-set paging (using first codec)

Yes

Call setup conditions

313

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

314

Appendix C

Typical Network
Configurations

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

316

Typical Network Configurations

Network Configuration Examples
This section shows examples of the three most common, non-resilient,
network configurations for a 3300 ICP LX, MX, CX, 250/700-User:
•

Configuration 1: One DHCP Server per VLAN (below)

•

Configuration 2: One DHCP Server for Two VLANs (page 320)

•

Configuration 3: Router on a Stick (one router interface to multiple
VLANs) (page 321).
Tip: See “CXi/MXe Configuration Procedures” on page 323 for CXi-specific
configuration examples.

DHCP Server Settings (Example)
The following settings must be programmed in the DHCP server:
•

DHCP IP Address Range

•

Subnet Mask

•

Option 03 (Router)

•

Option 125 or 43 (Mitel
configuration string)

•

Option 128 (TFTP Server IP
Address)

•

Option 129 (RTC IP Address)

•

Option 130 (MITEL IP PHONE)

•

Option 132 (VLAN ID)

•

Option 133 (Priority)

Note: Option 125 (preferred) or 43 should be used for Release 7.0. Options
128-133 may be required for backward compatibility during upgrades. For
earlier releases, use options 128-133.
Tip: See “Configuring a Windows 2000 DHCP Server (prior to Release 7.0)”
on page 308 and “Configuring a Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 DHCP
Server (Rls 7.0 and later)” on page 310 for information on programming 3300
DHCP settings on a Windows 2000 DHCP server.

317

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Configuration 1: One DHCP Server per VLAN

Figure 71: One DHCP Server per VLAN - Example
Table 86 below shows the DHCP settings programmed for this
configuration.
Table 86: DHCP Settings Example (Configuration 1)
Setting

DHCP Server on VLAN 1
(IP: 10.10.10.2)
Scope 1

Internal DHCP Server on
Controller
Scope 1

DHCP

10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.100

20.20.20.10 to 20.20.20.100

Subnet

255.255.255.0

10.10.10.251

20.20.20.251

Opt. 03
Opt 125 or 43
(Rel. 7.0>)

id:ipphone.mitel.com;sw_tftp=192.168.1.2;call_srv=192.168.1.
2;vlan=1;l2p=6;dscp=46;

Opt. 128*

20.20.20.1

Opt. 129*

20.20.20.1

Opt. 130*

MITEL IP PHONE

Opt. 132*

—

Opt. 133*

—

* Required on Release 7.0 systems to allow IP sets to upgrade to firmware that supports
options 125 and 43.

318

Typical Network Configurations

Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)
Table 87 and Table 88 below show examples of settings on a Cisco and
an HP Layer 2 switch for this example. See Figure 71 for the port numbers.
Tip: These settings also apply for the other network configuration examples.

Table 87: Cisco Layer 2 Switch Settings Example
(Configurations 1, 2 and 3)
Port
A
B
C
D
E

Use

Command

Access port
for VLAN 1

None (by default, all ports belong to VLAN 1)

Access port
for VLAN 2

Router(config-if)#switchport mode access
Router(config-if)#switchport access VLAN 2

Trunk port with Router(config)#interface fast 0/5
Dot1q for IP
Router(config-if)#switchport mode trunk
Phone
Router(config-if)#switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Table 88: HP Layer 2 Switch Settings Example
(Configurations 1, 2 and 3)
Port

Use

Command (on HP VLAN menu)

Access port for VLAN 1

VLAN 1 = untagged
VLAN 2 = NO

Access port for VLAN 2

VLAN 1 = NO
VLAN 2 = untagged

Trunk port

VLAN 1 = untagged
VLAN 2 = tagged

A
B
C
D
E

319

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Configuration 2: One DHCP Server for Two VLANs

Figure 72: One DHCP Server for two VLANs - Example
Table 89 below shows the DHCP settings programmed for this
configuration.
Table 89: DHCP Settings Example (Configurations 2 and 3)
Setting

DHCP Server on VLAN 1 (IP: 10.10.10.2)
Scope 1

Scope 2

DHCP

10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.100

20.20.20.10 to 20.20.20.100

Subnet

255.255.255.0

Opt. 03

10.10.10.251

20.20.20.251

Opt 125 or 43
(Rel. 7.0>)

id:ipphone.mitel.com;sw_tftp=192.168.1.2;call_srv=192.168.1.2;
vlan=1;l2p=6;dscp=46;

Opt. 128*

20.20.20.1

Opt. 129*

20.20.20.1

Opt. 130*

MITEL IP PHONE

Opt. 132*

Opt. 133*

* Required on Release 7.0 systems to allow IP sets to upgrade to firmware that supports
options 125 and 43.

320

Typical Network Configurations

Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)
See “Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)” on page 319.

Configuration 3: Router on a Stick

Figure 73: Configuration 3 Example
Table 89 on page 320 shows the DHCP settings for this configuration.
Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)
See “Layer 2 Switch Settings (Example)” on page 319.
LLDP-MED and IP Phone Network Policy
LLDP-MED stands for Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint
Discovery. LLDP-MED is based on VoIP-specific extensions to the IEEE
802.1A LLDP standard. Refer to the Network Configuration chapter in the
Engineering Guidelines for details.

321

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP)
Prior to Release 5.1 the Mitel IP devices discovered VLAN information
dynamically through DHCP. With Release 5.1, Mitel IP device messages
are now compatible with Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) for the purpose
of port duplex and speed settings, port MAC identification and Auxiliary
VLAN assignment. If your network uses Cisco Layer 2 switches, you may
configure your L2 ports as Access ports and use the auxiliary VLAN to set
the voice VLAN, allowing both phones and PC to share the same network
port. For more information on configuring your network, refer to the
3300 ICP Engineering Guidelines, available at http://edocs.mitel.com.
The IP devices understand CDP messages for the following:
•

Advertising their in-line power consumption

•

Discovering the voice VLAN setting from the Cisco L2 switch

•

Advertising their duplex setting, platform, and software release for the
“show cdp neighbor” command on the L2 console.

To obtain VLAN information via CDP:
•

Set the network part as Access

•

Enter the Voice VLAN, or the Auxiliary_VLAN setting

•

Enter the data or default VLAN into the Native_VLAN setting

•

In DHCP there is no requirement to enter VLAN or Priority into the
default/data VLAN

•

Set the Priority field to “6” in the voice VLAN scope of DHCP.

322

Typical Network Configurations

CXi/MXe Configuration Procedures
Firewall/Port Forwarding
The Port Forward Table form allows external traffic to reach resources on
the internal network and can contain up to 40 entries.
Table 90: Port Forward Table (CXi/MXe only)
Parameter

Function/Values

Protocol

The WAN interface protocol; UDP or TCP.

Src Start Port

The source port at the start of the range.

Src End Port

The source port at the end of the range.

Dst IP Address

IP Address of the destination device.

Dst Start Port

Destination port at the start of the range.

Dst End Port

Destination port at the end of the range.

PPTP Remote Access
The PPTP form is used to program the internet gateway as a PPTP (Point
to Point Tunneling Protocol) server for a remote client on the internet.
Table 91: PPTP (CXi/MXe only)
User Name

The username that the server uses to authenticate the
remote client.

Password

Password that the server uses to authenticate the
remote client.

Client IP Address

Address that the remote PPTP client uses on the LAN.

PPTP Access

Set to “Enable” to enable PPTP remote access.

WAN Settings (Internet Gateway)
The WAN Settings form is used to enable the WAN interface and provide
internet connectivity settings.
•

Enable WAN Access

•

Select a WAN IP method: Static IP Address, DHCP Client, or PPPoE.
Tip: Refer to the Network Configuration chapter in the Engineering
Guidelines.

323

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Configuration 1: CXi Typical Voice-Only Network

Figure 74: CXi Configuration 1 Example
IP Address

192.168.1.2

Subnet

255.255.255.0

Gateway

192.168.1.1

Layer 2

192.168.1.1

324

Typical Network Configurations

Configuration 2: MXe Typical Voice-Only Network

Figure 75: MXe Configuration 2 Example

IP Address

192.168.1.2

Subnet

255.255.255.0

Gateway

192.168.1.1

Layer 2

192.168.1.1

325

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Configuration 3: CXi Typical Voice and Data Network

Figure 76: CXi Configuration 3 Example
IP Address

192.168.1.2

Subnet

255.255.255.0

Gateway (Router)

192.168.1.1

Layer 2

192.168.1.3

Tip: If an IP Address is on the IP Network List in the IP Routing form,
the connection will be routed to 192.168.1.1 (router).
If the IP Address is not on the IP Network List, then the connection
will be routed to the WAN Port automatically.

326

Typical Network Configurations

Configuration 4: MXe Typical Voice and Data
Network

Figure 77: MXe Configuration 4 Example

IP Address

192.168.1.2

Subnet

255.255.255.0

Gateway (Router)

192.168.1.1

Layer 2

192.168.1.3

Tip: If an IP Address is on the IP Network List in the IP Routing form,
then the connection will be routed to 192.168.1.1 (router).
If the IP Address is not on the IP Network List, then the connection
will be routed to the WAN Port automatically.

327

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Windows 2000 FTP Server
Figure 78, Figure 79 and Figure 80 below show examples of the settings
needed on a Windows 2000 FTP server.
To program these FTP settings
1. Open the Computer Management control panel
(Start/Settings/Control Panels/Administrative Tools/Computer
Management).
2. In Services and Applications, click on Internet Information.
3. Program the settings as shown below (use the IP Address drop-down
menu to select the PC’s IP address).

Figure 78: Windows 2000 FTP Site Tab

328

Typical Network Configurations

Figure 79: Windows 2000 Security Accounts Tab

Figure 80: Windows 2000 Home Directory Tab

329

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

330

Appendix D

Status LEDs

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

332

Status LEDs

This appendix describes the following LEDs in the 3300 ICP system.
•

Controller LEDs (below)

•

Network Services Unit LEDs (page 346)

•

Analog Services Unit LEDs (page 351)

•

IP Phone and IP Appliance LAN LEDs (page 354)

•

Peripheral Cabinet LEDs (page 355)

•

Digital Services Unit LEDs (page 356)

•

In-Line Power Unit LEDs (page 361)

For detail on any alarms, see “View Alarms” on page 182.

Controller LEDs

Figure 81: Controller LEDs (LX; MX; 100-User; 250/700-User)
Power LED (page 335)

CIM LEDs (page 340)

Hard Drive LED (page 335)

Alarm (Relay) LEDs (page 340)

FIM LEDs (page 338)

Dual T1/E1 Framer (page 342)

Ethernet LEDs (page 338)

Quad BRI Framer (page 345)

333

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 82: Controller LEDs (CX; CXi)
Power LED (page 335)

Ethernet LEDs (page 338)

Hard Drive LED (page 335)

T1/E1 Combo Card (page 344)

Alarm (Relay) LED (page 340)

Quad BRI Framer (page 345)

Figure 83: MXe Controller — Front Panel
Power LED (page 335)

CIM LEDs (page 340)

Hard Drive LED (page 335)

T1/E1 Combo Card (page 344)

FIM LEDs (page 338)

Dual T1/E1 Framer (page 342)

Ethernet WAN/LEDs (page 338) Quad BRI Framer (page 345)

334

Status LEDs

Figure 84: MXe Controller — Rear Panel with Analog
Power Supply LED (page 342)

RAID Controller LEDs (page 336)

Power Status, Front Panel
Table 92: Controller Power LED
LED Status

Meaning

Green on

The system successfully booted and is operating normally.

Red - two
flashes

The unit is starting up properly (see only during boot process).

Red on solid

The unit has detected an error and is held in reset mode.

Red flashing

The unit has detected an error and will attempt a reset.

OFF

The unit is not plugged in or is faulty.

Hard Drive Activity, Rear Panel

Table 93: Hard Drive Activity LED
LED Status

Meaning

Off

The hard drive disk is inactive.

On flashing

The internal hard disk is being accessed.

335

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

RAID Controller
Refer to Knowledge Base Article 06-2806-00012 “RAID Controller
Operations Manual” for RAID operation details.

Figure 85: RAID Controller LEDs
Table 94: RAID Controller LEDs
Activity

Meaning

Green ON

No access

Orange ON

Read or write occurring on hard disk

Table 95: Mirror Control Button Functions
Activity

Meaning

0 - 5 seconds

LED flashes slow (1/sec)

Power down disk

5 - 10 seconds

LED flashes medium (2/sec)

Mirror rebuild

10 - 15 seconds

LED flashes fast (4/sec)

Reserved

15 - 20 seconds

LED solid on

Reserved

> 20 seconds

LED off

No operation

Note: To abort a button press, hold the mirror control button down for more
than 20 seconds.

336

Status LEDs

Table 96: RAID Fault and Access LEDs
Hard Drive
State

Fault

Access

Description

Normal

OFF

GREEN

Read or write

Request off-line

OFF

GREEN flashing
(1/sec)

Button pushed while
online

Going off-line

OFF

GREEN

Button released,
processing request

Off-line

OFF

Request on-line

Note

GREEN flashing
(1/sec)

Coming on-line

OFF

Button released,
processing

Drive removed

ORANGE

OFF

Replace drive and
rebuild

Drive reinserted ORANGE

OFF

Perform rebuild

Request rebuild

Note

GREEN flashing
(2/sec)

Rebuilding

GREEN
flashing

GREEN

Button released,
processing; may take 6
hours

Rebuild
complete

OFF

GREEN

Resume normal
operation

Soft fault

ORANGE
flashing

GREEN

Read fault

Hard fault

ORANGE

OFF

Replace drive and
rebuild

Note: Depends on previous LED state:
OFF = Online; ORANGE = Fault.

337

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

FIM
The top LED indicates the status of local FIM. The bottom LED indicates
the status of the remote FIM.
The controller FIM monitors the synchronization of the clock appearing on
the fiber link from the peripheral cabinet or DSU. The FIM in the peripheral
cabinet or DSU monitors the synchronization of the clock appearing on the
fiber link from the controller.
Table 97: Controller FIM LEDs
(LX; MX; MXe; 100-User; 250/700-User)
LED Status

Meaning (Both LEDs)

In-frame synchronization.

Flashing

Out of synchronization OR Tx and Rx fiber optic cables
reversed.

OFF

Power off OR held in reset.

LAN Ethernet Ports

Figure 86: Controller LAN Ethernet Port LEDs
(LX; 100/250/700-User)

Figure 87: Controller LAN Ethernet Port LEDs (MX)

338

Status LEDs

Table 98: Controller Ethernet Ports LEDs
(LX; MX; 100-User; 250/700-User)
LED
Top

Meaning
Bottom

Normal Mode

Switch Pressed Mode

ON (Green)

—

Link activity

Full duplex

ON (Red)

—

Collision

ERR

—

ON (Green)

Link integrity

100 Mbps

—

OFF

No link integrity

10 Mbps

Figure 88: Controller LAN Ethernet Port LEDs (CX/CXi and MXe)
Table 99: WAN/LAN Port LEDs (CX, CXi, and MXe)
LED

Meaning

Green on

Link is active.

Green blinking

Link is active and transmitting or receiving.

Green off

Link is inactive.

Yellow on

Data transmission/reception is at 100 Mbps (the port speed
for the 10/100/1GigE LAN Port can be up to 1 Gbps).

Yellow off

Data transmission/reception is at 10 Mbps.

339

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

CIM
Table 100: Controller CIM LEDs
LED Status

Meaning (All LEDs)

Communication link established and configured

Flashing

Link established but not configured

OFF

No power

Controller Alarm

Figure 89: Controller Alarm (Relay) LEDs (LX; MX; 100-User;
250/700-User)
Table 101 below shows the meaning of the Alarm LEDs.
Table 101: Controller Alarm (Relay) LEDs
(LX; MX; 100-User; 250/700-User)
Alarm
Critical

State

Meaning

Red on

Service is lost; immediate maintenance required
(critical alarm invokes system fail transfer if enabled).
OR
Power on reset ongoing. OR
INIT switch activated (resets all boards).

off

No alarm.
(Page 1 of 2)

340

Status LEDs

Table 101: Controller Alarm (Relay) LEDs (continued)
(LX; MX; 100-User; 250/700-User) (continued)
Alarm

State

Major

Minor

Remote
Disabled

Meaning

Red on

Service has degraded beyond predetermined threshold.
OR
Embedded voice mail is not functioning or disk space is
at 98%.

off

No alarm.

Red on

Minor malfunction in system (minor alarm raised when
system not fully operational).
OR
Embedded voice mail disk space is at 90%.

off

No alarm.

Red on

Alarm is on, but silenced (Silence state is toggled by the
Remove Alarms ON/OFF switch). OR
PRO or INIT switch active.

off

Alarm is audible OR
Controller is powering up.
(Page 2 of 2)

Table 102 below shows the meaning of the single alarm LED.
Table 102: Controller Alarm LED (CX, CXi, and MXe)
Alarm

LED
State

Meaning

Critical

Red
flashing

Service is lost; immediate maintenance required
(system fail transfer invoked if enabled)
OR
Power on reset ongoing.

Major

Orange
flashing

Service has degraded beyond predetermined threshold.
OR
Embedded voice mail is not functioning or disk space is
at 98%.
(Page 1 of 2)

341

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 102: Controller Alarm LED (continued)(CX, CXi, and MXe)
(continued)
Alarm
Minor

LED
State
Yellow
flashing

Reset
Red/
button
Orange/
depressed Yellow
OFF

Meaning
Minor malfunction in system (minor alarm raised when
system not fully operational).
OR
Embedded voice mail disk space is at 90%.
Alarm is on, but silenced (Silence state is toggled by the
Remote Alarms ON/OFF switch). OR
PRO or INIT switch active.
Normal operation.

Note: See on “Controller Remote Alarm Behavior” on page 266 for a description
of the Remote Alarm LEDs on the MXe.
(Page 2 of 2)

Power Supply Unit LEDs
Table 103: Power Supply Unit LEDs
LED Status

Meaning (All LEDs)

OFF

No AC power being supplied. Check input cord.

Normal operation.

Dual T1/E1 Framer Module

Figure 90: Dual T1/E1 Framer Module

342

Status LEDs

Table 104: Controller Dual T1/E1 Framer LEDs
LED
Meaning
Alarm (bottom)

Status (top)

ON (Red)

—

No Layer 1.

ON (Yellow)

—

Alarm indication from far end.

OFF

—

No error

—

ON (Green)

ISDN D-Channel established.

—

Flashing (Green) Layer 1 established. (ISDN only)

—

OFF

No link.

On (Yellow) with
right side OFF

ON (Green)

Blue alarm from far end.

OFF

Not programmed.

T1/E1 Combo Card

Figure 91: Controller T1/E1 Combo Card (Rls 6.0)

343

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Figure 92: Resilient T1/E1 Combo Card (Rls 7.0)

Table 105: Controller T1/E1 Combo Card
Status LED
(green)

Alarm LED
(red/yellow)

Meaning

Off

Link not programmed or link descriptor
not assigned.

Off

Solid Red

Red alarm. Loss of signal; check link
connection.

Off

Solid Yellow

Yellow alarm. No signal from remote end;
check link with analyzer. (This state is
normal during startup.)

Solid Green

Solid Yellow

Blue alarm. Check link with analyzer.

Solid Green

Off

Layer 1 synchronized. Good link state; no
alarms.

Flashing Green

Solid Yellow

Alarm indication from remote end.

Flashing Green

Flashing Red

The card is in resilient mode.

344

Status LEDs

Quad BRI Framer Module
For each BRI port on the Quad BRI MMC, there are two LEDs - red on the
upper left and green on the upper right. These LEDs represent the status
of the BRI ports as described in Table 106.

Figure 93: Controller BRI Framer LEDs
Table 106: Controller BRI Framer LEDs
LED
Meaning
Alarm

Status

Red
Green

OFF
OFF

BRI port not programmed. Link Descriptor
is not assigned in the Digital Link
Assignment form.

Red
Green

ON
OFF

BRI port programmed but not active. BRI
cable not plugged in, or wrong cable type
(1:1 or crossover). BRI link may not be
active (or layer 1 power save is active). No
alarms are returned to the 3300 and
circuits are idle.
To prevent routing problems when there is
a faulty BRI port, program the
MSDN/DPNSS Stepback feature. Refer to
the System Administration Tool online Help
for details.

Red
Green

OFF
ON

BRI port programmed and active. Does not
mean that the D-channel is active. BRI can
negotiate this on a per-call basis.

345

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Network Services Unit LEDs
Universal/R2 NSU

Figure 94: Universal and R2 NSU LEDs
NSU FIM LEDs
Table 107: NSU FIM LEDs
LED Status

Meaning for local (upper) and remote (lower) FIM

In-frame synchronization.

Flashing

Out of synchronization OR Tx and Rx fibers reversed.

OFF

Power off OR held in reset.

Note: When a Remote FIM LED is OFF, check the Local FIM LED; if the Local
FIM LED is ON, a fiber optic cable may be faulty.

NSU CIM LEDs
Table 108: NSU CIM LEDs
LED Status

Meaning (all LEDs)

OFF

No Power.

Flashing

Powered on.

Communication Link synchronized with other node.

346

Status LEDs

Universal NSU LED States
Table 109: Universal NSU LED States
LED

State

Meaning

LAN

flashing

LAN activity

MS (message
system)

solid green

Message link open to the system

OFF

Message link not open to the
system; may be downloading when
L0 and L1 are “walking”

flashing

Operational; flashing at 0.5 sec
intervals

OFF

Not operational

solid

Card is booting or not operating;
should be blinking at 0.5 sec
intervals

right side - solid red

No Layer 1

right side - OFF

No error

left side - solid green

D-channel established (PRI)
Layer 1 established (T1, E1,
DPNSS)

left side - flashing
green

Layer 1 established (PRI)

left side - OFF

No link

right side - yellow with
left side - flashing
green

Alarm indication from far end

right side - yellow
with left side - OFF

Blue alarm from card - normal
during link startup (PRI NA or
response to yellow)

yellow and green
alternating between L0
and L1

Downloading (15 - 25 minutes)

yellow alternating
between L0 and L1

Decompressing and copying files
(2 - 4 minutes)

ST (status)

L0 and L1
(on front and
rear)

Note: When the LEDs are alternating, NSU is powering up. Do NOT interrupt or
you might corrupt the card software.

347

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

NSU Card Status
Table 110: Message Link Controlled (Card Status)
LED
Meaning
Green

Yellow

Red

—

No error.

—

Out of service.

—

Error (not necessarily total failure).

—

Out of service (may occur at power up).

—

Fault detected.

—

Out of service (appears at power up).

Appears at power up before the NSU is fully
operational.

OFF

Fully operational.

R2 NSU LED States
Table 111: R2 NSU LED States
LED

State

Meaning

LAN

flashing

LAN activity

MS
(message system)

solid green

Message link open to the system

OFF

Message link not open to the
system

ST (status)

flashing

Operational

OFF

Not operational

solid

Card is booting
(Page 1 of 2)

348

Status LEDs

Table 111: R2 NSU LED States (continued)
LED

State

Meaning

L0 and L1
(on front and rear)

right side - solid red Error (no physical layer is
present or network/line side
jumper is not set correctly)
right side - OFF

No error

left side - solid
green

AB signaling established

left side - flashing
green

Layer 1 established

left side - OFF

No link

right side - yellow
with left side flashing green

Alarm indication from far end

right side - yellow
with left side - OFF

Blue alarm from card - normal
during link startup

yellow and green
alternating between
L0 / L1

Downloading (15 - 25 minutes)

yellow alternating
between L0 and L1

Decompressing and copying files
(2 - 4 minutes)

Note: When the LEDs are alternating, NSU is powering up. Do NOT interrupt or
you might corrupt the card software.
(Page 2 of 2)

349

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

BRI NSU

Figure 95: BRI NSU LEDs
BRI NSU LED States
Fifteen circuit LEDs and one status LED are mounted on the faceplate.
The status LED shows the status of the CEPT link, and each of the circuit
LEDs shows the status of one BRI circuit. The BRI circuit LEDs are also
used during card initialization to indicate the progress of the self-test and
to indicate that the download is in progress.
Table 112: BRI NSU CEPT LED States
LED Status

Meaning

Call in progress on DPNSS link.

Flashing

1 second cycle: Layer 1 established.
4 seconds cycle: Layer 2 established.

OFF

CEPT link not established.

350

Status LEDs

Analog Services Unit LEDs

Figure 96: Universal ASU LEDs
The Universal ASU has 16 ONS LEDs, 4LS LEDs, and a CIM Status LED.

Figure 97: ASU LEDs
The ASU has 24 ONS LEDs, and a CIM Status LED.

Figure 98: ASU II LEDs
The ASU II has an Alarm, Activity, and Power LED.
Tip: There are no LEDs specific to the embedded analog in an MX controller.
Refer to “Controller LEDs” on page 333 for LED descriptions.

351

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Universal ASU, ASU, and ASU II CIM Status LEDs
Table 113: CIM LED
LED Status - RED

Meaning

Communication link synchronized with Controller.

Flashing

Powered on, BSP running.

OFF

No power.

Universal ASU LS Circuit LEDs
Table 114: Universal ASU and ASU ONS/LS Circuit LEDs
LED Status

Circuit State

Circuit Status

Steady ON

Off hook.

n/a

Slow Flash

Idle

Circuit is manual busy.

Fast Flash

Idle

Circuit fault.

OFF

Idle

n/a

Analog Services Unit II Alarm LED
Table 115: ASU II Alarm LED (Red)
LED Status

Meaning

Flashing or ON

System error.

OFF

No error.

Analog Services Unit II Activity LED
Table 116: ASU II Activity LED (Green)
LED Status

Meaning

Fully operational.

Flashing

Initial boot-up.

OFF

No power.

352

Status LEDs

ASU II Card LEDs
ASU II ONS and Combo Card Alarm LED
Table 117: ASU II Card Alarm LED
LED Status

Meaning

Red ON

System error.

Red OFF

No error.

ASU II ONS Card Activity LED
Table 118: ASU II ONS Card Activity LED
LED Status

Meaning

Green ON

System error.

Green OFF

No error.

ASU II Combo Card Activity LED
Table 119: ASU II Combo Card Activity LED
LED Status

Meaning

Red ON

Out of service and power applied. An SFT call can be made.

Green OFF

No error.

Red OFF

No error.

Green ON

There is an established SFT or normal call.

353

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

IP Device LEDs
The IP Phones and IP Appliances have LAN Line Status LEDs on the back
of the device. The network connection (LAN) LEDs are on the back of the
phone near the LAN and PC ports. The Dual Mode IP Phones do not have
LAN LEDs.
Table 120 shows the meaning of the IP Phone, IP Appliance LAN LEDs.
Table 120: IP Phone, IP Appliance LAN LEDs
LED Status

Meaning

Solid Green

Valid network connection

Green Off

Physical connection problem

Flashing Red

Indicates activity (data flow) on the network

Red Off

Possible network server problem

354

Status LEDs

Peripheral Cabinet LEDs
Peripheral Cabinet FIM

Figure 99: Peripheral Cabinet FIM LEDs
Table 121: Peripheral Card LEDs
LED Status

Meaning (All LEDs)

Card Status LEDs
Yellow ON

Card is out of service (not programmed).

Yellow OFF

Card is in service.

Red ON

Card has a fault in some or all of its circuits or it
is in manbusy state.

Red OFF

Card is in service.

Circuit Status LEDs
ON

Circuit busy or booting.

Flashing

Circuit fault.

OFF

Circuit idle.

355

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Digital Services Unit LEDs
BRI Card

Figure 100: DSU BRI Card LEDs
One status LED and fifteen circuit LEDs are mounted on the BRI card
faceplate. The status LED shows the status of the CEPT link, and each of
the circuit LEDs shows the status of one BRI circuit. The BRI circuit LEDs
are also used during card initialization to indicate the progress of the
self-test and to indicate that the download is in progress (see Table 122).

356

Status LEDs

Table 122: BRI Card Circuit LEDs
LED

State

Meaning (All LEDs)

CEPT
Status

Off

CEPT link not established

Flashing at 1 Hz

Layer 1 established

Flashing at 4 Hz

Layer 2 established

Call in progress on the DPNSS link

Off

BRI circuit not in use (no device connected to
circuit)

Flashing at 1 Hz

Idle device connected to the circuit (layer 1
established)

Flashing at 4 Hz

Call being established from device on circuit
(layer 2 established)

Call in progress at device on circuit (layer 3
established)

BRI
Circuit

357

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

DSU PRI Card

Figure 101: DSU PRI Card LEDs
Three status LEDs and 14 circuit LEDs are mounted on the PRI card
faceplate. Each of the card circuit LEDs shows the status of one PRI
circuit.
Table 123: DSU PRI Card Circuit LEDs
LED
L0 and L1

State

Meating

right side - solid red

error

right side - off

no error

left side - solid green

D-channel established

left side - flashing
green

Layer 1 established

left side - off

no link

right side - yellow
with left side flashing green

alarm indication from far end

right side - yellow
with left side - off

blue alarm from card - normal
during link startup
(Page 1 of 2)

358

Status LEDs

Table 123: DSU PRI Card Circuit LEDs (continued)
LED
ST (status)

MS (message
system)

State

Meating

flashing

operational

off

not operational

solid

card is booting

solid green

message link open to the
system

off

message link not open to the
system
(Page 2 of 2)

DSU R2 Card

Figure 102: R2 Card LEDs

359

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 124: DSU R2 Card Circuit LEDs
LED
L0 and L1

ST (status)

MS (message
system)

360

State

Meaning

right side - solid red

error (no physical layer is present or
network/line side (NT/LT) jumper is
not set correctly)

right side - off

no error

left side - solid green

AB signaling established

left side - flashing
green

Layer 1 established

left side - off

no link

right side - yellow with
left side - flashing
green

alarm indication from far end

right side - yellow with
left side - off

blue alarm from card - normal during
link startup

flashing

operational

off

not operational

solid

card is booting

solid green

message link open to the system

off

message link not open to the system

Status LEDs

In-Line Power Unit LEDs

Figure 103: In-Line Power Unit LEDs
The In-Line Power Unit LEDs are grouped as follows:
•

AC Power (below)

•

Power Unit Alarm (page 348)

•

Power Unit Port Status (page 362)

AC Power
Table 125: Power Unit AC Power LED (Green)
LED Status

Meaning

Main Voltage

Unit plugged in and operating
normally.

42–57 V.

Flashing

PORT STATUS GREEN LED ON:
Main power voltage outside specified
limits.

38–42 V OR 57–59 V.
Port power on.

PORT STATUS GREEN LED OFF:
Main power voltage outside specified
limits.

< 38 V OR > 57 V.
Port power OFF.

Unit is not plugged in. OR
Unit is faulty.

< 12 V.

OFF

361

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Power Unit Alarm
Table 126 below shows the meaning of the Alarm LED.
Table 126: Power Unit Alarm LED (Orange)
LED Status

Meaning

Built-in self test failed.

Flashing

Software load failure. Re-install the software.

OFF

Built-in self test passed.

Power Unit Port Status
Each port pair has two Status LEDs:
•

Power Active LED (Green LED)

•

Power Inactive LED (Orange LED)
Table 127: Power Unit Port Status LEDs
LED Status

Meaning

Port Voltage

Green

Orange

OFF

Active load plugged in, and
complying to normal load
conditions.

Continuous nominal DC
voltage present on spare
pairs.

OFF

Overload condition. OR
Shorted terminal port. OR
Forced external DC voltage
feed into port.

Power to the port
disconnected. No DC
voltage on spare pairs.

Internal hardware fault.

No DC voltage on spare
pairs.

Blinking

OFF

Load detection in progress.
OR
Discharged capacitor in
PDTE.

Power disconnected. No
DC voltage on spare
pairs.

OFF

Blinking

Total aggregate power
exceeds predefined power
budget.

Power disconnected for
the blinking port.

OFF

Non-active load. OR
Unplugged load.

No DC voltage present on
spare pairs.

362

Appendix E

FRU Part Numbers

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

364

FRU Part Numbers

Hardware Part Numbers
Table 128: Hardware Part Numbers
Part Number

Description

3300 ICP Controllers, software, and components
50005080

MXe Controller, HD, i-Button, base software, AMB II, AC power

50005096

CX Controller, HD, i-Button, base software, AMB II

50005097

CXi Controller, HD, i-Button, base software, AMB II, and Ethernet

3300 ICP Controllers with components
50004190

3300 Universal Controller (MX with embedded analog)

50004343

3300 Universal Controller (MX without embedded analog)

50004640

3300 Universal Controller (CXi with Ethernet)

50004641

3300 Universal Controller (CX without Ethernet)

50004942

3300 LX Controller 512MB (450 MHz)

50005100

3300 MXe Controller

3300 ICP Components
1695MTLHSG

3300 CITELlink Gateway (Norstar)

1898MTLHSG

3300 CITELlink Gateway (Meridian)

50001246

3300 - 64 Channel Echo Canceller

50001247

3300 - 128 Channel Echo Canceller

50001248

Dual FIM (820 nm, multimode)

50004750

3300 - Hard Disk Replacement (not MXe)

50002212

3300 Spare System ID Module LX

50002979

3300 Quad DSP MOD II

50003560

Dual T1/E1 Trunk MMC (MX, MXe, LX, 250/700-user)

50003695

Dual FIM (1300 nm, multimode)

50003696

Dual FIM (1300 nm, singlemode)

50003724

Analog Main Board (MX only)

50003725

Analog Option Board (MX only)

50003726

Stratum 3 Clock Module
(Page 1 of 6)

365

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 128: Hardware Part Numbers (continued)
Part Number

Description

50003728

3300 Dual DSP

50004070

3300 Quad BRI Module

50004402

T1/E1 Combo MMC (CX/CXi)

50004870

Analog Main Board II (CX/CXi, MXe)

50004871

Analog Option Board (CX/CXi only)

50005086

MXe RAID Sub-system

50005087

MXe Processor (RTC / E2T)

50005088

Hard Disk (all controllers, partitioned, formatted, no software)

50005090

MXe Applications Processor

50005160

T1/E1 Combo MMC II

559900279

E2T Debug Cable, Single

9132-000-100-NA

E2T Debug Cable, 10 Pack

Services Units
50001266

3300 Universal ASU (NA)

50001267

3300 ASU, 24 Port (NA)

50001268

3300 Universal ASU (UK)

50001269

3300 ASU, 24 Port (UK)

50001274

3300 BRI NSU (NA)

50001275

3300 BRI NSU (Euro)

50002046

3300 ASU, Unit 24 Port (LA)

50002047

3300 Universal ASU (LA)

50002813

3300 ASU, 24 Port (Euro)

50002814

3300 Universal ASU (Euro)

50003901

R2 NSU (I3BC) (Iran)

50004990

3300 Universal NSU T1/E1 (NA)

50004991

3300 Universal NSU T1/E1 (Euro)

50004992

3300 R2 NSU, 110/220 V

50005103

16 Port ONS Card (ASU II)
(Page 2 of 6)

366

FRU Part Numbers

Table 128: Hardware Part Numbers (continued)
Part Number

Description

50005104

4 + 12 Port Combo Card (ASU II)

50005105

3300 Analog Services Unit II with AC Power Supply

Power Units
50000363

Power Distribution Unit

50000687

24 VDC IP Power Adapter 240V 50Hz, Euro (Qty 1)

50000690

24 VDC IP Power Adapter Unit 110V, 60Hz (Qty 1)

50002070

48 VDC Ethernet/AC Power Adapter, NA, 120V 50-60Hz

50002090

48 VDC Ethernet/AC Power Adapter, Euro, 240V 50Hz

50002230

Power Cord 3-Pack (Australia/New Zealand)

50002618

3300 Phone Power Adapter In-Line 6-Pack (UK)

50002619

3300 Phone Power Dongle In-Line (UK)

50002952

Power Cord 3 Pack (Euro)

50002976

Power Cord 3 Pack (NA)

50002977

Power Cord 3 Pack (UK)

50003734

3300 Power Dongles Rev II (Cisco compliant), 10-Pack

50004023

3300 Power Dongles Rev II (Cisco compliant), Single

50005084

MXe AC Power Supply

50005091

ASU II AC Power Supply

51002525

3300 Phone Power Dongles (6-Pack)

51004716

3300 In-Line Power Unit

PD-6024/AC

PowerDSine 24 Port IEEE 802.3af Power Hub

PD-6012/AC

PowerDSine 12 Port In-line Power Unit

Consoles
50001145

5550 IP Console (Light Grey)

50002028

5550 IP Console Software CD-ROM

50003071

5550 IP Console (Dark Grey)

50003370

5550 IP Console / SC2000 Keypad Feet (Set of 2)

50003372

5550 IP Console Keypad Dark Grey (Spare)
(Page 3 of 6)

367

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 128: Hardware Part Numbers (continued)
Part Number

Description

9189-000-400-NA

SUPERCONSOLE 1000®, Light Grey, Backlit

9189-000-401-NA

SUPERCONSOLE 1000, Dark Grey, Backlit

SX-2000 Cabinets and Cards
50000730

CEPT Interface Assembly II

50001856

SX-2000 Triple FIM Card

50002375

Peripheral Cabinet, dark grey, 120 V, AC (UK)

50002370

Peripheral Expansion Cabinet, dark grey, 120 V (NA)

50002371

Peripheral Expansion Cabinet, dark grey, 240 V (NA)

50002372

Peripheral Expansion Cabinet, dark grey, 120 V (UK)

50002373

Peripheral Cabinet 19”, dark grey, 120 V AC NA

50002374

Peripheral Cabinet 19” 240 V AC NA

50002375

Peripheral Cabinet 19” 240 V AC UK

50002376

Peripheral Cabinet Door 19 inch, dark grey, (Qty 2)

50002572

Peripheral Cabinet FRU 19 inch

50004201

Redundant Control Node with MCIIIE(AC) Int’l

50004202

Redundant Control Node with MCIIIE (DC)

50004203

Peripheral Cabinet III 120 V (NA)

50004204

Peripheral Cabinet III 240 V (Int’l)

50004205

Peripheral Cabinet III DC

52001400

Peripheral Cabinet Expander Kit

9125-100-100-NA

EMI Filter Kit

9125-100-106-NA

Cabinet Interconnect Cable, 4.5 m (15 ft)

9180-305-000-NA

System Fail Transfer Unit (6 circuit)

9400-200-116-BA

Peripheral Cabinet II 240 V

9400-200-116-BX

Peripheral Cabinet II 240 V

9400-200-116-DB

Peripheral Cabinet II DC

9400-200-116-DC

Peripheral Cabinet II DC

9400-200-118-NA

Peripheral Cabinet II (AC)
(Page 4 of 6)

368

FRU Part Numbers

Table 128: Hardware Part Numbers (continued)
Part Number

Description

9400-200-119-NA

Peripheral Interconnect Card

9400-200-122-BA

DSU Cabinet (DC) (UK)

9400-200-122-NA

DSU Cabinet (DC)

9400-200-124-BA

DSU Cabinet (AC) (UK)

9400-200-124-NA

DSU Cabinet (AC)

9400-200-125-NA

DSU Cabinet (AC)

9400-200-144-NA

Cabinet Stacking Brackets

9400-200-161-BA

MicroLIGHT MCIIIE UK

9400-200-161-BX

MicroLIGHT MCIIIE Int’l

9400-200-161-NA

MicroLIGHT MCIIIE

9400-200-161-NX

MicroLIGHT MCIIIE Int’l 120 V

9400-200-162-BA

MicroLIGHT MCIIIE (DC) UK

9400-200-162NA

MicroLIGHT MCIIIE (DC)

9400-200-163-BA

Redundant Control Cabinet with MCIIIE UK

9400-200-163-NA

Redundant Control Cabinet with MCIIIE

9400-200-164-BA

Redundant Control Cabinet with MCIIIE (DC) UK

9400-200-163-NA

Redundant Control Cabinet with MCIIIE (DC)

9400-200-200-NA

Power Module Redundant (in Control Node)

9400-200-301-NA

Peripheral/DSU Resource Card

9400-200-303-NA

Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier Card

9400-200-304-BA

SUPERSET Hub Unit

9400-200-306-BA

SUPERSET Hub Package

9400-200-310-NA

Doors for Control/Peripheral Cabinets (Pkg. of 2)

9400-300-202-BA

Fan 240 VAC

9400-300-204-NA

AC Power Supply

9400-300-301-NA

Fiber Interface Module (FIM)

9400-300-302-NA

Quad FIM Carrier

9400-300-308-NA

DSU Slot FIM Carrier
(Page 5 of 6)

369

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 128: Hardware Part Numbers (continued)
Part Number

Description

9400-300-310-NA

FIM Carrier Card

9401-000-024-NA

Music on Hold Paging Unit (DNIC)

MA218AA

DS1 Interface Assembly

MA225AA

PRI Interface Assembly

MA501AA

BRI Interface Assembly

MC268AA

6 Circuit BRI Card

MC268AB

15 Circuit BRI card

MC269AA

Euro ISDN Dual Link PRI Card

MC269CA

CEPT II Formatter Card

MC270AA

PRI Card, T1 Dual Link

MC270CA

DS1/T1 II Formatter card

MC271AA

E1 R2 Dual Link Card

MC312AB

Peripheral Switch Control II Card

MC320CL

ONS CLIP Line Card (UK) with Positive Disconnect (16 circuit)

MC320CM

ONS CLASS IBR Line Card (16 circuits)

MC320EA

ONS CLASS Line Card (16 circuits)

MC320FA

ONS CLASS Line Card with Positive Disconnect

MC321AC

OPS Line Card (8 circuits)

MC330AB

DNI Line Card (16 circuits)

MC340BA

LS/GS Trunk Card (8 circuits)

MC341CA

DID/Loop Tie Trunk Card (4 circuits)

MC342BB

E&M Tie Trunk Card (4 circuits)

MP914AA

AC Power Converter

MW401AA

BRI Cable - MDF 25 pair cable, 3 m (10 ft)

MW401AB

BRI Cable - MDF 25 pair cable, 10 m (32.5 ft)

MW402AA

BRI CEPT Cables

MW403AA

BRI MMI Cable

MW404AA

RJ-45 to Coaxial Adapter cables
(Page 6 of 6)

370

FRU Part Numbers

Software Part Numbers
Table 129: Software Part Numbers
Part Number

Description

50004580

3300 5.2 Base Software Upgrade CD-ROM with Hard Drive

50004622

3300 5.1 Base Software

50004710

3300 5.2 Base Software

50004711

3300 5.2 Base Software Upgrade CD-ROM

50005033

3300 6.0 Base Software Upgrade CD-ROM with Hard Drive

50005034

3300 6.0 Base Software Upgrade CD-ROM

50005035

3300 6.0 MX/LX Base Software

50005036

3300 6.0 CX/CXi Base Software

50005152

3300 6.1 Configuration Tool (CD-ROM and License)

50005153

3300 6.1 Configuration Tool Upgrade (CD-ROM)

50005154

3300 6.1 Base Software Upgrade CD-ROM with Hard Drive

50005155

3300 6.1 Base Software Upgrade CD-ROM

50005156

3300 6.1 MX/LX Base Software

50005157

3300 6.1 CX/CXi Base Software

50005311

3300 7.0 Base Software CD-ROM and Technician’s Handbook

9125-070-002-NA

PRI T1 Card CD-ROM Software

9125-070-011-NA

Euro ISDN PRI Card Release 6 Application Software

9125-070-012-NA

ISDN PRI Card Release 6 Application Software

9125-271-000-NA

R2 Application CD-ROM Software

9125-501-001-NA

ISDN Min/Max Software Option for the PRI Card

9125-501-002-NA

ISDN Auto Min/Max Software Option for the PRI Card

9125-501-003-NA

ISDN NFAS Software Option for the PRI Card

9125-501-004-NA

ISDN D-Channel Back up Software Option - PRI Card

9125-501-005-NA

ISDN Remote LAN Access Software Option - PRI Card

371

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

372

Appendix F

System Capacity and
Parameters

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

374

System Capacity and Parameters

System Parameters
Port Usage
Table 130: Port Usage
Function

Port/Socket Number

IP Trunk (unsecured)

1066

IP Trunk (SSL)

1067

Software Log

1750

Maintenance Log

1751

SMDR

1752

PMS/Hotel Logs

1753 (only one direction)

LPR1 (printer port)

1754

E2T to RTC (SSL)

6000

Set to ICP (Unsecured)

6800

Set to ICP (SSL)

6801

Set to ICP (Secure Minet)

6802

PMS for voice mail port

6830

E2T IP (prior to release 6.0)

RTP/UDP 5000 to 5512

E2T IP (release 6.0 and later)

RTP/UDP 50000 to 50255

RTC

TCP 6800

IP Sets

TCP 6900

IP Sets - Voice B1/B2, Rx

RTP/UDP 9000/9002

IP Sets - Voice B1/B2, Tx

RTP/UDP 9000/9002

ACD Real Time Event

15373

IP PMS (Release 6.0)

15374

375

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Encryption Support
Table 131: E2T/TDM Encryption
Device

Signaling Mode

Voice Streaming Mode

E2T / TDM

SSL/No encryption

AES/No encryption

Table 132: Telephone Encryption
Telephone

Signaling Mode

Voice Streaming Mode

5215DM/5220DM, 5235

SSL/Secure Minet/No encryption

AES/Cast/No encryption

5001, 5005, 5010, 5015,
5020, 5140, 5201, 5205,
5207, 5212, 5215, 5220,
5224, PDA (5230), 5240

Secure Minet/No encryption

AES/No encryption

Navigator, 5330, 5340

Secure Minet/No encryption

AES/No encryption

TeleMatrix 3000IP

Secure Minet/No encryption

AES/No encryption

Set Compression
Table 133: Set Compression
Option

5201,
5207

5212, 5215,
5230, 5235,
5240

5220,
5224

5330,
5340

Navigator

TeleMatrix
3000IP

Compression Support

G.711

G.711
G.729a

See Note

Voice QoS (802.1p/q)

Yes

Encryption

AES

128 bit

CLASS B Support

Yes

See Note

Peripherals (Modules)
Support

Yes

Note: Refer to TeleMatrix 3000IP Technical documentation for details.

376

System Capacity and Parameters

Mitel IP Phone Power Consumption
Table 134: Actual Phone Set Power Consumption
Device

Power consumption (W)

5001 IP Phone

2.0

5005 IP Phone

2.6

5010 and 5020 IP Phones

5.0

5201 IP Phone

2.0

5205 IP Phone

2.9

5207 IP Phone

3.0

5212, 5215, 5215 (dual mode), 5220, 5220 (dual
mode), 5224 IP Phones

4.7

5230 IP Appliance

5.2

5235

6.2

5140 and 5240 IP Appliances

6.8

5485 Paging Unit

5.0

5550-TKB (Used with the 5550 IP Console

5.0

MITEL 3300 power dongle

1.4

Navigator

8.6

TeleMatrix 3000IP

4.7

377

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Capacity
Hardware Capacity
The following tables provide a view of the maximum capacity of the 3300
ICP. The capacities in these table are for a non-resilient 3300 ICP.
Tip: The capacities in Table 135 are not true hardware limitations, but may
be limits set by software. Most systems will reach practical operational
limitations before these large numbers of devices are reached.

Table 135: 3300 ICP Hardware Capacity
Parameter Name

LX/700
User

250
User

MXe
(Note 2)

100
User

CX /
CXi

Compression Channels
(TDM-IP G.729a)

32/64

DTMF Receivers

128

E2T Channels

128

64/128

Tone Detector Circuits

Tone Generators

128

Voice Mail Ports

Dual FIMs

n/a

T1/E1 Modules

NSUs (without chaining)
NSUs (with chaining)

4
8

2
4

4
8

2
4

n/a

Peripheral Cabinet (direct
connection)
Expanded Cabinet

n/a

ASUs

n/a

Trunks (analog and digital
combined)

628

BRI U Interfaces (with
NSU)

n/a

IP Trunks between any
two controllers

200

ACD Agents (see Note 1)

350

200

100

350

50
(Page 1 of 2)

378

System Capacity and Parameters

Table 135: 3300 ICP Hardware Capacity (continued)
Parameter Name

LX/700
User

250
User

MXe
(Note 2)

100
User

CX /
CXi

IP Trunks per controller

2000

Attendant Consoles

Devices (see Note 2)

700
LX-1400

250

200

200/1400

100

Programmable Key
Modules

Note 1. A combination of IP or DNI phones (no DNI in the CX/CXi). Refer to Engineering
Guidelines for details.
Note 2. The larger number is available only with the second processor (E2T) installed
(Page 2 of 2)

System Capacity
Tip: Digital Links are also limited by the number of dual FIMs available on
the controller.

Table 136: System Capacity
Parameter Name (numbers in brackets are minimum
and maximum values with flexible dimensioning)

Maximum Value
(default maximum)

IP User Licenses

1400 active

ACD Agent Licenses

350

IP Device Licenses

1400

Mailbox Licenses

750

Digital Link Licenses

Compression Licenses

ACDII Agent Groups

64, 32 (extended)

ACDII Agents per Group

150, 500 (extended)

ACDII Agent Appearances

ACDII - Agent IDs

1181

ACDII - Agent Paths

256

Attendant Consoles (2-48)

24
(Page 1 of 3)

379

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Table 136: System Capacity (continued)
Parameter Name (numbers in brackets are minimum
and maximum values with flexible dimensioning)

Maximum Value
(default maximum)

Attendant Groups (2-100)

Attendant Console Calls Waiting

Broadcast Groups (12-16000)

1875 (9000 for LX/MXe with
512 MB memory)

- Members per Broadcast Group
Busy Lamp Groups (Monitored Devices) (2-5000)
- Members per Busy Lamp Group

32
439
16

Call Reroute Always (10-250)

175

Call Reroute 1st Alternates (10-500)

336

Call Reroute 2nd Alternates (10-100)

Class of Restriction (COR)

Class of Service (COS) (10-96)

Conferences; maximum (see note 2)

Conferees in a conference; maximum (see note 2)

Default Account Codes (10-600)

225

Departments (in Telephone Directory) (10-5000)

2000

Digit Modification Tables

256

Digit Blocks (4556 max.)

4056 (4255 for LX/MXe with
512MB memory)

DTMF Receivers

128

Hunt Groups (10-255)

176

- Members per Hunt Group

Independent Account Codes (10-15000)

11000

Locations (in Telephone Directory) (10-5000)

250 / 1000 (see note 1)

Modem Groups (2-25)

Modems per Modem Group

MSDN/DPNSS Cluster Elements

30
(Page 2 of 3)

380

System Capacity and Parameters

Table 136: System Capacity (continued)
Parameter Name (numbers in brackets are minimum
and maximum values with flexible dimensioning)

Maximum Value
(default maximum)

MSDN/DPNSS Remote Directory Numbers

18500

Multiline Sets (12-6000)

756 (5665 for LX/MXe with
512MB memory)

Networked ACD - Remote Agent Subgroups

Page Groups (Zones) (2-100)

Personal Speed Call Users (10-1000)
(blocks of 10 speed calls per user)

500

Pickup Groups (10-800)

200

- Members per Pickup Group

PKM Devices (2-500)

Routes (10-2400)

200 / 1200 (see note 1)

Route Lists (10-1200)

128 / 600 (see note 1)

Single Line Sets (16-5000)

700

Speed Call Digit String (average 12 digits) (65000 max.)

2501

SUPERSET Callback Messages per System (48-10000)

500

System Account Codes (10-100)

System Digit Strings (65000 max.)

1000 / 30001 (see note 1)

System Speed Call (10-3000)

1000 / 2000 (see note 1)

Telephone Directory Entries (55-65000)

20000 / 30000 (see note 1)

Trunk Groups (8-320)

112

Trunks (8-2000)

628

Trunks per Trunk Group

175

Trunk Service Numbers (8-500)

150

Note:
1. Default value (larger number) when 250 Maximum Elements Per Cluster is selected.
2. Any combination of conferees and conferences may not exceed 64 channels. For
example, 21 three-party conferences for a total of 63 channels or eight eight-party
conferences for a total of 64 conference channels.
(Page 3 of 3)

381

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

382

Index

Index
Numerics
100-user
clock, replace 140
cover, remove/replace 100
DSP, add/replace 109
DSP, calculate usage 105
echo canceller, add 112
echo canceller, add/replace 112
embedded T1/E1, add 110
FIM, add/replace 104
framer, add/replace 111
hard drive, install 19
hard drive, replace 126
slot locations 17
system ID, install 20
System ID, replace 133
T1/E1 combo, add/replace 111
16 port ONS
install in ASU II 141
250-user. See LX/250/700-user.
3300 upgrade with SI tool 73
4 + 12 port combo
install in ASU II 141
6000 MAS software, install 87
6000 MAS, configure 122
700-user. See LX/250/700-user.

A
Access Mitel OnLine 10
Activity LEDs 352
Adding
compression channels 105
DSP module 105
TDM devices 105
user capacity 103
voice mail ports 105
Alarm LEDs, ASU II 352
Alarms
controller LEDs 340

controller port pinout 266
troubleshooting 189
viewing 182
AMC
3300 ICP connection 23
description 7
license and option selection 26
password retrieval 25
Software Installer Tool 23
Analog Main Board
configuring 39
CX/CXi part number 366
CX/CXi, replace 137
CX/MXe circuits/ports 264
CX/MXe pinouts 265
CX/MXe port assignment 264
LSMeasure Tool 250
MX Amphenol pinout 263
MX circuits/ports 262
MX part number 365
MX, replace 134
MXe, replace 136
Analog Music on Hold 56
Analog Option Board
CX/CXi, add/replace 114
MX, add/replace 113
Analog Services Unit (ASU)
25-pair connector pinout 275, 276
CIM connector pinout 269
illustration 273
installing 38
LEDs illustration 351
Music on Hold pinout 277
page connector pinout 277
APC, configure 122
APC, install 118
Application Management Center
See AMC
Application Processor Card,
configure 122

383

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

Application Processor Card, install
118
ASU II
16 port ONS, install 141
4 + 12 port combo, install 141
power supply, install 141
ASU IP address range 29, 32
Audio File
download troubleshooting 188
installing embedded 55
Auto-boot, stop 99

B
Back up a database 61
Backup troubleshooting 186
Boot sequence, IP phones 225
BRI DSU, replacing
cards 152
interface assembly 153
BRI framer module 345
BRI NSU
illustration 271
Browser cache, clear 75

C
Cabling Peripheral to MDF 45
Cache, clear browser 75
Capacity
adding user 103
hardware 378
system 379
Card layout
DSU 48
peripheral cabinet 41
CEPT DIP switch settings 272
Checking
hardware profile 235
peripheral cabinet grounding 42
the system 235
Checklist, installation 5
Component options table 18

384

Component placement 15
Compression
adding channels 105
conditions 217
IP phones 376
configure Windows DHCP 310
Connecting
controller to network 27
fiber cable to peripheral cabinet 42
fiber cables to DSU 49
maintenance PC to controller 22
Contacting Mitel 11
Controller
alarm port pinout 266
alarms LEDs 340
cabinet numbering 259
CIM connector pinout 269
components 254
configuring Layer 2 switch 35
connecting to network 27
encryption support 376
hardware 253
hardware profile, verifying 235
port usage 375
power down 99
power up 22
programming DHCP settings 29,
31
programming modules 26
replacing components 125
reset 99
RTC IP address prior to Rls 6.0 28
RTC IP address, Rls 6.0 & later 27
slot location 15
stop auto-boot 99
system reset 99
turning off 99
turning on 22
upgrading to 300/450 MHz 102
verifying connections 22
verifying operation of 34
versions 253
Converting a PRI database 76

Index

Cooling fan
replace in MXe 139
replace in peripheral cabinet 146
Cover
install CX/CXi/MXe 102
install LX/700 100
install MX/100 101
remove CX/CXi/MXe 101
remove LX/700 99
remove MX/100 100
CX/CXi
AMB, replace 137
AMB/AOB
pinouts 265
AOB, add/replace 114
calculate DSP usage 108
clock, replace 140
cover, install 102
cover, remove 101
DSP, add/replace 109
echo canceller, add 112
echo canceller, add/replace 112
embedded analog
circuits/ports 264
music on hold pinout 265
port assignment 264
framer, add/replace 111
hard drive, replace 131
slot locations 16
System i-button, replace 133
T1/E1 combo (Rls 6.0), add/replace 111
T1/E1 combo, add/replace 111
CXi
6000 MAS software, install 87
APC install 118
APC, configure 122
Application Processor Card 118
Application Processor Card, configure 122
configuration procedures 323
hard drive, APC, install 121
IP networking requirements 297
LAN requirements 297

networking examples 323
troubleshooting 207
WAN requirements 297

D
Database
back up 61
restore 63, 81
DBMS save command 26
Debug cable 306
Debug option, phone 170
Desktop Tool 6
DHCP server
configuring external 307
programming settings 29, 31
reprogram external 74
reprogram internal 74
settings 303
Windows 2000 308, 310
Windows NT 307
DHCP server settings 31
Digital Music on Hold 56
Digital Service Unit. See DSU
Digital trunking troubleshooting 203
DNIC Music on Hold, install 57
DNS name resolution
AMC connection 23
Documentation list 9
DSP module
add or replace 109
DSP module, troubleshooting 189,
190
DSP usage
calculating CX/CXi 108
calculating LX/MX/200/250/700user 105
calculating MXe 105
DSU
BRI card LEDs 356
BRI cards 152
BRI interface assembly 153
cards list 289

385

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

check card layout 48
circuit cards 50, 143, 144
connecting fiber cables 49
DS1 DB-15 connector pinout 290
DS1 Line/Network pinout 291
FIM 157
formatter cards 154
front panel 142
illustration 289
installing 47
interface assembly 49
Peripheral Resource card 156, 292
PRI card 154, 291
R2 card illustration 292
R2 card LEDs 359
R2 card RJ-45 pinout 292
remove/install front panels 142
removing circuit cards 143
testing a formatter card 154
Dual FIM
add/replace 104

E
E&M trunk card 281
E2T
add processor 123
programming via debug cable 306
Echo Canceller, install 112
Embedded analog
amphenol pinout (MX) 263
cabinet configuration (MX) 262
circuits, ports (CX/CXi) 264
circuits, ports (MX) 262
installing 38
music on hold pinouts (CX/CXi)
265
pager connector pinout (MX) 263
pinouts (CX/CXi) 265
port assignment (CX/CXi) 264
power fail circuits (MX) 263
Embedded BRI
troubleshooting 193
Embedded Music on Hold 55

386

Embedded PRI
troubleshooting 191
Embedded System Management
description 6
launching tools 8
Embedded T1/D4
troubleshooting 191
Encryption support 376
ESM
description 6
launching tools 8
log in 8
troubleshooting 183
Expanding peripheral node 147, 149
external DHCP server settings 33
External DHCP settings 307

F
FIM
add/replace in controller 104
installing in DSU nodes 158
peripheral cabinet 281
peripheral, replacing 147
Flexed Dimension
install/upgrade with change 67
Formatter cards
replacing 154
testing 154
Framer module
add/replace 111
Dual T1/E1 photo 261
Quad BRI photo 261
Front panels
DSU 142
Peripheral Cabinet 142

G
Group Administration Tool 6

H
Handbook, symbols in 3

Index

Hard drive
install APC, CXi 121
install redundant, MXe 117
installing 19
replace MX 127
replace MXe, redundant 129
replace MXe, single 128
replace, CX/CXi 131
replacing 125
Hardware capacity 378
Hardware FRUs, part numbers 365
Hardware upgrade options 98
HTTP proxy server
AMC connection 23, 24

I
ICP Software Installer 69
ICP system
AMC connection 23
IMAT
connecting to NSU (Win 95/98) 90
creating dial-up connection (Win
95/98) 91
description 6
direct connection device driver
(Win 95/98) 90
install on the PC 88
launching 8
using 90
In-Line Power Unit 293
Install E2T 123
Install redundant power, MXe 123
Installation checklist 5
Installation tools and equipment 4
Installation/maintenance PC 7
Installing
Analog Option Board, MX 113
ASUs 38
BRI NSUs 37
controller modules 15
CX/CXi/MXe cover 102
Digital Service Units 47

DMP 57
DNIC music on hold 57
DSU circuit cards 50, 144
DSU FIM 158
DSU interface assembly 49
Dual FIM 104
echo canceller 112
Embedded Analog 38
Flexed Dimension 67
hard drive 19
ICP Software Installer 69
IMAT 88
line interface module 52
list of components 20
LX controller cover 100
LX/250/700-user hard drive 19
Maximum Elements change 67
MX hard drive 19
MX/100-user cover 101
Paging unit (DMP) 57
Peripheral Cabinet 40
peripheral interface cards 44
peripheral slot FIM carrier 45
phones 51
power converter 43
R2 NSU 36
Software Installer Tool 69
software manually 77
software on controller 71
software on FTP server 70
SUPERSET HUBs 45
system ID module 20
system software 66
units, overview 36
IP address
DHCP settings tables 301
maintenance PC 22
prior to Rls 6.0 RTC 28
program for NSU 88
remove static from IP set 55
reserved for ASUs 29, 32
Rls 6.0 and later RTC 27
VxWorks settings 80
IP console troubleshooting 231

387

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

IP networking, CXi 297
IP Phone Analyzer
description 7
installing 248
launching 9
requirements 248
starting 248
IP phones
collecting information 179
LEDs 354
move detection 244
power consumption 377
powering features 293
settings 312
IP trunking troubleshooting 204

J
Java plug-in 93

L
Launch programming tools 8
Layer 2 switch, configuring 35
LEDs, ASU
activity, ASU II 352
alarm, ASU II 352
CIM status 352
combo card
activity, ASU II 353
alarm, ASU II 353
front photo
ASU 351
ASU II 351
Universal ASU 351
ONS card
activity, ASU II 353
alarm, ASU II 353
ONS/LS circuit
ASU 352
Universal 352
LEDs, controller
alarm
CX/CXi/MXe 266, 341

388

illustration 340
LX/MX/100/250/700-user 340
BRI framer 345
CIM 340
dual T1/E1 framer 343
FIM 338
front photo
CX/CXi 334
LX/MX/100/250/700-user 333
MXe 334
hard drive activity 335
LAN ports
LX/MX/100/25-/700-user 338
power status 335
power supply 342
RAID controller LEDs, MXe 336
rear photo
MXe with analog 335
T1/E1 combo 344
WAN/LAN ports
CX/CXi/MXe 339
LEDs, DSU
BRI card 356
PRI circuit 358
R2 circuit 360
R2 illustration 359
LEDs, in-line power
AC power 361
alarm 362
port status 362
LEDs, IP phone, LAN 354
LEDs, NSU
card status, Universal 348
CIM 346
FIM 346
front photo
BRI 350
R2 346
Universal 346
LED states
BRI 350
R2 348
Universal 347
message link, Universal 348

Index

LEDs, peripheral cabinet
BRI circuit 357
FIM 355
status 355
License and Option Selection form 25
LIM, installing 52
Line Interface Module, installing 52
LLDP-MED 31, 33, 51, 73, 74, 310,
321
Local power
actual phone consumption 377
Log in to ESM 8
Log in to IMAT 90
Logs, viewing
from remote IP 241
IP Device connectivity 244
Login/Logout Audit 242
maintenance, software 237
PSTSWLOG and XRTC 238
security audit 242
LS Circuit LEDs 352
LS/GS trunk card 282
LSMeasure Tool 250
LX/250/700-user
clock, replace 140
DSP, add/replace 109
DSP, calculate usage 105
echo canceller, add 112
echo canceller, add/replace 112
embedded T1/E1, add 110
FIM, add/replace 104
framer, add/replace 111
hard drive, install 19
hard drive, replace 126
slot locations 15
system ID, install 20
System ID, replace 133
T1/E1 combo, add/replace 111
LX/700-user
cover, remove/replace 99

M
Maintenance PC 7
connecting to controller 22
verifying connections 22
Maintenance Tools
Controller Hardware Profile 235
Device connectivity 244
IP Device detection 244
IP Phone Analyzer 248
Login/Logout Audit logs 242
LSMeasure 250
PSTSWLOG and XRTC logs 238
TCP/IP Output Streaming 241
View logs from remote IP 241
Viewing logs 237
Manual install of software 77
Manual Maker, create guides 11
Maximum Elements
install/upgrade with change 67
upgrade/install
change to default 83
change to flexed 83
to Rls 6.0 with flexed dims 84
Mitel OnLine, access 10
Mitel Options Password 11
Mitel options, setting 81
Mitel, contacting 11
order desk 11
repair department 11
Technical Support 11
Move
Detection, IP Device 244
Music on Hold
Analog 56
ASU pinout 277
Digital 56
disabled after restore 69
DNIC, Paging Unit 57
Embedded 55
embedded analog pinout (CX) 265
embedded analog pinout (MX) 262
MX
AMB, replace 134

389

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

AOB, add/replace 113
clock, replace 140
cover, remove/replace 100
DSP, add/replace 109
DSP, calculate usage 105
echo canceller, add 112
echo canceller, add/replace 112
embedded analog
Amphenol pinout 263
cabinet configuration 262
circuits/ports 262
pager connector 263
embedded T1/E1, add 110
FIM, add/replace 104
framer, add/replace 111
hard drive 19
hard drive, replace 127
slot locations 15
system ID, install 20
System ID, replace 133
T1/E1 combo, add/replace 111
MX/100-user
cover, install 101
MXe
AMB, replace 136
calculate DSP usage 105
clock, replace 140
cooling fan, replace 139
cover remove/replace 101
cover, install 102
DSP, add/replace 109
DSP, calculate usage 105
E2T, install 123
echo canceller, add 112
echo canceller, add/replace 112
embedded T1/E1, add 110
FIM, add/replace 104
framer, add/replace 111
hard drive, redundant, install 117
hard drive, redundant, replace 129
hard drive, single, replace 128
power supply, install 123
power supply, replace 139

390

rack-mount the controller 20
RAID controller 116
slot locations 16
System ID, replace 133
T1/E1 combo, add/replace 111
MXe hardware, troubleshooting 190

N
Network Services Unit. See NSU
Networking
CXi examples 323
LX, MX, CX examples 317
NSU
BRI, illustration 271
card status LEDs 348
CEPT DIP switch 272
CIM connector pinout 269
CIM LEDs 346
FIM LEDs 346
installing BRI 37
installing R2 36
installing Universal 36
L0/L1 LEDs 348
message link DIP switch 268
PRI/T1 mode connector DIP
switch 268
program IP address 88
R2, illustration 267
T1/E1 connector pin allocation 270
T1/E1 ports DIP switches defined
268
trunk type information 271
Universal, illustration 267
NSUs
BRI DIP switch settings 272

O
OPS line card 283
Peripheral Cabinet 283
OPS Manager tool 7

Index

P
Page connector pinout
embedded analog (MX) 263
Universal ASU 277
Paging unit
DMP install 57
pinout 278
Part numbers
hardware FRUs 365
software FRUs 371
Password, Mitel options 11
Peripheral Cabinet 283
AC power cord 44
backplane connectors 284
backplane wiring 284
cabling nodes to MDF 45
card layout 280
card slot pinouts 286
check card layout 41
check grounding 42
circuit cards 143
connecting fiber cables 42
cooling fans 146
E&M trunk card 281
FIM 147, 281
FIM LEDs 355
front panel 142
illustration 279
installing 40, 144
installing interface cards 44
installing power converter 43
interface cabling 283
interface cards list 279
LG/GS trunk card 282
peripheral switch controller 150
power converter 144
power distribution unit 145
programming 45
remove/install front panels 142
removing circuit card 143
SN-1 and SN-2 cards 282
Peripheral node expanded 147, 149
Peripheral resource card 156

Peripheral switch controller 150
Phone power consumption
actual local power 377
Phones
connection troubleshooting 217
debug option 170
installing 51
static IP address 54
Port usage
controller 375
Power consumption, IP phones 377
Power converter
installing 43
replacing 144
Power distribution unit, replacing 145
Power down
controller 99
power supply
install in ASU II 141
Power supply (MXe)
replacing 139
Power unit, LEDs 361, 362
Powering down
DSU 151
Peripheral Cabinet 142
Powering up
controller 22
DSU 151
Peripheral Cabinet 143
PRI card, replacing 154
PRI database convert 76
Programming
additional voice mail ports 110
Controller Modules 26
DHCP settings 29, 31
E2T via debug cable 306
Layer 2 switch 35
License and Option Selection 25
NSU IP address 88
Peripheral Cabinet 45
registering IP devices 52
Programming overview 86
Programming tools 6

391

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

ESM 6
launching 8
PSTSWLOG and XRTC Logs 238

R
R2 NSU LEDs
link status 348
Rack-mount the MXe 20
RAID controller
install 116
Reboot the system 99
Redundant power, MXe 123
Register IP devices 52
Remove
CX/CXi/MXe cover 101
LX controller cover 99
MX/100-user cover 100
Replacing
Analog Main Board (CX/CXi) 137
BRI cards 152
BRI interface assembly 153
circuit cards 143
controller components 125
cooling fan (MXe) 139
DSU formatter cards 154
DSU peripheral resource card 156
FIM 157
hard drive 125
Peripheral Cabinet cooling fan 146
Peripheral Cabinet FIM 147
Peripheral Cabinet front panel 142
Peripheral Cabinet FRUs 142
Peripheral Cabinet switch controller 150
power converter 144
power distribution unit 145
power supply (MXe) 139
PRI card 154
RTC processor 138
stratum 3 clock 140
system i-Button 133
system ID module 133
reprogram external DHCP 74

392

Reset the controller 99
Reset, software logs 237
Resiliency 168
adding 98
Restore a database 63, 81
Restoring
music on hold disabled 69
troubleshooting 186
RTC IP address
prior to Rls 6.0 28
Release 6.0 and later 27
Rls 6.0 and later 27
RTC processor, replace 138

S
Safety Considerations 98
Safety Instructions 3
Saving settings 26
Security Certificate, install 236
Services units, installing
BRI 37
R2 Installing
Universal NSU 36
Universal 36
Set compression 376
Settings
DHCP 303
IP phones 312
saving 26
System Administration Tool 312
Show Status DSP 189, 190
Show Status Redundant 190
Shutdown command 99
Slot location, controller 15
SN-1 and SN-2 cards 282
Socket Numbers, TCP/IP 241
Software
distribute to the IP Phones 75
FRU part numbers 371
installing system 66
upgrading system 66
view logs 237

Index

Software Installer Tool
AMC connection 23
description of 6
installing 69
launching 9
SSL, install 236
Start here 4
Starting
ICP Software Installer 70
Static IP address
phones 54
Stop auto-boot 99
Stratum 3 clock
replacing 140
SUPERSET HUB
installing 45
Symbols in handbook 3
System
checking 235
configurations 253
System Administration Tool
description 6
settings 312
System capacity 379
System i-Button
replacing 133
System ID module
installing 20
replacing 133
System reset
controller 99
System reset causes 237

T
T1/E1 combo
add/replace in CX/CXi (Rls 6.0)
111
add/replace Rls. 7.0 111
TCP/IP destination port
AMC connection 23
TCP/IP Output Streaming 241
TCP/IP Socket Numbers 241

TCP/IP source port
AMC connection 23
Technical support
before you call 179
contacting 11
Telephones
installing 51
registering IP 52
set static IP address 54
user guides 11
telephones 51
Tools
Desktop 6
Embedded System Management 6
ESM 6
Group Administration 6
IMAT 6
IP Phone Analyzer 7
launching 8
launching IMAT 8
launching IP Phone Analyzer 9
launching Software Installer 9
LSMeasure 250
OPS Manager 7
Software Installer 6
System Administration 6
Tools and equipment 4
Troubleshooting
alarms 189
audio file downloads 188
backup/restore 186
CXi-specific issues 207
Digital trunking 203
DSP status command 189, 190
Embedded BRI 193
Embedded PRI 191
Embedded T1/D4 191
ESM 183
generic steps 181
IP console 231
IP phone information 179
IP phone registration 210
IP trunking 204

393

3300 ICP Technician’s Handbook

MXe hardware status command
190
phone audio quality 222
phone boot sequence 225
phone connection problems 217
reset causes 237
software 183
software backup/restore 186
software install/upgrade 183
software installation 183
software upgrading 183
Troubleshooting Tools
List 168
Phone Debug option 170
Viewing alarms 182
Turning off the controller 99
Turning on the controller 22

U
Universal ASU
Music on Hold pinout 277
Universal NSU LEDs
link status 347
Upgrading
adding compression channels 105
adding DSP module 105
adding TDM devices 105
controller to 300/450 MHz 102
Flexed Dimension 67
hardware overview 98

394

IP sets software 82
Java plug-in 93
Maximum Elements change 67
music disabled after restore 69
restoring database 81
setting options 81
software/hardware options 66
starting ICP Software Installer 70
system software 66, 72, 85
voice mail ports 105
User capacity, adding 103
User guides, create 11

V
Verifying
connections 22
controller hardware profile 235
controller operation 34
Voice mail
programming additional ports 110
upgrading ports 105

W
What you received 4
Windows 2000
DHCP server 308, 310
FTP settings 328
Windows NT
DHCP settings 307

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2006:05:05 09:30:14Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 6.0
Modify Date                     : 2006:05:05 10:23:24-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:05:05 10:23:24-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 3300_R70_THB.book
Creator                         : theriaul
Document ID                     : uuid:b9a730f9-39fe-433a-952c-beaa88781e12
Instance ID                     : uuid:89a3aba6-7d30-4915-a48f-4936a774f171
Page Count                      : 404
Author                          : theriaul

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

3300_R70_THB Mitel 3300 ICP Rel 7 0 Tech Handbook

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation